The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutE-09 Attachment Traffic Management System TMS Contract Documents CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT -i- TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page NOTICE INVITING BIDS ............................................................................................................. 9 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ................................................................................................ 12 ARTICLE 1. SECURING DOCUMENTS ........................................................................... 12 ARTICLE 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......................... 12 ARTICLE 3. INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS ............................ 12 ARTICLE 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE ............................................................................. 13 ARTICLE 5. ADDENDA .................................................................................................... 13 ARTICLE 6. ALTERNATE BIDS ....................................................................................... 13 ARTICLE 7. COMPLETION OF BID FORMS ................................................................... 13 ARTICLE 8. MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS .......................................................................... 14 ARTICLE 9. SUBCONTRACTORS ................................................................................... 14 ARTICLE 10. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 14 ARTICLE 11. BID GUARANTEE (BOND) ......................................................................... 14 ARTICLE 12. IRAN CONTRACTING ACT OF 2010 ......................................................... 15 ARTICLE 13. NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION ............................................................. 15 ARTICLE 14. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION ..................................................................................................... 15 ARTICLE 15. BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM ................................. 15 ARTICLE 16. WORKERS' COMPENSATION CERTIFICATION ....................................... 15 ARTICLE 17. SIGNING OF BIDS ..................................................................................... 16 ARTICLE 18. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS ............................................................... 16 ARTICLE 19. OPENING OF BIDS .................................................................................... 16 ARTICLE 20. WITHDRAWAL OF BID ............................................................................... 17 ARTICLE 21. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID .................................. 17 ARTICLE 22. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITY ................................................................. 17 ARTICLE 23. PREVAILING WAGES ................................................................................ 17 ARTICLE 24. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS ............... 18 ARTICLE 25. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. 18 ARTICLE 26. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 18 ARTICLE 27. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND FEES ............................................................................................ 18 ARTICLE 28. PERMIT AND INSPECTION FEE ALLOWANCE ........................................ 18 ARTICLE 29. FILING OF BID PROTESTS ....................................................................... 19 ARTICLE 30. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BID ......................................................... 19 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page -ii- NOTICE INVITING BIDS ARTICLE 31. AWARD PROCESS .................................................................................... 19 ARTICLE 32. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT .................................................................... 20 ARTICLE 33. QUESTIONS ............................................................................................... 20 BID FORMS .............................................................................................................................. 21 ARTICLE 1. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER ................................................................. 33 ARTICLE 2. LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (BACKLOG) .............................................. 36 ARTICLE 3. LIST OF COMPLETED PROJECTS – LAST THREE YEARS ....................... 37 ARTICLE 4. EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE ................................................................................................... 38 ARTICLE 5. VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION ............................................................... 39 CONTRACT .............................................................................................................................. 44 BOND FORMS .......................................................................................................................... 48 GENERAL CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................... 57 ARTICLE 1. DEFINED TERMS ........................................................................................ 57 ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 61 ARTICLE 3. PRECONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION .................................................................................................. 62 ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: COPIES & MAINTENANCE ............................ 62 ARTICLE 5. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK ............................................................................................................... 62 ARTICLE 6. MOBILIZATION ............................................................................................ 63 ARTICLE 7. EXISTENCE OF UTILITIES AT THE WORK SITE ........................................ 64 ARTICLE 8. SOILS INVESTIGATIONS ............................................................................ 64 ARTICLE 9. CONTRACTOR’S SUPERVISION ................................................................ 65 ARTICLE 10. WORKERS ................................................................................................. 65 ARTICLE 11. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS .............................................................. 65 ARTICLE 12. SUBCONTRACTS ...................................................................................... 66 ARTICLE 13. VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY ...................................... 66 ARTICLE 14. REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION ............................................................. 66 ARTICLE 15. SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................... 68 ARTICLE 16. SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................. 68 ARTICLE 17. MATERIALS ............................................................................................... 68 ARTICLE 18. PERMITS AND LICENSES ......................................................................... 69 ARTICLE 19. TRENCHES ................................................................................................ 69 ARTICLE 20. TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................................. 70 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page -iii- NOTICE INVITING BIDS ARTICLE 21. DIVERSION OF RECYCLABLE WASTE MATERIALS ............................... 71 ARTICLE 22. REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ................................................ 71 ARTICLE 23. SANITARY FACILITIES .............................................................................. 72 ARTICLE 24. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL ...................................................................... 72 ARTICLE 25. LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING ........................................................ 72 ARTICLE 26. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ....................................................................... 72 ARTICLE 27. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY .............................................. 73 ARTICLE 28. CONTRACTOR’S MEANS AND METHODS ............................................... 73 ARTICLE 29. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES ......................................................... 73 ARTICLE 30. HOURS OF WORK ..................................................................................... 73 ARTICLE 31. PAYROLL RECORDS; LABOR COMPLIANCE .......................................... 74 ARTICLE 32. PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES ............................................................. 76 ARTICLE 33. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION ................................... 76 ARTICLE 34. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES ........................................................... 77 ARTICLE 35. NONDISCRIMINATION/EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY ............. 77 ARTICLE 36. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS ............... 78 ARTICLE 37. LABOR/EMPLOYMENT SAFETY ............................................................... 78 ARTICLE 38. INSURANCE ............................................................................................... 79 ARTICLE 39. FORM AND PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE .............................. 82 ARTICLE 40. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ......................... 83 ARTICLE 41. COST BREAKDOWN AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES .................................. 84 ARTICLE 42. PROGRESS ESTIMATES AND PAYMENT ................................................ 84 ARTICLE 43. SECURITIES FOR MONEY WITHHELD..................................................... 86 ARTICLE 44. CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK. ................................................................ 86 ARTICLE 45. FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT ...................................................... 98 ARTICLE 46. OCCUPANCY ............................................................................................. 99 ARTICLE 47. INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................... 99 ARTICLE 48. PROCEDURE FOR RESOLVING DISPUTES .......................................... 100 ARTICLE 49. CITY’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT .......................................... 104 ARTICLE 50. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE OF WORK ............................................ 106 ARTICLE 51. DOCUMENT RETENTION & EXAMINATION ........................................... 109 ARTICLE 52. SEPARATE CONTRACTS ........................................................................ 109 ARTICLE 53. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF ......................................................... 109 ARTICLE 54. NOTICE OF THIRD PARTY CLAIMS ........................................................ 110 TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) Page -iv- NOTICE INVITING BIDS ARTICLE 55. STATE LICENSE BOARD NOTICE .......................................................... 110 ARTICLE 56. INTEGRATION ......................................................................................... 110 ARTICLE 57. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................ 110 ARTICLE 58. CHANGE IN NAME AND NATURE OF CONTRACTOR’S LEGAL ENTITY 110 ARTICLE 59. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS ............................................... 110 ARTICLE 60. PROHIBITED INTERESTS ....................................................................... 111 ARTICLE 61. CONTROLLING LAW ............................................................................... 111 ARTICLE 62. JURISDICTION; VENUE ........................................................................... 111 ARTICLE 63. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ..................................................................... 111 ARTICLE 64. PATENTS ................................................................................................. 111 ARTICLE 65. OWNERSHIP OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ......................................... 111 ARTICLE 66. NOTICE OF TAXABLE POSSESSORY INTEREST ................................. 112 ARTICLE 67. SURVIVAL OF OBLIGATIONS ................................................................. 112 SPECIAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................. 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................... 4 -9- NOTICE INVITING BIDS NOTICE INVITING BIDS NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City Council of the City of Azusa (“City”) invites and will receive sealed Bids up to but not later than May 14, 2019, 5:00 PM at the office of the City Clerk, located at 213 E. Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, CA 91702, for the furnishing to City of all labor, equipment, materials, tools, services, transportation, permits, utilities, and all other items necessary for the Traffic Management System Project (the “Project”). At said time, Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at the City Office. Bids received after said time shall be returned unopened. Bids shall be valid for a period of 90 calendar days after the Bid opening date. SCOPE OF WORK: The work to be performed or executed under these specifications consists of furnishing all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals as required by the contract documents to construct the above stated project. It is the intent of this contract to have the contractor perform the Traffic Management System Project, and other appurtenances in accordance with Contract No. __________ Bids must be submitted on the City’s Bid Forms. Bidders may obtain a digital copy of the Contract Documents from the Engineering Division at: 213 E. Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, CA 91702, at a five dollar charge ($5.00). A non-refundable charge of Ten Dollars ($10.00) will be required of any bidder who requests that the Contract Documents be mailed within California (costs for out-of-state mailings will be higher). To the extent required by section 20103.7 of the Public Contract Code, upon request from a contractor plan room service, the City shall provide an electronic copy of the Contract Documents at no charge to the contractor plan room. It is the responsibility of each prospective bidder to download and print all Bid Documents for review and to verify the completeness of Bid Documents before submitting a bid. Any Addenda will be posted on the City of Azusa’s website at www.ci.azusa.ca.us. It is the responsibility of each prospective bidder to check the City of Azusa’s website on a daily basis through the close of bids for any applicable addenda or updates. The City does not assume any liability or responsibility based on any defective or incomplete copying, excerpting, scanning, faxing, downloading or printing of the Bid Documents. Information on www.ci.azusa.ca.us may change without notice to prospective bidders. Each Bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier’s check, or Bid Bond secured from a surety company satisfactory to the City Council, the amount of which shall not be less than ten percent (10%) of the submitted Total Bid Price, made payable to City of Azusa as bid security. The bid security shall be provided as a guarantee that within five (5) working days after the City provides the successful bidder the Notice of Award, the successful Bidder will enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance. The bid security will be declared forfeited if the successful Bidder fails to comply within said time. No interest will be paid on funds deposited with City. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference is scheduled for April 15, 2019 at 9:00am to review the Project's existing conditions at the City of Azusa Public Works Conference Room located at 809 N Angeleno Avenue, Azusa, CA 91702. Representatives of the City and consulting engineers, if any, will be present. Questions asked by Bidders at the Pre-Bid Conference not specifically addressed within the Contract Documents shall be answered in writing, and shall be sent to all Bidders present at the Pre-Bid Conference. -10- NOTICE INVITING BIDS The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Faithful Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price. Each bond shall be in the forms set forth herein, shall be secured from a surety company that meets all State of California bonding requirements, as defined in California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120, and that is a California admitted surety insurer. Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the successful Bidder may substitute certain securities for funds withheld by City to ensure its performance under the contract. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1773, City has obtained the prevailing rate of per diem wages and the prevailing wage rate for holiday and overtime work applicable in Los Angeles County from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations for each craft, classification, or type of worker needed to execute this contract. A copy of these prevailing wage rates may be obtained via the internet at: www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr/ In addition, a copy of the prevailing rate of per diem wages is available at the City’s Engineering Division and shall be made available to interested parties upon request. The successful bidder shall post a copy of the prevailing wage rates at each job site. It shall be mandatory upon the Bidder to whom the Contract is awarded, and upon any subcontractors, to comply with all Labor Code provisions, which include but are not limited to the payment of not less than the said specified prevailing wage rates to all workers employed by them in the execution of the Contract, employment of apprentices, hours of labor and debarment of contractors and subcontractors. Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all contractors and subcontractors that wish to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, or enter into a contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. No Bid will be accepted nor any contract entered into without proof of the contractor’s and subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. If awarded a contract, the Bidder and its subcontractors, of any tier, shall maintain active registration with the Department of Industrial Relations for the duration of the Project. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the contractor registration requirements mandated by Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 shall not apply to work performed on a public works project that is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption specified in Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1. This Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. In bidding on this Project, it shall be the Bidder’s sole responsibility to evaluate and include the cost of complying with all labor compliance requirements under this contract and applicable law in its Bid. Unless otherwise provided in the Instructions for Bidders, each Bidder shall be a licensed contractor pursuant to sections 7000 et seq. of the Business and Professions Code in the following classification(s) throughout the time it submits its Bid and for the duration of the contract: Class “A” General and “C-10”. Substitution requests shall be made within 35 calendar days after the award of the contract. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 3400(b), the City may make findings designating that certain additional materials, methods or services by specific brand or trade name other than those listed in the Standard Specifications be used for the Project. Such findings, if any, as well -11- NOTICE INVITING BIDS as the materials, methods or services and their specific brand or trade names that must be used for the Project may be found in the Special Conditions. City shall award the contract for the Project to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder as determined by the City from the Base Bid alone. City reserves the right to reject any or all bids or to waive any irregularities or informalities in any bids or in the bidding process. For further information, contact Robert Delgadillo, P.E. – Assistant Director of Public Works, at rdelgadillo@azusaca.gov or (626) 812-5248 before May 7, 2019. No formal RFI’s will be accepted after this date and time. END OF NOTICE INVITING BIDS -12- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1. SECURING DOCUMENTS Bids must be submitted to the City on the Bid Forms which are a part of the Bid Package for the Project. Bid and Contract Documents may be obtained from from the Engineering Division at: 213 E. Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, CA 91702, as specified in the Notice Inviting Bids. Prospective bidders are encouraged to telephone in advance to determine the availability of Contract Documents. Any charge for the Contract Documents is stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. The City may also make the Contract Documents available for review at one or more plan rooms, as indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Please Note: Prospective Bidders who choose to review the Contract Documents at a plan room must contact the City to obtain the required Contract Documents if they decide to submit a bid for the Project. Addenda, if any, issued during the bid period will be sent only to those contractors who have obtained documents from the City. Any Addenda will be posted on the City’s website. Failure to acknowledge addenda may make a bid nonresponsive and not eligible for award of the contract. ARTICLE 2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS At its own expense and prior to submitting its Bid, each Bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint itself with the conditions relating to the construction and labor required so that the Bidder may fully understand the work, including but not limited to difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the work under the contract. Each Bidder shall carefully examine the Drawings, and shall read the Specifications, Contract, and all other documents referenced herein. Each Bidder shall also determine the local conditions which may in any way affect the performance of the work, including local tax structure, contractors’ licensing requirements, availability of required insurance, the prevailing wages and other relevant cost factors, shall familiarize itself with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and codes affecting the performance of the work, including the cost of permits and licenses required for the work, and shall make such surveys and investigations, including investigations of subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site or where work is to be performed as may be required. Bidders are responsible for consulting the standards referenced in the Contract. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any contract documents, forms, instruments, addenda, or other documents, or to visit the site and acquaint itself with conditions there existing shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation with respect to its Bid or to the contract and no relief for error or omission will be given except as required under State law. The submission of a Bid shall be taken as conclusive evidence of compliance with this Article. ARTICLE 3. INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS Prospective Bidders unclear as to the true meaning of any part of the Drawings, Specifications or other proposed contract documents may submit to the Engineer of the City a written request for interpretation. The prospective Bidder submitting the request is responsible for prompt delivery. Interpretation of the Drawings, Specifications or other proposed contract documents will be made only by a written addendum duly issued and a copy of such addenda will be mailed or delivered to each prospective Bidder who has purchased a set of Drawings and -13- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Specifications. The City will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretations of the proposed documents. If a Prospective Bidders becomes aware of any errors or omissions in any part of the Contract Documents, it is the obligation of the Prospective Bidder to promptly bring it to the attention of the City. ARTICLE 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE A mandatory Pre-Bid Conference is scheduled for April 15th, 2019 at 9:00am to review the Project's existing conditions at the City of Azusa Public Works Conference Room located at 809 N Angeleno Avenue, Azusa, CA 91702. Representatives of the City and consulting engineers, if any, will be present. Questions asked by Bidders at the Pre-Bid Conference not specifically addressed within the Contract Documents shall be answered in writing, and shall be sent to all Bidders present at the Pre-Bid Conference. ARTICLE 5. ADDENDA The City reserves the right to revise the Contract Documents prior to the Bid opening date. Revisions, if any, shall be made by written Addenda. All Addenda issued by the City shall be included in the Bid and made part of the Contract Documents. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104.5, if the City issues an Addendum which includes material changes to the Project less than 72 hours prior to the deadline for submission of Bids, the City will extend the deadline for submission of Bids. The City may determine, in its sole discretion, whether an Addendum warrants postponement of the Bid submission date. Each prospective Bidder shall provide City a name, address, email address, and facsimile number to which Addenda may be sent, as well as a telephone number by which the City can contact the Bidder. Copies of Addenda will be furnished by email, facsimile, first class mail, express mail or other proper means of delivery without charge to all parties who have obtained a copy of the Contract Documents and provided such current information. Please Note: Bidders are responsible for ensuring that they have received any and all Addenda. To this end, each Bidder should contact the Engineering Division to verify that it has received all Addenda issued, if any, prior to the Bid opening. The Bidder shall indicate the Addenda received prior to bidding in the space provided in the Bid Form. Failure to indicate all Addenda may be sufficient cause for rejecting the Bid. ARTICLE 6. ALTERNATE BIDS If alternate bid items are called for in the Contract Documents, the time required for completion of the alternate bid items has already been factored into the Contract duration and no additional Contract time will be awarded for any of the alternate bid items. The City may elect to include one or more of the alternate bid items, or to otherwise remove certain work from the Project scope of work. Accordingly, each bidder must ensure that each bid item contains a proportionate share of profit, overhead, and other costs or expenses which will be incurred by the bidder. ARTICLE 7. COMPLETION OF BID FORMS Bids shall only be prepared using copies of the Bid Forms which are included in the Contract Documents. The use of substitute Bid Forms other than clear and correct photocopies of those provided by the City will not be permitted. Bids shall be executed by an authorized signatory as described in these Instructions to Bidders. In addition, Bidders shall fill in all blank spaces (including inserting “N/A” where applicable), and initial all interlineations, alterations, or erasures to the Bid Forms. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the -14- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Bid Forms nor make substitutions thereon. USE OF BLACK OR BLUE INK, INDELIBLE PENCIL, OR A TYPEWRITER IS REQUIRED. Deviations in the Bid Forms may result in the Bid being deemed non-responsive. ARTICLE 8. MODIFICATIONS OF BIDS Each Bidder shall submit its Bid in strict conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unauthorized additions, modifications, revisions, conditions, limitations, exclusions or provisions attached to a Bid may render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. Bidders shall not delete, modify, or supplement the printed matter on the Bid Forms, or make substitutions thereon. Oral, telephonic and electronic modifications will not be considered. ARTICLE 9. SUBCONTRACTORS Bidder shall set forth the name, address of the place of business, and contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work, labor, furnish materials or render services to the bidder on said contract and each subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to bidder, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the Work described in the Drawings and Specifications in an amount in excess of one half of one percent (0.5%) of the total bid price, and shall indicate the portion of the work to be done by such subcontractor in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 4104. ARTICLE 10. LICENSING REQUIREMENTS Pursuant to Business and Professions Code Section 7028.15 and Public Contract Code Section 3300, all bidders must possess proper licenses for performance of this Contract. Subcontractors must possess the appropriate licenses for each specialty subcontracted. Pursuant to Business and Professions Code Section 7028.5, the City shall consider any bid submitted by a contractor not currently licensed in accordance with state law and pursuant to the requirements found in the Contract Documents to be nonresponsive, and the City shall reject the Bid. The City shall have the right to request, and Bidders shall provide within ten (10) calendar days, evidence satisfactory to the City of all valid license(s) currently held by that Bidder and each of the Bidder’s subcontractors, before awarding the Contract. Notwithstanding anything contained herein, if the Work involves federal funds, the Contractor shall be properly licensed by the time the Contract is awarded, pursuant to the provisions of Public Contract Code section 20103.5. ARTICLE 11. BID GUARANTEE (BOND) Each bid shall be accompanied by: (a) cash; (b) a certified or cashier’s check made payable to City of Azusa; or (c) a Bid Bond secured from a surety company satisfactory to the City Council, the amount of which shall not be less than ten percent (10%) of the Total Bid Price, made payable to City of Azusa as bid security. Personal sureties and unregistered surety companies are unacceptable. The surety insurer shall be California admitted surety insurer, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120. The bid security shall be provided as a guarantee that within ten (10) working days after the City provides the successful bidder the Notice of Award, the successful bidder will enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance. The bid security will be declared forfeited if the successful bidder fails to comply within said time, and City may enter into a contract with the next lowest responsive responsible bidder, or may call for new bids. No interest shall be paid on funds deposited with -15- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the City. City will return the security accompanying the bids of all unsuccessful bidders no later than 60 calendar days after award of the contract. ARTICLE 12. IRAN CONTRACTING ACT OF 2010 In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 2200 et seq., the City requires that any person that submits a bid or proposal or otherwise proposes to enter into or renew a contract with the City with respect to goods or services of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, certify at the time the bid is submitted or the contract is renewed, that the person is not identified on a list created pursuant to subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203 as a person engaging in investment activities in Iran described in subdivision (a) of Public Contract Code Section 2202.5, or as a person described in subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2202.5, as applicable. The form of such Iran Contracting Certificate is included with the bid package and must be signed and dated under penalty of perjury. ARTICLE 13. NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION Bidders on all public works contracts are required to submit a declaration of noncollusion with their bid. This form is included with the bid package and must be signed and dated under penalty of perjury. ARTICLE 14. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION CERTIFICATION Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all contractors and subcontractors that wish to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, or enter into a contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. No bid will be accepted nor any contract entered into without proof of the contractor’s and subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. If awarded a contract, the bidder and its subcontractors, of any tier, shall maintain active registration with the Department of Industrial Relations for the duration of the Project. To this end, Bidder shall sign and submit with its Bid the Public Works Contractor Registration Certification on the form provided, attesting to the facts contained therein. Failure to submit this form may render the bid non-responsive. In addition, each Bidder shall provide the registration number for each listed subcontractor in the space provided in the Designation of Subcontractors form. ARTICLE 15. BIDDER INFORMATION AND EXPERIENCE FORM Each Bidder shall complete the questionnaire provided herein and shall submit the questionnaire along with its Bid. Failure to provide all information requested within the questionnaire along with the Bid may cause the bid to be rejected as non-responsive. The City reserves the right to reject any Bid if an investigation of the information submitted does not satisfy the Engineer that the Bidder is qualified to properly carry out the terms of the contract. ARTICLE 16. WORKERS' COMPENSATION CERTIFICATION In accordance with the provisions of Labor Code Section 3700, Contractor shall secure the payment of compensation to its employees. Contractor shall sign and file with the City the following certificate prior to performing the work under this Contract: -16- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code, which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract. The form of such Workers' Compensation Certificate is included as part of this document. ARTICLE 17. SIGNING OF BIDS All Bids submitted shall be executed by the Bidder or its authorized representative. Bidders may be asked to provide evidence in the form of an authenticated resolution of its Board of Directors or a Power of Attorney evidencing the capacity of the person signing the Bid to bind the Bidder to each Bid and to any Contract arising therefrom. If a Bidder is a joint venture or partnership, it may be asked to submit an authenticated Power of Attorney executed by each joint venturer or partner appointing and designating one of the joint venturers or partners as a management sponsor to execute the Bid on behalf of Bidder. Only that joint venturer or partner shall execute the Bid. The Power of Attorney shall also: (1) authorize that particular joint venturer or partner to act for and bind Bidder in all matters relating to the Bid; and (2) provide that each venturer or partner shall be jointly and severally liable for any and all of the duties and obligations of Bidder assumed under the Bid and under any Contract arising therefrom. The Bid shall be executed by the designated joint venturer or partner on behalf of the joint venture or partnership in its legal name. ARTICLE 18. SUBMISSION OF SEALED BIDS Once the Bid and supporting documents have been completed and signed as set forth herein, they shall be placed, along with the Bid Guarantee and other required materials, in a sealed envelope, addressed and delivered or mailed, postage prepaid, to the Engineering Department of the City before the time and day set for the receipt of bids. The envelope shall bear the title of the work and the name of the bidder. No oral or telephonic bids will be considered. No forms transmitted via the internet, e-mail, facsimile, or any other electronic means will be considered unless specifically authorized by the City as provided herein. Bids received after the time and day set for the receipt of bids shall be returned to the bidder unopened. The envelope shall also contain the following in the lower left-hand corner thereof: Bid of (Bidder’s Name) for the TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT Only where expressly permitted in the Notice Inviting Bids may bidders submit their bids via electronic transmission pursuant to Public Contract Code sections 1600 and 1601. Any acceptable method(s) of electronic transmission shall be stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. City may reject any bid not strictly complying with City’s designated methods for delivery. ARTICLE 19. OPENING OF BIDS At the time and place set for the opening and reading of bids, or any time thereafter, each and every bid received prior to the time and day set for the receipt of bids will be publicly opened and read. The City will leave unopened any Bid received after the specified date and time, and any such unopened Bid will be returned to the bidder. It is the bidder’s sole responsibility to ensure that its Bid is received as specified. Bids may be submitted earlier than the date(s) and -17- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS time(s) indicated. The public reading of each bid will include the following information: A. The name and business location of the bidder. B. The nature and amount of the bid security furnished by bidder. C. The bid amount. Bidders or their representatives and other interested persons may be present at the opening of the bids. The City may, in its sole discretion, elect to postpone the opening of the submitted Bids. The City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid. ARTICLE 20. WITHDRAWAL OF BID Any bid may be withdrawn either personally or by written request, incurring no penalty, at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. Requests to withdraw bids shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted until the time and day set for the receipt of bids, provided that resubmitted bids are in conformance with the instructions herein. Bids may be withdrawn after bid opening only by providing written notice to City within five (5) working days of the bid opening and in compliance with Public Contract Code Section 5100 et seq., or as otherwise may be allowed with the consent of the City. ARTICLE 21. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID No Bidder shall be allowed to make, file or be interested in more than one bid for the same work unless alternate bids are specifically called for. A person, firm or corporation that has submitted a sub-proposal to a Bidder, or that has quoted prices of materials to a Bidder, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a sub-proposal or quoting prices to other bidders. No person, firm, corporation, or other entity may submit a sub-proposal to a Bidder, or quote prices of materials to a Bidder, when also submitting a prime Bid on the same Project. ARTICLE 22. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITY The Contract Documents call for monthly progress payments based upon the percentage of the Work completed. The City will retain a percentage of each progress payment as provided by the Contract Documents. At the request and expense of the successful Bidder, the City will substitute securities for the amount so retained in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300. ARTICLE 23. PREVAILING WAGES The City has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in the locality in which this work is to be performed for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract. These rates are available at the Engineering Division’s Office of the City or may be obtained online at http://www.dir.ca.gov. -18- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Bidders are advised that a copy of these rates must be posted by the successful Bidder at the job site(s). ARTICLE 24. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS In accordance with the provisions of the Labor Code, contractors or subcontractors may not perform work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public project pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1777.1 or 1777.7. Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract. Any public money that is paid to a debarred subcontractor by the Contractor for the Project shall be returned to the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the Project. ARTICLE 25. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Prior to commencing work, the successful bidder shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 26. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND REQUIREMENTS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a Labor and Material Payment Bond and a Faithful Performance Bond each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price. Each bond shall be secured from a surety company that meets all State of California bonding requirements, as defined in California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120 and is admitted by the State of California. Each bond shall be accompanied, upon the request of City, with all documents required by California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.660 to the extent required by law. All bonding and insurance requirements shall be completed and submitted to City within ten (10) working days from the date the City provides the successful bidder with the Notice of Award. ARTICLE 27. SALES AND OTHER APPLICABLE TAXES, PERMITS, LICENSES AND FEES Contractor and its subcontractors performing work under this Contract will be required to pay California sales tax and other applicable taxes, and to pay for permits, licenses and fees required by the agencies with authority in the jurisdiction in which the Work will be located, unless otherwise expressly provided by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 28. PERMIT AND INSPECTION FEE ALLOWANCE Notwithstanding anything contained herein, the Bid Form contains an allowance for the Contractor’s cost of acquiring traffic control permits and for construction inspection fees that may be charged to the Contractor by the Agency of Jurisdiction. The allowance is included within the Bid Form to eliminate the need by bidders to research or estimate the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees prior to submitting a bid. The allowance is specifically intended to account for the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees charged by the local Agency of Jurisdiction only. No other costs payable by Contractor to the Agency of Jurisdiction are included within the allowance. -19- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 29. FILING OF BID PROTESTS Bidders may file a “protest” of a Bid with the City Clerk’s Office. In order for a Bidder’s protest to be considered valid, the protest must: A. Be filed in writing within five (5) calendar days after the bid opening date; B. Clearly identify the specific irregularity or accusation; C. Clearly identify the specific City staff determination or recommendation being protested; D. Specify in detail the grounds for protest and the facts supporting the protest; and E. Include all relevant, supporting documentation with the protest at time of filing. If the protest does not comply with each of these requirements, the City may reject the protest without further review. If the protest is timely and complies with the above requirements, the City Clerk, or other designated City staff member, shall review the protest, any response from the challenged Bidder(s), and all other relevant information. The City Clerk’s Office will provide a written decision to the protestor. The procedure and time limits set forth in this Article are mandatory and are the sole and exclusive remedy in the event of a Bid protest. Failure to comply with these procedures shall constitute a failure to exhaust administrative remedies and a waiver of any right to further pursue the Bid protest, including filing a Government Code Claim or legal proceedings. ARTICLE 30. BASIS OF AWARD; BALANCED BID The City shall award the Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder submitting a responsive Bid. The lowest Bid will be determined on the basis of the Total Bid Price. The City may reject any Bid which, in its opinion when compared to other Bids received or to the City’s internal estimates, does not accurately reflect the cost to perform the Work. The City may reject as non-responsive any Bid which unevenly weights or allocates costs, including but not limited to overhead and profit to one or more particular bid items. ARTICLE 31. AWARD PROCESS Once all Bids are opened and reviewed to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, the City Council may award the contract. The apparent successful Bidder should begin to prepare the following documents: (1) the Performance Bond; (2) the Payment Bond; and (3) the required insurance certificates and endorsements. Once the City notifies the Bidder of the award, the Bidder will have ten (10) working days from the date of this notification to execute the Contract and supply the City with all of the required documents and certifications. Once the City receives all of the properly drafted and executed documents and certifications from the Bidder, the City shall conduct a pre-construction conference with the Contractor and its subcontractors, and issue a Notice to Proceed to that Bidder. The Contract time will begin to run from the date of the Notice to Proceed. -20- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 32. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT As required herein the Bidder to whom an award is made shall execute the Contract in the amount determined by the Contract Documents. The City may require appropriate evidence that the persons executing the Contract are duly empowered to do so. The Contract and bond forms to be executed by the successful Bidder are included within these Specifications and shall not be detached. ARTICLE 33. QUESTIONS Questions regarding this Notice Inviting Bids may be directed to Robert Delgadillo, P.E. – Assistant Director of Public Works, at rdelgadillo@azusaca.gov or (626) 812-5248. No other members of the City’s staff or City Council should be contacted about this procurement during the bidding process. Any and all inquiries and comments regarding this Bid must be communicated in writing, unless otherwise instructed by the City. The City may, in its sole discretion, disqualify any Bidder who engages in any prohibited communications. -21- BID FORMS BID FORMS 1.1 Bid. Bids will be received at the City of Azusa, 213 E. Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, CA 91702, until May 14, 2019, 5:00pm. NAME OF BIDDER: ______________________________________________ City of Azusa 213 E. Foothill Boulevard Azusa, CA 91702 The undersigned hereby declare that we have carefully examined the location of the proposed Work, and have read and examined the Contract Documents, including all plans, specifications, and all addenda, if any for the following Project: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT We hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and services, and to discharge all duties and obligations necessary and required to perform and complete the Project, as described and in strict conformity with the Drawings, and these Specifications for TOTAL BID PRICE indicated herein. The undersigned acknowledges receipt, understanding, and full consideration of the following addenda to the Contract Documents: Addenda No. ________________________________________________ 1. Attached is the required Bid Guarantee in the amount of not less than 10% of the Total Bid Price. 2. Attached is the completed Designation of Subcontractors form. 3. Attached is the fully executed Noncollusion Declaration form. 4. Attached is the completed Iran Contracting Act Certification form. 5. Attached is the completed Public Works Contractor Registration Certification form. 6. Attached is the completed Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation form. 7. Attached is the completed Bidder Information and Experience form. [**FORMAT MAY BE MODIFIED TO MEET PROJECT REQUIREMENTS**] -22- BID FORMS A. BID SCHEDULE ITEM NO. ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT OF MEASURE QTY. UNIT PRICE ITEM COST 1. Mobilization/Demobilzation LS 1 2. Traffic Control LS 1 3. Testing and Documentation LS 1 4. Communication System Improvements LS 1 5. Traffic signal System Improvements LS 1 6. Signing & Striping Improvements LS 1 7. Civil (Street) Improvements LS 1 8. Traffic Management Center Improvements LS 1 Optional Bid Items 9. Conduit Trenching (Optional) LS 1 10. FleX Traffic Signal Controller with Omni eX Software (Optional) LS 1 Bid Item No. 1 – Mobilization/Demobilization Under item 1, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Mobilization shall consist of advanced preparatory work and construction operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site; for the establishment of field office, buildings and other facilities necessary for work on the project; obtaining and providing to the Engineer all permits, licenses, insurance, and bonds; establish utility services; furnishing of construction schedule, contract price breakdown and submittal schedules; and for all other work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on the various contract items on the project site. -23- BID FORMS Demobilization shall include removal of all temporary facilities, final clean up, restorations and submittal of final documents as required by the Specifications herein and the Contract documents. Bid Item No. 2 – Traffic Control Under item 2, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Traffic control shall consist of providing temporary traffic control during construction and includes signage, striping, delineators, barricades and other traffic control devices for control and direction of both vehicular and pedestrian traffic for the duration of the project. Traffic control shall conform to the California Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD), latest edition. Bid Item No. 3 – Testing and Documenation Under item 3, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Testing and documentation shall consist of providing the necessary testing and documenting required for approval and acceptance of the production, installation, and operation of the materials as shown and specified in the project plans and specifications. Bid Item No. 4 – Communication System Improvements Under item 4, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Communication system improvements shall consist of furnishing, installing and/or removing of fiber optic cable, fiber optic patch panels, fiber optic splice enclosures, Ethernet switches, surge protectors, conduits, pull boxes, vaults, closed circuit television systems, wireless interconnect systems and other auxiliary devices as shown on the project plans and specifications. Conduit installation method for this bid item shall be boring. Bid Item No. 5 – Traffic Signal System Improvements Under item 5, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Traffic signal system improvements shall consist of furnishing, installing and/or removing of traffic signal controller cabinets, signal poles, mast arms, luminaires, vehicle heads, pedestrian heads, pedestrian push buttons, pull boxes, conduit, video detection systems, street name signs, and other auxiliary devices as shown on the project plans and specifications. The FleX traffic signal controllers shall not be included in this bid item. Signs, striping, raised pavement makers, and pavement markings shown and called out on the traffic signal project plans shall be included in this bid item. Conduit installation method for this bid item shall be boring. Bid Item No. 6 – Signing and Striping Improvements Under item 6, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. -24- BID FORMS Signing and striping improvements shall consist of furnishing, installing and/or removing of signs, striping, raised pavement markers, pavement markings, pedestrian barricades, and other auxiliary devices shown on the signing and striping project plans and specifications. Bid Item No. 7 – Civil (Street) Improvements Under item 7, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Civil (street) improvements shall consist of furnishing, installing, and/or removing of concrete, asphalt, hardscape, landscape, and other auxiliary items as shown on the street improvement and curb ramp project plans and specifications. Bid Item No. 8 – Traffic Management Center Improvements Under item 8, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Traffic management center improvements shall consist of furnishing, installing, and/or removing of architectural elements, HVAC systems, electrical systems, pavement, signs, striping, furniture, and auxiliary devices and equpement as shown on the traffic management center project plans and specifications. Bid Item No. 9 – Conduit Trenching (Optional Bid Item) Under item 9, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. Conduit trenching shall consist of installation of underground conduits as shown on the project plans by trench and backfill. Bid Item No. 10 – FleX Traffic Signal Controller with Omni eX Software (Optional Bid Item) Under item 10, the unit price bid per lump sum shall include furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for performing the work complete and in place. FleX traffic signal controller with Omni eX software shall consist of furnishing and installing the FleX controller with Omni eX software as shown on the traffic signal project plans and specifications. The costs for any Work shown or required in the Contract Documents, but not specifically identified as a line item are to be included in the related line items and no additional compensation shall be due to Contractor for the performance of the Work. In case of discrepancy between the Unit Price and the Item Cost set forth for a unit basis item, the unit price shall prevail and shall be utilized as the basis for determining the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. However, if the amount set forth as a unit price is ambiguous, unintelligible or uncertain for any cause, or is omitted, or is the same amount as the entry in the “Item Cost” column, then the amount set forth in the “Item Cost” column for the item shall prevail and shall be divided by the estimated quantity for the item and the price thus obtained shall be the Unit Price. -25- BID FORMS For purposes of evaluating Bids, the City will correct any apparent errors in the extension of unit prices and any apparent errors in the addition of lump sum and extended prices. The estimated quantities for Unit Price items are for purposes of comparing Bids only and the City makes no representation that the actual quantities of work performed will not vary from the estimates. Final payment shall be determined by the Engineer from measured quantities of work performed based upon the Unit Price. B. TOTAL BID PRICE: TOTAL BID PRICE BASED ON BID SCHEDULE TOTAL OF UNIT PRICES FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT $ Total Bid Price in Numbers $ Total Bid Price in Written Form In case of discrepancy between the written price and the numerical price, the written price shall prevail. The undersigned agrees that this Bid Form constitutes a firm offer to the City which cannot be withdrawn for the number of calendar days indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids from and after the Bid opening, or until a Contract for the Work is fully executed by the City and a third party, whichever is earlier. The successful bidder hereby agrees to sign the contract and furnish the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance within ten (10) working days after the City provides the successful bidder with the Notice of Award. Upon receipt of the signed contract and other required documents, the contract will be executed by the City, after which the City will prepare a letter giving Contractor Notice to Proceed. The official starting date shall be the date of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise specified. The undersigned agrees to begin the Work within ten (10) working days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, unless otherwise specified. The undersigned has examined the location of the proposed work and is familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and the local conditions at the place where work is to be done. If awarded the contract, the undersigned agrees that there shall be paid by the undersigned and by all subcontractors to all laborers, workers and mechanics employed in the execution of such contract no less than the prevailing wage rate within Los Angeles County for each craft, classification, or type of worker needed to complete the Work contemplated by this contract as established by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations. A copy of the prevailing -26- BID FORMS rate of per diem wages are on file at the City’s Administration Office and shall be made available to interested parties upon request. Enclosed find cash, bidder’s bond, or cashier’s or certified check No. _________ from the _______________ Bank in the amount of ________________________________, which is not less than ten percent (10%) of this bid, payable to City of Azusa as bid security and which is given as a guarantee that the undersigned will enter into a contract and provide the necessary bonds and certificates of insurance if awarded the Work. The bidder furthermore agrees that in case of bidder’s default in executing said contract and furnishing required bonds and certificates of insurance, the cash, bidder’s bond, or cashier’s or certified check accompanying this proposal and the money payable thereon shall become and shall remain the property of the City of Azusa. Bidder is an individual ______, or corporation ______, or partnership ______, organized under the laws of the State of _______________________________. Bidder confirms license(s) required by California State Contractor’s License Law for the performance of the subject project are in full effect and proper order. The following are the Bidder’s applicable license number(s), with their expiration date(s) and class of license(s): If the Bidder is a joint venture, each member of the joint venture must include the required licensing information. Sureties that will furnish the Faithful Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond, in the form specified herein, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price within ten (10) working days from the date the City provides the successful bidder the Notice of Award. Sureties must meet all of the State of California bonding requirements, as defined in California Code of Civil Procedure Section 995.120 and must be authorized by the State of California. The insurance company or companies to provide the insurance required in the contract documents must have a Financial Strength Rating of not less than “A-” and a Financial Size Category of not less than “Class VII” according to the latest Best Key Rating Guide. At the sole discretion of the City, the City may waive the Financial Strength Rating and the Financial Size Category classifications for Workers’ Compensation insurance. (signatures continued on next page) -27- BID FORMS I hereby certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that all of the information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made herein are true and correct. Executed at _________________________, on this ____ day of __________, _____. (Bidders Name – Print or Type) ________________________________ (Name and Title) (Corporate Seal) ________________________________ (Signature) Names of individual members of firm or names and titles of all officers of corporation and their addresses are listed below: Name Title Complete Address Phone FAX Name Title Complete Address Phone FAX Name Title Complete Address Phone FAX Name Title Complete Address Phone FAX -28- BID FORMS 1.2 Bid Bond [Note: Not required when other form of Bidder’s Security, e.g. cash, certified check or cashier’s check, accompanies bid.] The makers of this bond are, _____________________________________________, as Principal, and ______________________________________________________, as Surety and are held and firmly bound unto the City of Azusa, hereinafter called the City, in the penal sum of TEN PERCENT (10%) OF THE TOTAL BID PRICE of the Principal submitted to City for the work described below, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated _____________, 20 ____, for THE TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT. If the Principal does not withdraw its Bid within the time specified in the Contract Documents; and if the Principal is awarded the Contract and provides all documents to the City as required by the Contract Documents; then this obligation shall be null and void. Otherwise, this bond will remain in full force and effect. Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents shall in affect its obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such changes. In the event a lawsuit is brought upon this bond by the City and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all litigation expenses incurred by the City in such suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and expenses. By their signatures hereunder, Surety and Principal hereby confirm under penalty of perjury that surety is an admitted surety insurer authorized to do business in the State of California. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bound parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this _______ day of ________________, 20____, the name and corporate seal of each corporation. (Corporate Seal) Contractor/ Principal By Title (Corporate Seal) Surety By Attorney-in-Fact (Attach Attorney-in-Fact Certificate) Title -29- BID FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory Name(s) of Signer(s) evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for Contractor/Principal. -30- BID FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for the Attorney-in-Fact. The Power-of-Attorney to local representatives of the bonding company must also be attached. END OF BID BOND -31- BID FORMS 1.3 List of Subcontractors In compliance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act Chapter 4 (commencing at Section 4100), Part 1, Division 2 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California and any amendments thereof, Bidder shall set forth below: (a) the name and the location of the place of business, (b) the California contractor license number, (c) the DIR public works contractor registration number unless exempt pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, and (d) the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the construction of the work or improvement to be performed under this Contract in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the work involves the construction of streets and highways, then the Bidder shall list each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the work in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price or $10,000, whichever is greater. No additional time shall be granted to provide the below requested information. If a Bidder fails to specify a subcontractor or if a contractor specifies more than one subcontractor for the same portion of work, then the Bidder shall be deemed to have agreed that it is fully qualified to perform that portion of work and that it shall perform that portion itself. Work to be done by Subcontractor Name of Subcontractor Location of Business CSLB Contractor License No. DIR Registration Number % of Work -32- BID FORMS Work to be done by Subcontractor Name of Subcontractor Location of Business CSLB Contractor License No. DIR Registration Number % of Work (Attach additional sheets if necessary) Name of Bidder Signature Name and Title Dated 45635.01000\31182317.1 -33- BID FORMS 1.4 Bidder Information and Experience Form ARTICLE 1. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER (Indicate not applicable (“N/A”) where appropriate.) NOTE: Where Bidder is a joint venture, pages shall be duplicated and information provided for all parties to the joint venture. 1.0 Name of Bidder: ___________________________________________ 2.0 Type, if Entity: ___________________________________________ 3.0 Bidder Address: ___________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ Facsimile Number Telephone Number _____________________________________________________________ Email Address 4.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business as a Contractor? ______________________________ 5.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business under its present name? ________________________ 5.1 Under what other or former names has Bidder’s organization operated?_______________________________________________ 6.0 If Bidder’s organization is a corporation, answer the following: 6.1 Date of Incorporation: ________________________________ 6.2 State of Incorporation: ________________________________ 6.3 President’s Name: ________________________________ 6.4 Vice-President’s Name(s): ________________________________ ________________________________ 6.5 Secretary’s Name: ________________________________ 6.6 Treasurer’s Name: ________________________________ 45635.01000\31182317.1 -34- BID FORMS 7.0 If an individual or a partnership, answer the following: 7.1 Date of Organization: ______________________________________ 7.2 Name and address of all partners (state whether general or limited partnership): ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 8.0 If other than a corporation or partnership, describe organization and name principals: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 9.0 List other states in which Bidder’s organization is legally qualified to do business. ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 10.0 What type of work does the Bidder normally perform with its own forces? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 11.0 Has Bidder ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? If so, note when, where, and why: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 12.0 Within the last five years, has any officer or partner of Bidder’s organization ever been an officer or partner of another organization when it failed to complete a contract? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 45635.01000\31182317.1 -35- BID FORMS 13.0 List Trade References: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 14.0 List Bank References (Bank and Branch Address): ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ 15.0 Name of Bonding Company and Name and Address of Agent: ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ [REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK] 45635.01000\31182317.1 -36- BID FORMS ARTICLE 2. LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (BACKLOG) [**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional current projects.**] Project Description of Bidder’s Work Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s Work 45635.01000\31182317.1 -37- BID FORMS ARTICLE 3. LIST OF COMPLETED PROJECTS – LAST THREE YEARS [**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional completed projects.**] Please include only those projects which are similar enough to demonstrate Bidder’s ability to perform the required Work. Project Description of Bidder’s Work Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s Work 45635.01000\31182317.1 -38- BID FORMS ARTICLE 4. EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE Personnel: The Bidder shall identify the key personnel to be assigned to this project in a management, construction supervision or engineering capacity. 1. List each person’s job title, name and percent of time to be allocated to this project: 2. Summarize each person’s specialized education: 3. List each person’s years of construction experience relevant to the project: 4. Summarize such experience: Bidder agrees that personnel named in this Bid will remain on this Project until completion of all relevant Work, unless substituted by personnel of equivalent experience and qualifications approved in advance by the City. Changes Occuring Since Prequalification If any substantive changes have occurred since Bidder submitted its prequalification package for this Project, Bidder shall list them below. If none are listed, Bidder certifies that no substantive changes have occurred. _______ 45635.01000\31182317.1 -39- BID FORMS Additional Bidder’s Statements: If the Bidder feels that there is additional information which has not been included in the questionnaire above, and which would contribute to the qualification review, it may add that information in a statement here or on an attached sheet, appropriately marked: _______ ARTICLE 5. VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION These Bid Forms shall be executed only by a duly authorized official of the Bidder: I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing information is true and correct: Name of Bidder Signature Name Title Date 45635.01000\31182317.1 -40- BID FORMS 1.5 Non-Collusion Declaration The undersigned declares: I am the ___________________ of ______________________________, the party making the foregoing Bid. The Bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The Bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any Bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The Bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the Bid Price of the Bidder or any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the Bid Price, or of that of any other Bidder. All statements contained in the Bid are true. The Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her Bid Price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose. Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a Bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the Bidder. I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed on __________ [date], at ___________________ [city], ___________________ [state]. Name of Bidder Signature Name Title 45635.01000\31182317.1 -41- BID FORMS 1.6 Iran Contracting Act Certification. (Public Contract Code section 2200 et seq.) As required by California Public Contract Code Section 2204, the Contractor certifies subject to penalty for perjury that the option checked below relating to the Contractor’s status in regard to the Iran Contracting Act of 2010 (Public Contract Code Section 2200 et seq.) is true and correct: The Contractor is not: (1) identified on the current list of person and entities engaged in investment activities in Iran prepared by the California Department of General Services in accordance with subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203; or (2) a financial instruction that extends, for 45 days or more, credit in the amount of $20,000,000 or more to any other person or entity identified on the current list of persons and entities engaging in investment activities in Iran prepared by the California Department of General Services in accordance with subdivision (b) of Public Contract Code Section 2203, if that person or entity uses or will use the credit to provide goods or services in the energy sector in Iran. The City has exempted the Contractor from the requirements of the Iran Contracting Act of 2010 after making a public finding that, absent the exemption, the City will be unable to obtain the goods and/or services to be provided pursuant to the Contract. The amount of the Contract payable to the Contractor for the Project does not exceed $1,000,000. Signature: Printed Name: Title: Firm Name: Date: Note: In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 2205, false certification of this form shall be reported to the California Attorney General and may result in civil penalties equal to the greater of $250,000 or twice the Contract amount, termination of the Contract and/or ineligibility to bid on contracts for three years. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -42- BID FORMS 1.7 Public Works Contractor Registration Certification Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, all contractors and subcontractors that wish to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, or enter into a contract to perform public work must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations. See http://www.dir.ca.gov/Public- Works/PublicWorks.html for additional information. No bid will be accepted nor any contract entered into without proof of the contractor’s and subcontractors’ current registration with the Department of Industrial Relations to perform public work. Bidder hereby certifies that it is aware of the registration requirements set forth in Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 and is currently registered as a contractor with the Department of Industrial Relations.1 Name of Bidder: DIR Registration Number: DIR Registration Expiration:_________________________ Small Project Exemption: _____ Yes or _____ No Unless Bidder is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption, Bidder further acknowledges: 1. Bidder shall maintain a current DIR registration for the duration of the project. 2. Bidder shall include the requirements of Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 in its contract with subcontractors and ensure that all subcontractors are registered at the time of bid opening and maintain registration status for the duration of the project. 3. Failure to submit this form or comply with any of the above requirements may result in a finding that the bid is non-responsive. Name of Bidder Signature Name and Title Dated 1 If the Project is exempt from the contractor registration requirements pursuant to the small project exemption under Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, please mark “Yes” in response to “Small Project Exemption.” 45635.01000\31182317.1 -43- BID FORMS 1.8 Contractor’s Certificate Regarding Workers’ Compensation. I am aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this Contract. Name of Bidder Signature Name Title Dated ______________________________ 45635.01000\31182317.1 -44- CONTRACT CONTRACT This CONTRACT, No. ________ is made and entered into this ____ day of _______, ______, by and between City of Azusa, sometimes hereinafter called “City,” and _______________________________________________, sometimes hereinafter called “Contractor.” WITNESSETH: That the parties hereto have mutually covenanted and agreed, and by these presents do covenant and agree with each other as follows: a. SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall perform all Work within the time stipulated in the Contract, and shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, tools, utility services, and transportation to complete all of the Work required in strict compliance with the Contract Documents as specified in Article 5, below, for the following Project: TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PROJECT The Contractor and its surety shall be liable to the City for any damages arising as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with this obligation. b. TIME FOR COMPLETION. Time is of the essence in the performance of the Work. The Work shall be commenced on the date stated in the City’s Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall complete all Work required by the Contract Documents within 365 calendar days (1 year) from the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed. By its signature hereunder, Contractor agrees the time for completion set forth above is adequate and reasonable to complete the Work. c. CONTRACT PRICE. The City shall pay to the Contractor as full compensation for the performance of the Contract, subject to any additions or deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, and including all applicable taxes and costs, the sum of ____________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_________________________________). Payment shall be made as set forth in the General Conditions. d. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. In accordance with Government Code section 53069.85, it is agreed that the Contractor will pay the City the sum of $3,000 for each and every calendar day of delay beyond the time prescribed in the Contract Documents for finishing the Work, as Liquidated Damages and not as a penalty or forfeiture. In the event this is not paid, the Contractor agrees the City may deduct that amount from any money due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract. This Article does not exclude recovery of other damages specified in the Contract Documents. e. COMPONENT PARTS OF THE CONTRACT. The “Contract Documents” include the following: Notice Inviting Bids Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Bid Bond Designation of Subcontractors Information Required of Bidders 45635.01000\31182317.1 -45- CONTRACT Non-Collusion Declaration Form Iran Contracting Act Certification Public Works Contractor Registration Certification Performance Bond Payment (Labor and Materials) Bond General Conditions Special Conditions Technical Specifications Addenda Plans and Drawings Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction “Greenbook”, latest edition, Except Sections 1-9 Applicable Local Agency Standards and Specifications, as last revised Approved and fully executed change orders Any other documents contained in or incorporated into the Contract The Contractor shall complete the Work in strict accordance with all of the Contract Documents. All of the Contract Documents are intended to be complementary. Work required by one of the Contract Documents and not by others shall be done as if required by all. This Contract shall supersede any prior agreement of the parties. f. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW AND CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE. Each and every provision of law required to be included in these Contract Documents shall be deemed to be included in these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations, including, but not limited to, the provisions of the California Labor Code and California Public Contract Code which are applicable to this Work. g. INDEMNIFICATION. Contractor shall provide indemnification and defense as set forth in the General Conditions. h. PREVAILING WAGES. Contractor shall be required to pay the prevailing rate of wages in accordance with the Labor Code which such rates shall be made available at the City’s Administrative Office or may be obtained online at http://www.dir.ca.gov and which must be posted at the job site. [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK] 45635.01000\31182317.1 -46- CONTRACT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Contract has been duly executed by the above-named parties, on the day and year above written. CITY OF AZUSA [INSERT NAME OF CONTRACTOR] By: By: Joseph R. Rocha Mayor Its: Printed Name: ATTEST: By: Jeffrey Lawrence Cornejo Jr. City Clerk (CONTRACTOR’S SIGNATURE MUST BE NOTARIZED AND CORPORATE SEAL AFFIXED, IF APPLICABLE) END OF CONTRACT 45635.01000\31182317.1 -47- CONTRACT Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above 45635.01000\31182317.1 -48- BOND FORMS BOND FORMS 1.1 Performance Bond. KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: THAT WHEREAS, the City of Azusa, (hereinafter referred to as “City”) has awarded to _________________________, (hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor”) an agreement for Project No._________, (hereinafter referred to as the “Project”). WHEREAS, the work to be performed by the Contractor is more particularly set forth in the Contract Documents for the Project dated ________________, (hereinafter referred to as “Contract Documents”), the terms and conditions of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference; and WHEREAS, the Contractor is required by said Contract Documents to perform the terms thereof and to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract Documents. NOW, THEREFORE, we, ______________________, the undersigned Contractor and ________________________________________________ as Surety, a corporation organized and duly authorized to transact business under the laws of the State of California, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the sum of ___________________________ DOLLARS, ($____________), said sum being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total amount of the Contract, for which amount well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that, if the Contractor, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract Documents and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on its part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their intent and meaning; and shall faithfully fulfill all obligations including the one (1) year guarantee of all materials and workmanship; and shall indemnify and save harmless the City, its officials, officers, employees, and authorized volunteers, as stipulated in said Contract Documents, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefore, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred by City in enforcing such obligation. As a condition precedent to the satisfactory completion of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the above obligation shall hold good for a period of one (1) year after the acceptance of the work by City, during which time if Contractor shall fail to make full, complete, and satisfactory repair and replacements and totally protect the City from loss or damage resulting from or caused by defective materials or faulty workmanship. The obligations of Surety hereunder shall continue so long as any obligation of Contractor 45635.01000\31182317.1 -49- BOND FORMS remains. Nothing herein shall limit the City’s rights or the Contractor or Surety’s obligations under the Contract, law or equity, including, but not limited to, California Code of Civil Procedure Section 337.15. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by the City to be, in default under the Contract Documents, the Surety shall remedy the default pursuant to the Contract Documents, or shall promptly, at the City’s option: i. Take over and complete the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents; or ii. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Project in accordance with all terms and conditions in the Contract Documents and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, arrange for a Contract between such bidder, the Surety and the City, and make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balance of the contract price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the contract price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Contractor by the City under the Contract and any modification thereto, less any amount previously paid by the City to the Contractor and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. iii. Permit the City to complete the Project in any manner consistent with California law and make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion of the Project, less the balance of the contract price, including other costs and damages for which Surety may be liable. The term “balance of the contract price” as used in this paragraph shall mean the total amount payable to Contractor by the City under the Contract and any modification thereto, less any amount previously paid by the City to the Contractor and any other set offs pursuant to the Contract Documents. Surety expressly agrees that the City may reject any contractor or subcontractor which may be proposed by Surety in fulfillment of its obligations in the event of default by the Contractor. Surety shall not utilize Contractor in completing the Project nor shall Surety accept a bid from Contractor for completion of the Project if the City, when declaring the Contractor in default, notifies Surety of the City’s objection to Contractor’s further participation in the completion of the Project. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project to be performed thereunder shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract Documents or to the Project. By their signatures hereunder, Surety and Contractor hereby confirm under penalty of perjury that surety is an admitted surety insurer authorized to do business in the State of California. [REMAINDER OF PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK] 45635.01000\31182317.1 -50- BOND FORMS IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of ______________, 20___. (Corporate Seal) Contractor/ Principal By Title (Corporate Seal) Surety By Attorney-in-Fact (Attach Attorney-in-Fact Certificate) Title The rate of premium on this bond is ____________ per thousand. The total amount of premium charges is $_______________________________. (The above must be filled in by corporate attorney.) THIS IS A REQUIRED FORM Any claims under this bond may be addressed to: (Name and Address of Surety) ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ ___________________________________________ (Name and Address of Agent or ___________________________________________ Representative for service of ___________________________________________ process in California, if different ___________________________________________ from above) (Telephone number of Surety ___________________________________________ and Agent or Representative for service of process in California) 45635.01000\31182317.1 -51- BOND FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for Contractor/Principal. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -52- BOND FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for the Attorney-in-Fact. The Power-of Attorney to local representatives of the bonding company must also be attached. END OF PERFORMANCE BOND 45635.01000\31182317.1 -53- BOND FORMS 1.2 Payment Bond (Labor and Materials). KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That WHEREAS, the City of Azusa (hereinafter designated as the “City”), by action taken or a resolution passed ___________________ , 20_____, has awarded to ________________________ hereinafter designated as the “Principal,” a contract for the work described as follows: Traffic Management System Project (the “Project”); and WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection with said contract; providing that if said Principal or any of its Subcontractors shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, provender, equipment, or other supplies used in, upon, for or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of said Principal and its Subcontractors with respect to such work or labor the Surety on this bond will pay for the same to the extent hereinafter set forth. NOW THEREFORE, we, the Principal and __________________________ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the penal sum of ______________ Dollars ($___________) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if said Principal, his or its subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 9100, fail to pay for any materials, provisions or other supplies, used in, upon, for or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor thereon of any kind, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the contract, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department or Franchise Tax Board from the wages of employees of the contractor and his subcontractors pursuant to Revenue and Taxation Code Section 18663, with respect to such work and labor the Surety or Sureties will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum herein above specified, and also, in case suit is brought upon this bond, all litigation expenses incurred by the City in such suit, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, court costs, expert witness fees and investigation expenses. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 9100 so as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. It is further stipulated and agreed that the Surety on this bond shall not be exonerated or released from the obligation of this bond by any change, extension of time for performance, addition, alteration or modification in, to, or of any contract, plans, specifications, or agreement pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement herein above described, or pertaining or relating to the furnishing of labor, materials, or equipment therefore, nor by any change or modification of any terms of payment or extension of the time for any payment pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement herein above described, nor by any rescission or attempted rescission or attempted rescission of the contract, agreement or bond, nor by any conditions precedent or subsequent in the bond attempting to limit the right of recovery of claimants otherwise entitled to recover under any such contract or agreement or 45635.01000\31182317.1 -54- BOND FORMS under the bond, nor by any fraud practiced by any person other than the claimant seeking to recover on the bond and that this bond be construed most strongly against the Surety and in favor of all persons for whose benefit such bond is given, and under no circumstances shall Surety be released from liability to those for whose benefit such bond has been given, by reason of any breach of contract between the owner or City and original contractor or on the part of any obligee named in such bond, but the sole conditions of recovery shall be that claimant is a person described in Civil Code Section 9100, and has not been paid the full amount of his claim and that Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, addition, alteration or modification herein mentioned, including but not limited to the provisions of sections 2819 and 2845 of the California Civil Code. By their signatures hereunder, Surety and Principal hereby confirm under penalty of perjury that surety is an admitted surety insurer authorized to do business in the State of California. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this _______ day of ______________, 20__. (Corporate Seal) Contractor/ Principal By Title (Corporate Seal) Surety By Attorney-in-Fact (Attach Attorney-in-Fact Certificate) Title 45635.01000\31182317.1 -55- BOND FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for Contractor/Principal 45635.01000\31182317.1 -56- BOND FORMS Notary Acknowledgment A notary public or other officer completing this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the document to which this certificate is attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document. STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ______________ On , 20___, before me, _______________________________, Notary Public, personally appeared , who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Signature of Notary Public OPTIONAL Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. CAPACITY CLAIMED BY SIGNER DESCRIPTION OF ATTACHED DOCUMENT  Individual  Corporate Officer Title(s) Title or Type of Document  Partner(s)  Limited  General Number of Pages  Attorney-In-Fact  Trustee(s)  Guardian/Conservator Date of Document  Other: Signer is representing: Name Of Person(s) Or Entity(ies) Signer(s) Other Than Named Above NOTE: This acknowledgment is to be completed for the Attorney-in-Fact. The Power-of-Attorney to local representatives of the bonding company must also be attached. END OF PAYMENT BOND 45635.01000\31182317.1 -57- GENERAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1. DEFINED TERMS Whenever used in the Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined below, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. A. Act of God – An earthquake of magnitude of 3.5 or higher on the Richter scale or a tidal wave. B. Addenda -- Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the submission of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Contract Documents. C. Additional Work -- New or unforeseen work will be classified as “Additional Work” when the City’s Representative determines that it is not covered by the Contract. D. Applicable Laws -- The laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, codes, regulations, permits, and licenses of any kind, issued by local, state or federal governmental authorities or private authorities with jurisdiction (including utilities), to the extent they apply to the Work. E. Bid -- The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices and other terms for the Work to be performed. F. Bidder -- The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to the City. G. Change Order (“CO”) -- A document that authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents and in the form contained in the Contract Documents. H. Change Order Request (“COR”) -- A request made by the Contractor for an adjustment in the Contract Price and/or Contract Times as the result of a Contractor- claimed change to the Work. This term may also be referred to as a Change Order Proposal (“COP”), or Request for Change (“RFC”). I. City -- The City of Azusa. J. City Council, Council -- The City Council of the City. K. City’s Representative -- The individual or entity as identified in the Special Conditions to act as the City’s Representative. L. Claim -- A demand or assertion by the City or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -58- GENERAL CONDITIONS M. Contract -- The entire integrated written agreement between the City and Contractor concerning the Work. “Contract” may be used interchangeably with “Agreement” in the Contract Documents. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral, and includes all Contract Documents. N. Contract Documents -- The documents listed in Section 00 52 13, Article 5. Some documents provided by the City to the Bidders and Contractor, including but not limited to reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. O. Contract Price -- Amount to be paid by the City to the Contractor as full compensation for the performance of the Contract and completion of the Work, subject to any additions or deductions as provided in the Contract Documents, and including all applicable taxes and costs. P. Contract Times -- The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract Documents to: achieve defined Milestones, if any; and to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment. Q. Contractor -- The individual or entity with which the City has contracted for performance of the Work. R. Contractor’s Designated On-Site Representative -- The Contractor’s Designated On- Site Representative will be as identified in Section 00 72 13, Article 3 and shall not be changed without prior written consent of the City. S. Daily Rate -- The Daily Rate stipulated in the Contract Documents as full compensation to the Contractor due to the City’s unreasonable delay to the Project that was not contemplated by the parties. T. Day -- A calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. U. Defective Work -- Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient; or that does not conform to the Contract Documents; or that does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referenced in the Contract Documents. V. Demobilization -- The complete dismantling and removal by the Contractor of all of the Contractor’s temporary facilities, equipment, and personnel at the Site. W. Drawings -- That part of the Contract Documents prepared by of the Engineer of Record which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. X. Effective Date of the Contract -- The date indicated in the Contract on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Contract is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -59- GENERAL CONDITIONS Y. Engineer, whenever not qualified, shall mean the Director of Public Works / Cty Engineer of the City, acting either directly or through properly authorized agents, such agents acting severally within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to them. On all questions concerning the acceptance of materials, machinery, the classifications of material, the execution of work, conflicting interest of the contractors performing related work and the determination of costs, the decision of the Engineer, duly authorized by the City Council, shall be binding and final upon both parties. Z. Engineer of Record -- The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other legal entity named as such in Section 00 73 13, Article 1.1. or any succeeding entity designated by the City. AA. Green Book -- The current edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. BB. Hazardous Waste -- The term “Hazardous Waste” shall have the meaning provided in Section 104 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 U.S.C. § 6903) as amended from time to time or, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a class I, class II, or class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law, whichever is more restrictive. CC. Holiday – The Holidays occur on: New Year’s Day - January 1 President’s Day – Third Monday in February Memorial Day - Last Monday in May Independence Day - July 4 Labor Day - First Monday in September Veteran’s Day - November 11 Thanksgiving Day - Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Eve – December 24 Christmas Day - December 25 Day After Christmas – December 26 New Year’s Eve – December 31 If any Holiday listed above falls on a Saturday, Saturday and the preceding Friday are both Holidays. If the Holiday should fall on a Sunday, Sunday and the following Monday are both Holidays. DD. Notice of Award -- The written notice by the City to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, the City will sign and deliver the Contract. EE. Notice of Completion -- The form which may be executed by the City and recorded by the county where the Project is located constituting final acceptance of the Project. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -60- GENERAL CONDITIONS FF. Notice to Proceed -- A written notice given by the City to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contractor may proceed with the Work and when Contract Times will commence to run. GG. Project -- The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. HH. Recyclable Waste Materials -- Materials removed from the Site which are required to be diverted to a recycling center rather than an area landfill. Recyclable Waste Materials include asphalt, concrete, brick, concrete block, and rock. II. Schedule of Submittals -- A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to facilitate scheduled performance of related construction activities. JJ. Shop Drawings -- All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. KK. Specifications -- That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. LL. Stop Payment Notice -- A written notice as defined in Civil Code section 8044. MM. Subcontractor -- An individual or entity other than a Contractor having a contract with any other entity than the City for performance of any portion of the Work at the Site. NN. Submittal -- Written and graphic information and physical samples prepared and supplied by the Contractor demonstrating various portions of the Work. OO. Successful Bidder -- The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom the City makes an award. PP. Supplier -- A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment used in the performance of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work. QQ. Underground Facilities -- All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. RR. Unit Price Work -- Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices as provided by the Contractor in its bid or as adjusted in accordance with the Contract Documents. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -61- GENERAL CONDITIONS SS. Warranty -- A written guarantee provided to the City by the Contractor that the Work will remain free of defects and suitable for its intended use for the period required by the Contract Documents or the longest period permitted by the law of this State, whichever is longer. TT. Work -- The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by all. B. Interpretations. The Contract Documents are intended to be fully cooperative and complementary. If the Contractor observes that any documents are in conflict, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing. In case of conflicts between the Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Change Orders 2. Addenda 3. Special Conditions 4. Technical Specifications 5. Plans (Contract Drawings) 6. Contract 7. General Conditions 8. Instructions to Bidders 9. Notice Inviting Bids 10. Contractor’s Bid Forms 11. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Sections 1-9 Excluded) 12. Applicable Local Agency Standards and Specifications 13. Standard Drawings 14. Reference Documents With reference to the Drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows: 1. Figures govern over scaled dimensions 2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings 3. Addenda or Change Order drawings govern over Contract Drawings 4. Contract Drawings govern over Standard Drawings 5. Contract Drawings govern over Shop Drawings C. Conflicts in Contract Documents. Notwithstanding the orders of precedence established above, in the event of conflicts, the higher standard, higher quality, and most expensive shall always apply. D. Organization of Contract Documents. Organization of the Contract Documents into divisions, sections, and articles, and arrangement of drawings shall not control 45635.01000\31182317.1 -62- GENERAL CONDITIONS the Contractor in dividing Project Work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. ARTICLE 3. PRECONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION Before any Work at the site is started, a conference attended by the City, Contractor, City’s Representative, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to herein, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. At this conference the City and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: COPIES & MAINTENANCE Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, five (5) copies of the Contract Documents. Additional copies may be obtained at cost of reproduction. Contractor shall maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Documents, including submittals, at the Project site. ARTICLE 5. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK A. Examination of Contract Documents. Before commencing any portion of the Work, Contractor shall again carefully examine all applicable Contract Documents, the Project site, and other information given to Contractor as to materials and methods of construction and other Project requirements. Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any potential error, inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict, or lack of detail or explanation. If Contractor performs, permits, or causes the performance of any Work which is in error, inconsistent or ambiguous, or not sufficiently detailed or explained, Contractor shall bear any and all resulting costs, including, without limitation, the cost of correction. In no case shall the Contractor or any subcontractor proceed with Work if uncertain as to the applicable requirements. B. Additional Instructions. After notification of any error, inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict, or lack of detail or explanation, the Engineer will provide any required additional instructions, by means of drawings or other written direction, necessary for proper execution of Work. C. Quality of Parts, Construction and Finish. All parts of the Work shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds and the Contractor must use all diligence to inform itself fully as to the required construction and finish. D. Contractor’s Variation from Contract Document Requirements. If it is found that the Contractor has varied from the requirements of the Contract Documents including the requirement to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, the Engineer may at any time, before or after completion of the Work, 45635.01000\31182317.1 -63- GENERAL CONDITIONS order the improper Work removed, remade or replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. ARTICLE 6. MOBILIZATION A. When a bid item is included in the Bid Form for mobilization, the costs of Work in advance of construction operations and not directly attributable to any specific bid item will be included in the progress estimate (“Initial Mobilization”). When no bid item is provided for “Initial Mobilization,” payment for such costs will be deemed to be included in the other items of the Work. B. Payment for Initial Mobilization based on the lump sum provided in the Bid Form, which shall constitute full compensation for all such Work. No payment for Initial Mobilization will be made until all of the listed items have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The scope of the Work included under Initial Mobilization shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following principal items: 1. Obtaining and paying for all bonds, insurance, and permits. 2. Moving on to the Project site of all Contractor’s plant and equipment required for the first month’s operations. 3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities, as applicable. 4. Establishing fire protection system, as applicable. 5. Developing and installing a construction water supply, if applicable. 6. Providing and maintaining the field office trailers for the Contractor, if necessary, and the Engineer (if specified), complete, with all specified furnishings and utility services. 7. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified per Cal-OSHA and these Contract Documents. 8. Furnishing, installing, and maintaining all storage buildings or sheds required for temporary storage of products, equipment, or materials that have not yet been installed in the Work. All such storage shall meet manufacturer’s specified storage requirements, and the specific provisions of the specifications, including temperature and humidity control, if recommended by the manufacturer, and for all security. 9. Arranging for and erection of Contractor’s work and storage yard. 10. Posting all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs per Cal- OSHA. 11. Full-time presence of Contractor’s superintendent at the job site as required herein. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -64- GENERAL CONDITIONS 12. Submittal of Construction Schedule as required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7. EXISTENCE OF UTILITIES AT THE WORK SITE A. The City has endeavored to determine the existence of utilities at the Project site from the records of the owners of known utilities in the vicinity of the Project. The positions of these utilities as derived from such records are shown on the Plans. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the Plans and Specifications, no excavations were made to verify the locations shown for underground utilities. The service connections to these utilities are not shown on the Plans. Water service connections may be shown on the Plans showing general locations of such connections. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact location of all service connections. The Contractor shall make its own investigations, including exploratory excavations, to determine the locations and type of service connections, prior to commencing Work which could result in damage to such utilities. The Contractor shall immediately notify the City in writing of any utility discovered in a different position than shown on the Plans or which is not shown on the Plans. C. If applicable, all water meters, water valves, fire hydrants, electrical utility vaults, telephone vaults, gas utility valves, and other subsurface structures shall be relocated or adjusted to final grade by the Contractor. Locations of existing utilities shown on the Plans are approximate and may not be complete. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating its Work with all utility companies during the construction of the Work. D. Notwithstanding the above, pursuant to section 4215 of the Government Code, the City has the responsibility to identify, with reasonable accuracy, main or trunkline facilities on the plans and specifications. In the event that main or trunkline utility facilities are not identified with reasonable accuracy in the plans and specifications made a part of the invitation for Bids, the City shall assume the responsibility for their timely removal, relocation, or protection. E. Contractor, except in an emergency, shall contact the appropriate regional notification center, California Underground Service Alert at 811 or 1-800-227-2600 or on-line at www.digalert.org at least two working days prior to commencing any excavation if the excavation will be performed in an area which is known, or reasonably should be known, to contain subsurface installations other than the underground facilities owned or operated by the City, and obtain an inquiry identification number from that notification center. No excavation shall be commenced or carried out by the Contractor unless such an inquiry identification number has been assigned to the Contractor or any subcontractor of the Contractor and the City has been given the identification number by the Contractor. ARTICLE 8. SOILS INVESTIGATIONS A. Reports and Drawings. The Special Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to the City of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site; and 45635.01000\31182317.1 -65- GENERAL CONDITIONS 2. those drawings known to the City of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, which were expressly not created or obtained to evaluate or assist in the evaluation of constructability, and are not Contract Documents. Contractor shall make its own interpretation of the “technical data” and shall be solely responsible for any such interpretations. Except for reliance on the accuracy of such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against the City, City’s Representative, or Engineer of Record, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including without limitation any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, conclusions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. ARTICLE 9. CONTRACTOR’S SUPERVISION Contractor shall continuously keep at the Project site, a competent and experienced full-time Project superintendent acceptable to the City. Superintendent must be able to proficiently speak, read and write in English and shall have the authority to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. Contractor shall continuously provide efficient supervision of the Project. ARTICLE 10. WORKERS A. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees. Contractor shall not employ on the Project any unfit person or any one not skilled in the Work assigned to him or her. B. Any person in the employ of the Contractor whom the City may deem incompetent or unfit shall be dismissed from the Work and shall not be employed on this Project. ARTICLE 11. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS Contractor shall be an independent contractor for the City and not an employee. Contractor understands and agrees that it and all of its employees shall not be considered officers, employees, or agents of City and are not entitled to benefits of any kind normally provided employees of City, including but not limited to, state unemployment compensation or workers’ compensation. Contractor assumes full responsibility for the acts and omissions of its employees or agents related to the Work. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -66- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 12. SUBCONTRACTS A. Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor to the terms of the Contract Documents as far as such terms are applicable to subcontractor’s portion of the Work. Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by its subcontractors, as Contractor is for acts and omissions of persons directly employed by Contractor. Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the City. B. The City reserves the right to accept all subcontractors. The City’s acceptance of any subcontractor under this Contract shall not in any way relieve Contractor of its obligations in the Contract Documents. C. Prior to substituting any subcontractor listed in the Bid Forms, Contractor must comply with the requirements of the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act pursuant to California Public Contract Code section 4100 et seq. ARTICLE 13. VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY By executing this Contract, Contractor verifies that it fully complies with all requirements and restrictions of state and federal law respecting the employment of undocumented aliens, including, but not limited to, the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, as may be amended from time to time, and shall require all subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and consultants to comply with the same. Each person executing this Contract on behalf of Contractor verifies that he or she is a duly authorized officer of Contractor and that any of the following shall be grounds for the City to terminate the Contract for cause: (1) failure of the Contractor or its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors or consultants to meet any of the requirements provided for in this Article; (2) any misrepresentation or material omission concerning compliance with such requirements; or (3) failure to immediately remove from the Work any person found not to be in compliance with such requirements. ARTICLE 14. REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION A. For the purposes of this provision, the term “substitution” shall mean the substitution of any material, method or service substantially equal to or better in every respect to that indicated in the Standard Specifications or otherwise referenced herein. B. Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 3400(b), the City may make a finding that is described in the Notice Inviting Bids that designates certain products, things, or services by specific brand or trade name. C. Unless specifically designated in the Special Conditions, whenever any material, process, or article is indicated or specified by grade, patent, or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating the description of the material, process, or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words “or equal.” Contractor may, unless otherwise stated, offer for substitution any material, process, or article which may be substantially equal to or better in every respect to that so indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. However, the City has adopted uniform standards for certain materials, processes, and articles. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -67- GENERAL CONDITIONS D. The Contractor shall submit substitution requests, together with substantiating data, for substitution of any “or equal” material, process, or article no later than thirty-five (35) calendar days after award of Contract. Provisions regarding submission of substitution requests shall not in any way authorize an extension of time for the performance of this Contract. If a substitution request is rejected by the City, the Contractor shall provide the material, method or service specified herein. The City shall not be responsible for any costs incurred by the Contractor associated with substitution requests. The burden of proof as to the equality of any material, process, or article shall rest with the Contractor. The Engineer has the complete and sole discretion to determine if a material, process, or article is substantially equal to or better than that specified and to approve or reject all substitution requests. E. Substantiating data as described above shall include, at a minimum, the following information: 1. A signed affidavit from the Contractor stating that the material, process, or article proposed as a substitution is substantially equal to or better than that specified in every way except as may be listed on the affidavit. 2. Illustrations, specifications, catalog cut sheets, and any other relevant data required to prove that the material, process, or article is substantially equal to or better than that specified. 3. A statement of the cost implications of the substitution being requested, indicating whether and why the proposed substitution will reduce or increase the amount of the contract. 4. Information detailing the durability and lifecycle costs of the proposed substitution. F. Failure to submit all the required substantiating data detailed above in a timely manner so that the substitution request can be adequately reviewed may result in rejection of the substitution request. The Engineer is not obligated to review multiple submittals related the same substitution request resulting from the Contractor’s failure to initially submit a complete package. G. Time limitations within this Article shall be strictly complied with and in no case will an extension of time for completion of the contract be granted because of Contractor’s failure to provide substitution requests at the time and in the manner described herein. H. The Contractor shall bear the costs of all City work associated with the review of substitution requests. I. If substitution requests approved by the Engineer require that Contractor furnish materials, methods or services more expensive than that specified, the increased costs shall be borne by Contractor. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -68- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 15. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and shall submit with such promptness as to provide adequate time for review and cause no delay in its own Work or in that of any other contractor, subcontractor, or worker on the Project, six (6) copies of all shop drawings, calculations, schedules, and materials list, and all other provisions required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall sign all submittals affirming that submittals have been reviewed and approved by Contractor prior to submission to Engineer. Each signed submittal shall affirm that the submittal meets all the requirements of the Contract Documents except as specifically and clearly noted and listed on the transmittal letter of the submittal. B. Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer, and file with the Engineer six (6) corrected copies each, and furnish such other copies as may be needed for completion of the Work. Engineer’s acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called Engineer’s attention to such deviations at time of submission and has secured the Engineer’s written acceptance. Engineer’s acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings. ARTICLE 16. SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for approval, prior to purchasing or commencing any Work, a log of all samples, material lists and certifications, mix designs, schedules, and other submittals, as required in the Contract Documents. The log shall indicate whether samples will be provided in accordance with other provisions of this Contract. B. Contractor will provide samples and submittals, together with catalogs and supporting data required by the Engineer, to the Engineer within a reasonable time period to provide for adequate review and avoid delays in the Work. C. These requirements shall not authorize any extension of time for performance of this Contract. Engineer will check and approve such samples, but only for conformance with design concept of work and for compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Work shall be in accordance with approved samples and submittals. ARTICLE 17. MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, lights, power, transportation, superintendence, temporary constructions of every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature whatsoever necessary to execute and complete this Contract within specified time. B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds and grades as noted and/or specified, and workmanship shall be of good quality. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -69- GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Materials shall be furnished in ample quantities and at such times as to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work and shall be stored properly and protected as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss by weather or other causes to materials or Work. D. No materials, supplies, or equipment for Work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the Work and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the Project, to the City free from any claims, liens, or charges. E. Materials shall be stored on the Project site in such manner so as not to interfere with any operations of the City or any independent contractor. F. Contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions, elevations, and quantities before ordering any materials or performing any Work, and the City shall not be liable for Contractor’s failure to so. No additional compensation, over and above payment for the actual quantities at the prices set out in the Bid Form, will be allowed because of differences between actual measurements, dimension, elevations and quantities and those indicated on the Plans and in the Specifications. Any difference therein shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the Work. ARTICLE 18. PERMITS AND LICENSES A. City will apply and pay for the review of necessary encroachment permits for Work within the public rights-of-way. Contractor shall obtain all other necessary permits and licenses for the construction of the Project, including encroachment permits, and shall pay all fees required by law and shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations relating to the Work and to the preservation of public health and safety. Before acceptance of the Project, the Contractor shall submit all licenses, permits, certificates of inspection and required approvals to the City. B. The Bid Form contains an allowance for the Contractor’s cost of acquiring traffic control permits and for construction inspection fees that may be charged to the Contractor by the Agency of Jurisdiction. The allowance is included within the Bid Form to eliminate the need by bidders to research or estimate the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees prior to submitting a bid. The allowance is specifically intended to account for the costs of traffic control permits and construction inspection fees charged by the local Agency of Jurisdiction only. No other costs payable by Contractor to the Agency of Jurisdiction are included within the allowance. Payment by City to Contractor under the Permit and Inspection Allowance Bid Item shall be made based on actual cost receipts only and in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. ARTICLE 19. TRENCHES A. Trenches Five Feet or More in Depth. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer at the preconstruction meeting, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be made for worker protection from hazards of caving 45635.01000\31182317.1 -70- GENERAL CONDITIONS ground during the excavation of any trench or trenches five feet or more in depth. If such plan varies from shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Department of Industrial Relations, the plan shall be prepared by a California registered civil or structural engineer. The plan shall not be less effective than the shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions of the Construction Safety Orders, as defined in the California Code of Regulations. The Contractor shall designate in writing the “competent person” as defined in Title 8, California Code of Regulations, who shall be present at the Work Site each day that trenching/excavation is in progress. The “competent person” shall prepare and provide daily trenching/excavation inspection reports to the Engineer. Contractor shall also submit a copy of its annual California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal/OSHA) trench/excavation permit. B. Excavations Deeper than Four Feet. If the Work involves excavating trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface, Contractor shall promptly, and before the excavation is further disturbed, notify the City in writing of any of the following conditions: 1. Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. 2. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated. 3. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract The City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do so materially differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work, shall issue a change order under the procedures described in the Contract Documents. In the event that a dispute arises between the City and the Contractor as to whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the Contract, but shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the parties. ARTICLE 20. TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Traffic control plan(s) for the Work may be required by the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction. Traffic control plans, if required, shall be prepared at Contractor’s expense, and traffic control shall be performed at Contractor’s expense in accordance with the requirements of the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction. The Permit and Inspection Allowance included within the Bid Form includes the cost of required traffic control permit(s) and construction inspection by the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction only. The Permit and 45635.01000\31182317.1 -71- GENERAL CONDITIONS Inspection Allowance does not include costs for preparation of any required traffic control plans, implementation of any traffic control requirements or for any traffic signal services that may be required. Costs for traffic control plans, implementation of traffic control, or traffic signal services required by the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction shall be included in the Contractor’s Bid. B. All warning signs and safety devices used by the Contractor to perform the Work shall conform to the requirements contained in the State of California, Department of Transportation’s current edition of “Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones” or to the requirements of the local agency. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all traffic control required by the agency having jurisdiction over the project on the intersecting streets. Contractor must submit a traffic control plan to the agency having jurisdiction over the project for approval prior to starting work. C. The Contractor’s representative on the site responsible for traffic control shall produce evidence that he/she has completed training acceptable to the California Department of Transportation for safety through construction zones. All of the streets in which the Work will occur shall remain open to traffic and one lane of traffic maintained at all times unless otherwise directed by the agency of jurisdiction. Businesses and residences adjacent to the Work shall be notified forty-eight (48) hours in advance of closing of driveways. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the amount of public parking temporarily eliminated due to construction in areas fronting businesses. No stockpiles of pipe or other material will be allowed in traveled right-of-ways after working hours unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. ARTICLE 21. DIVERSION OF RECYCLABLE WASTE MATERIALS In compliance with the applicable City’s waste reduction and recycling efforts, Contractor shall divert all Recyclable Waste Materials to appropriate recycling centers as required for compliance with the local jurisdiction’s waste diversion ordinances. Contractor will be required to submit weight tickets and written proof of diversion with its monthly progress payment requests. Contractor shall complete and execute any certification forms required by City or other applicable agencies to document Contractor’s compliance with these diversion requirements. All costs incurred for these waste diversion efforts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. ARTICLE 22. REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Should Contractor encounter material reasonably believed to be polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic wastes and hazardous materials which have not been rendered harmless at the Project site, the Contractor shall immediately stop work at the affected Project site and shall report the condition to the City in writing. The City shall contract for any services required to directly remove and/or abate PCBs and other toxic wastes and hazardous materials, if required by the Project site(s), and shall not require the Contractor to subcontract for such services. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the City and Contractor. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -72- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 23. SANITARY FACILITIES Contractor shall provide sanitary temporary toilet buildings and hand washing facilities for the use of all workers. All toilets and hand washing facilities shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations. Toilets shall be kept supplied with toilet paper and shall have workable door fasteners. Toilets and hand washing facilities shall be serviced no less than once weekly and shall be present in a quantity of not less than 1 per 20 workers as required by Cal/OSHA regulations. The toilets and hand washing facilities shall be maintained in a sanitary condition at all times. Use of toilet and hand washing facilities in the Work under construction shall not be permitted. Any other Sanitary Facilities required by Cal/OSHA shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. ARTICLE 24. AIR POLLUTION CONTROL Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and statutes. All containers of paint, thinner, curing compound, solvent or liquid asphalt shall be labeled to indicate that the contents fully comply with the applicable material requirements. ARTICLE 25. LAYOUT AND FIELD ENGINEERING All field engineering required for laying out the Work and establishing grades for earthwork operations shall be furnished by the Contractor at its expense. ARTICLE 26. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. If the Contract Documents, the Engineer, or any instructions, laws, ordinances, or public authority requires any part of the Work to be tested or Approved, Contractor shall provide the Engineer at least two (2) working days’ notice of its readiness for observation or inspection. If inspection is by a public authority other than the City, Contractor shall promptly inform the City of the date fixed for such inspection. Required certificates of inspection (or similar) shall be secured by Contractor. Costs for City testing and City inspection shall be paid by the City. Costs of tests for Work found not to be in compliance shall be paid by the Contractor. B. If any Work is done or covered up without the required testing or approval, the Contractor shall uncover or deconstruct the Work, and the Work shall be redone after completion of the testing at the Contractor’s cost in compliance with the Contract Documents. C. Where inspection and testing are to be conducted by an independent laboratory or agency, materials or samples of materials to be inspected or tested shall be selected by such laboratory or agency, or by the City, and not by Contractor. All tests or inspections of materials shall be made in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national organizations. D. In advance of manufacture of materials to be supplied by Contractor which must be tested or inspected, Contractor shall notify the City so that the City may arrange for testing at the source of supply. Any materials which have not satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection shall not be incorporated into the Work. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -73- GENERAL CONDITIONS E. If the manufacture of materials to be inspected or tested will occur in a plant or location greater than sixty (60) miles from the City, the Contractor shall pay for any excessive or unusual costs associated with such testing or inspection, including but not limited to excessive travel time, standby time and required lodging. F. Reexamination of Work may be ordered by the City. If so ordered, Work must be uncovered or deconstructed by Contractor. If Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the City shall pay the costs of reexamination and reconstruction. If such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay all costs. ARTICLE 27. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to persons or property that occurs as a result of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper care and protection of all materials delivered and Work performed until completion and final Acceptance by the City. All Work shall be solely at the Contractor’s risk. Contractor shall adequately protect adjacent property from settlement or loss of lateral support as necessary. Contractor shall comply with all applicable safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the Project site where Work is being performed. Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by field conditions and progress of work, all necessary safeguards, signs, barriers, lights, and watchmen for protection of workers and the public, and shall post danger signs warning against hazards created in the course of construction. B. In an emergency affecting safety of life or of work or of adjoining property, Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Engineer, is hereby permitted to act to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and Contractor shall so act, without appeal, if so authorized or instructed by the Engineer or the City. Any compensation claimed by Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined by and agreed upon by the City and the Contractor. ARTICLE 28. CONTRACTOR’S MEANS AND METHODS Contractor is solely responsible for the means and methods utilized to perform the Work. In no case shall the Contractor’s means and methods deviate from commonly used industry standards. ARTICLE 29. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES The City shall designate representatives, who shall have the right to be present at the Project site at all times. The City may designate an inspector who shall have the right to observe all of the Contractor’s Work. The inspector shall not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access. ARTICLE 30. HOURS OF WORK A. As provided in Article 3 (commencing at section 1810), Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code, Contractor stipulates that eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute 45635.01000\31182317.1 -74- GENERAL CONDITIONS a legal day’s work. The time of service of any worker employed at any time by the Contractor or by any subcontractor on any subcontract under this Contract upon the Work or upon any part of the Work contemplated by this Contract is limited and restricted to eight (8) hours during any one calendar day and 40 hours during any one calendar week, except as hereinafter provided. Notwithstanding the provisions herein above set forth, work performed by employees of Contractor in excess of eight (8) hours per day, and 40 hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon this public work upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day at not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay. B. The Contractor and every subcontractor shall keep an accurate record showing the name of and actual hours worked each calendar day and each calendar week by each worker employed in connection with the Work or any part of the Work contemplated by this Contract. The record shall be kept open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of the City and to the Division of Labor Law Enforcement, Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California. C. The Contractor shall pay to the City a penalty of twenty-five dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by the Contractor or by any subcontractor for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of Article 3 (commencing at section 1810), Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code. D. Any work necessary to be performed after regular working hours, or on Saturdays and Sundays or other holidays, shall be performed without additional expense to the City. E. City will provide inspection during normal working hours from 7:00 a.m. to 3:30 p.m. Monday through Friday. Inspection before or after this time will be charged to the Contractor as reimbursable inspection time. Inspections on weekends requires two days’ notice for review and approval. Upon written request and approval the 8.5 hour working day may be changed to other limits subject to city/county ordinance. F. It shall be unlawful for any person to operate, permit, use, or cause to operate any of the following at the Project site, other than between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, with no Work allowed on the City-observed holidays, unless otherwise approved by the City: 1. Powered Vehicles 2. Construction Equipment 3. Loading and Unloading Vehicles 4. Domestic Power Tools ARTICLE 31. PAYROLL RECORDS; LABOR COMPLIANCE A. Pursuant to Labor Code section 1776, Contractor and all subcontractors shall maintain weekly certified payroll records, showing the names, addresses, Social 45635.01000\31182317.1 -75- GENERAL CONDITIONS Security numbers, work classifications, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by them in connection with the Work under this Contract. Contractor shall certify under penalty of perjury that records maintained and submitted by Contractor are true and accurate. Contractor shall also require subcontractor(s) to certify weekly payroll records under penalty of perjury. B. In accordance with Labor Code section 1771.4, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall furnish the certified payroll records directly to the Department of Industrial Relations (“DIR”) on the specified interval and format prescribed by the DIR, which may include electronic submission. Contractor shall comply with all requirements and regulations from the DIR relating to labor compliance monitoring and enforcement. The requirement to submit certified payroll records directly to the Labor Commissioner under Labor Code section 1771.4 shall not apply to work performed on a public works project that is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption specified in Labor Code Section 1771.4. C. Any stop orders issued by the Department of Industrial Relations against Contractor or any subcontractor that affect Contractor’s performance of Work, including any delay, shall be Contractor’s sole responsibility. Any delay arising out of or resulting from such stop orders shall be considered Contractor caused delay subject to any applicable liquidated damages and shall not be compensable by the City. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, employees and agents free and harmless from any claim or liability arising out of stop orders issued by the Department of Industrial Relations against Contractor or any subcontractor. D. The payroll records described herein shall be certified and submitted by the Contractor at a time designated by the City. The Contractor shall also provide the following: 1. A certified copy of the employee’s payroll records shall be made available for inspection or furnished to such employee or his or her authorized representative on request. 2. A certified copy of all payroll records described herein shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request of the DIR. E. Unless submitted electronically, the certified payroll records shall be on forms provided by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement (“DLSE”) of the DIR or shall contain the same information as the forms provided by the DLSE. F. Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or any public agency, the City, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual's name, address and social security number. The name and address of the Contractor awarded the Contract or performing the contract shall not be marked or obliterated. G. In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this Article, the Contractor shall have ten (10) calendar days in which to comply subsequent to receipt of written 45635.01000\31182317.1 -76- GENERAL CONDITIONS notice specifying in what respects the Contractor must comply with this Article. Should noncompliance still be evident after such 10-day period, the Contractor shall pay a penalty of one hundred dollars ($100.00) to the City for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, such penalties shall be withheld from progress payment then due. H. The responsibility for compliance with this Article shall rest upon the Contractor. ARTICLE 32. PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES A. The Contractor is aware of the requirements of Labor Code sections 1720 et seq. and 1770 et seq., as well as California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000 et seq. (“Prevailing Wage Laws”), which require the payment of prevailing wage rates and the performance of other requirements on certain “public works” and “maintenance” projects. Since this Project involves an applicable “public works” or “maintenance” project, as defined by the Prevailing Wage Laws, and since the total compensation is $1,000 or more, Contractor agrees to fully comply with such Prevailing Wage Laws. The Contractor shall obtain a copy of the prevailing rates of per diem wages at the commencement of this Contract from the website of the Division of Labor Statistics and Research of the Department of Industrial Relations located at www.dir.ca.gov. In the alternative, the Contractor may view a copy of the prevailing rate of per diem wages which are on file at the City’s Administration Office and shall be made available to interested parties upon request. Contractor shall make copies of the prevailing rates of per diem wages for each craft, classification, or type of worker needed to perform work on the Project available to interested parties upon request, and shall post copies at the Contractor’s principal place of business and at the Project site. Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City, its officials, officers, employees and authorized volunteers free and harmless from any claims, liabilities, costs, penalties or interest arising out of any failure or allege failure to comply with the Prevailing Wage Laws. B. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City not more than Two Hundred Dollars ($200.00), pursuant to Labor Code section 1775, for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate as determined by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations for such work or craft in which such worker is employed for any public work done under the Contract by it or by any subcontractor under it. The difference between such prevailing wage rate and the amount paid to each worker for each calendar day or portion thereof, for which each worker was paid less than the prevailing wage rate, shall be paid to each worker by the Contractor. C. Contractor shall post, at appropriate conspicuous points on the Project site, a schedule showing all determined general prevailing wage rates and all authorized deductions, if any, from unpaid wages actually earned. ARTICLE 33. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION Pursuant to Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, the Contractor and its subcontractors must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations prior to the execution of a 45635.01000\31182317.1 -77- GENERAL CONDITIONS contract to perform public works. By entering into this Contract, Contractor represents that it is aware of the registration requirement and is currently registered with the DIR. Contractor shall maintain a current registration for the duration of the Project. Contractor shall further include the requirements of Labor Code sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 in any subcontract and ensure that all subcontractors are registered at the time this Contract is entered into and maintain registration for the duration of the Project. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the contractor registration requirements mandated by Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1 shall not apply to work performed on a public works project that is exempt pursuant to the small project exemption specified in Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1. ARTICLE 34. EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES A. Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of Labor Code sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 in the employment of apprentices. B. Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules, and other requirements may be obtained from the Director of Industrial Relations, ex officio the Administrator of Apprenticeship, San Francisco, California, or from the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and its branch offices. C. Knowing violations of Labor Code section 1777.5 will result in forfeiture not to exceed one hundred dollars ($100.00) for each calendar day of non-compliance pursuant to Labor Code section 1777.7. D. The responsibility for compliance with this Article shall rest upon the Contractor. ARTICLE 35. NONDISCRIMINATION/EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY Pursuant to Labor Code section 1735 and other applicable provisions of law, the Contractor and its subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status, sex, age, sexual orientation, or any other classifications protected by law on this Project. The Contractor will take affirmative action to insure that employees are treated during employment or training without regard to their race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition, marital status, sex, age, sexual orientation, or any other classifications protected by law. Employment Eligibility; Contractor. By executing this Contract, Contractor verifies that it fully complies with all requirements and restrictions of state and federal law respecting the employment of undocumented aliens, including, but not limited to, the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, as may be amended from time to time. Such requirements and restrictions include, but are not limited to, examination and retention of documentation confirming the identity and immigration status of each employee of the Contractor. Contractor also verifies that it has not committed a violation of any such law within the five (5) years immediately preceding the date of execution of this Contract, and shall not violate any such law at any time during the term of the Contract. Contractor shall avoid any violation of any such law during the term of this Contract by participating in an electronic verification of work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security, by participating in an equivalent federal work authorization program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information of newly hired employees, or by some other legally acceptable method. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -78- GENERAL CONDITIONS Contractor shall maintain records of each such verification, and shall make them available to the City or its representatives for inspection and copy at any time during normal business hours. The City shall not be responsible for any costs or expenses related to Contractor’s compliance with the requirements provided for or referred to herein. Employment Eligibility; Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and Consultants. To the same extent and under the same conditions as Contractor, Contractor shall require all of its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors and consultants performing any part of the Work or of this Contract to make the same verifications and comply with all requirements and restrictions provided for herein. Employment Eligibility; Failure to Comply. Each person executing this Contract on behalf of Contractor verifies that he or she is a duly authorized officer of Contractor, and understands that any of the following shall be grounds for the City to terminate the Contract for cause: (1) failure of Contractor or its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors or consultants to meet any of the requirements provided for herein; (2) any misrepresentation or material omission concerning compliance with such requirements; or (3) failure to immediately remove from the Work any person found not to be in compliance with such requirements. ARTICLE 36. DEBARMENT OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS Contractors or subcontractors may not perform work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public project pursuant to Labor Code section 1777.1 or 1777.7. Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract. Any public money that is paid, or may have been paid to a debarred subcontractor by a contractor on the project shall be returned to the City. The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the project. ARTICLE 37. LABOR/EMPLOYMENT SAFETY The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of the federal, state, and local government, including Cal/OSHA requirements and requirements for verification of employees’ legal right to work in the United States. The Contractor shall maintain emergency first aid treatment for his employees which complies with the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. § 651 et seq.), and California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations Division 1, Department of Industrial Relations, Chapter 4. The Contractor shall ensure the availability of emergency medical services for its employees in accordance with California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 1512. The Contractor shall submit the Illness and Injury Prevention Program and a Project site specific safety program to the City prior to beginning Work at the Project site. Contractor shall maintain a confined space program that meets or exceeds the City Standards. Contractor shall adhere to the City’s lock out tag out program. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -79- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 38. INSURANCE The Contractor shall obtain, and at all times during performance of the Work of Contract, maintain all of the insurance described in this Article. Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until it has provided evidence satisfactory to the City that it has secured all insurance required hereunder. Contractor shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until it has provided evidence satisfactory to the City that the subcontractor has secured all insurance required under this Article. Failure to provide and maintain all required insurance shall be grounds for the City to terminate this Contract for cause. Contractor shall furnish City with original certificates of insurance and endorsements effective coverage required by this Contract on forms satisfactory to the City. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy shall be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf, and shall be on forms acceptable to the City. All certificates and endorsements must be received and approved by the City before Work commences. A. Additional Insureds; Waiver of Subrogation. The City, its officials, officers, employees, agents and authorized volunteers shall be named as Additional Insureds on Contractor’s All Risk policy and on Contractor’s and its subcontractors’ policies of Commercial General Liability and Automobile Liability insurance using, for Contractor’s policy/ies of Commercial General Liability insurance, ISO CG forms 20 10 and 20 37 (or endorsements providing the exact same coverage, including completed operations), and, for subcontractors’ policies of Commercial General Liability insurance, ISO CG form 20 38 (or endorsements providing the exact same coverage). Notwithstanding the minimum limits set forth in this Contract for any type of insurance coverage, all available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified minimum limits of coverage shall be available to the parties required to be named as Additional Insureds hereunder. Contractor and its insurance carriers shall provide a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of those parties. B. Workers’ Compensation Insurance. The Contractor shall provide workers’ compensation insurance for all of the employees engaged in Work under this Contract, on or at the Site, and, in case of any sublet Work, the Contractor shall require the subcontractor similarly to provide workers’ compensation insurance for all the latter’s employees as prescribed by State law. Any class of employee or employees not covered by a subcontractor’s insurance shall be covered by the Contractor’s insurance. In case any class of employees engaged in work under this Contract, on or at the Site, is not protected under the Workers’ Compensation Statutes, the Contractor shall provide or shall cause a subcontractor to provide, adequate insurance coverage for the protection of such employees not otherwise protected. The Contractor is required to secure payment of compensation to his employees in accordance with the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code. The Contractor shall file with the City certificates of his insurance protecting workers. Company or companies providing insurance coverage shall be acceptable to the City, if in the form and coverage as set forth in the Contract Documents. C. Employer’s Liability Insurance. Contractor shall provide Employer’s Liability Insurance, including Occupational Disease, in the amount of at least one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) per person per accident. Contractor shall provide City with a certificate of Employer’s Liability Insurance. Such insurance shall comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The policy shall be endorsed, if applicable, to 45635.01000\31182317.1 -80- GENERAL CONDITIONS provide a Borrowed Servant/Alternate Employer Endorsement and contain a Waiver of Subrogation in favor of the City. D. Commercial General Liability Insurance. Contractor shall provide “occurrence” form Commercial General Liability insurance coverage at least as broad as the most current ISO CGL Form 00 01, including but not limited to, premises liability, contractual liability, products/completed operations, personal and advertising injury which may arise from or out of Contractor’s operations, use, and management of the Site, or the performance of its obligations hereunder. The policy shall not contain any exclusion contrary to this Contract including but not limited to endorsements or provisions limiting coverage for (1) contractual liability (including but not limited to ISO CG 24 26 or 21 39); or (2) cross-liability for claims or suits against one insured against another. Policy limits shall not be less than $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury, personal injury and property damage. If Commercial General Liability Insurance or other form with a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence limit. Defense costs shall be paid in addition to the limits. 1. Such policy shall comply with all the requirements of this Article. The limits set forth herein shall apply separately to each insured against whom claims are made or suits are brought, except with respect to the limits of liability. Further the limits set forth herein shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from liability in excess of such coverage, nor shall it limit Contractor’s indemnification obligations to the City, and shall not preclude the City from taking such other actions available to the City under other provisions of the Contract Documents or law. 2. All general liability policies provided pursuant to the provisions of this Article shall comply with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3. All general liability policies shall be written to apply to all bodily injury, including death, property damage, personal injury, owned and non-owned equipment, blanket contractual liability, completed operations liability, explosion, collapse, under-ground excavation, removal of lateral support, and other covered loss, however occasioned, occurring during the policy term, and shall specifically insure the performance by Contractor of that part of the indemnification contained in these General Conditions relating to liability for injury to or death of persons and damage to property. 4. If the coverage contains one or more aggregate limits, a minimum of 50% of any such aggregate limit must remain available at all times; if over 50% of any aggregate limit has been paid or reserved, the City may require additional coverage to be purchased by Contractor to restore the required limits. Contractor may combine primary, umbrella, and as broad as possible excess liability coverage to achieve the total limits indicated above. Any umbrella or excess liability policy shall include the additional insured endorsement described in the Contract Documents. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -81- GENERAL CONDITIONS 5. All policies of general liability insurance shall permit and Contractor does hereby waive any right of subrogation which any insurer of Contractor may acquire from Contractor by virtue of the payment of any loss. E. Automobile Liability Insurance. Contractor shall provide “occurrence” form Automobile Liability Insurance at least as broad as ISO CA 00 01 (Any Auto) in the amount of, at least, one million dollars ($1,000,000) per accident for bodily injury and property damage. Such insurance shall provide coverage with respect to the ownership, operation, maintenance, use, loading or unloading of any auto owned, leased, hired or borrowed by Contractor or for which Contractor is responsible, in a form and with insurance companies acceptable to the City. All policies of automobile insurance shall permit and Contractor does hereby waive any right of subrogation which any insurer of Contractor may acquire from Contractor by virtue of the payment of any loss. F. Builder’s Risk [“All Risk”] 1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain or cause to be maintained Builder’s Risk [“All Risk”] extended coverage insurance on all work, material, equipment, appliances, tools, and structures that are or will become part of the Work and subject to loss or damage by fire, and vandalism and malicious mischief, in an amount to cover 100% of the replacement cost. The City accepts no responsibility for the Work until the Work is formally accepted by the City. The Contractor shall provide a certificate evidencing this coverage before commencing performance of the Work. 2. The named insureds shall be Contractor, all Subcontractors of any tier (excluding those solely responsible for design work), suppliers, and City, its elected officials, officers, employees, agents and authorized volunteers, as their interests may appear. Contractor shall not be required to maintain property insurance for any portion of the Work following acceptance by City. 3. Policy shall be provided for replacement value on an “all risk” basis. There shall be no coinsurance penalty provision in any such policy. Policy must include: (1) coverage for any ensuing loss from faulty workmanship, nonconforming work, omission or deficiency in design or specifications; (2) coverage against machinery accidents and operational testing; (3) coverage for removal of debris, and insuring the buildings, structures, machinery, equipment, materials, facilities, fixtures and all other properties constituting a part of the Project; (4) transit coverage, including ocean marine coverage (unless insured by the supplier), with sub-limits sufficient to insure the full replacement value of any key equipment item; and (5) coverage with sub-limits sufficient to insure the full replacement value of any property or equipment stored either on or off the Site. Such insurance shall be on a form acceptable to City to ensure adequacy and sublimit. 4. In addition, the policy shall meet the following requirements: a. Insurance policies shall be so conditioned as to cover the performance of any extra work performed under the Contract. b. Coverage shall include all materials stored on site and in transit. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -82- GENERAL CONDITIONS c. Coverage shall include Contractor’s tools and equipment. d. Insurance shall include boiler, machinery and material hoist coverage. G. [***FOR WORK INVOLVING ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDS***] Contractor’s Pollution Liability Coverage. Contractor shall provide pollution liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate. H. Contractor shall require all tiers of sub-contractors working under this Contract to provide the insurance required under this Article unless otherwise agreed to in writing by City. Contractor shall make certain that any and all subcontractors hired by Contractor are insured in accordance with this Contract. If any subcontractor’s coverage does not comply with the foregoing provisions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City harmless from any damage, loss, cost, or expense, including attorneys’ fees, incurred by the City as a result thereof. ARTICLE 39. FORM AND PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE A. Any insurance carrier providing insurance coverage required by the Contract Documents shall be admitted to and authorized to do business in the State of California unless waived, in writing, by the City’s Risk Manager. Carrier(s) shall have an A.M. Best rating of not less than an A:VII. Insurance deductibles or self-insured retentions must be declared by the Contractor. At the election of the City the Contractor shall either 1) reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions, or 2) procure a bond which guarantees payment of losses and related investigations, claims administration, and defense costs and expenses. If umbrella or excess liability coverage is used to meet any required limit(s) specified herein, the Contractor shall provide a “follow form” endorsement satisfactory to the City indicating that such coverage is subject to the same terms and conditions as the underlying liability policy. B. Each insurance policy required by this Contract shall be endorsed to state that: (1) coverage shall not be suspended, voided, reduced or cancelled except after thirty (30) days prior written notice by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City; and (2) any failure to comply with reporting or other provisions of the policies, including breaches of warranties, shall not affect coverage provided to the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees, and volunteers. C. The Certificates(s) and policies of insurance shall contain or shall be endorsed to contain the covenant of the insurance carrier(s) that it shall provide no less than thirty (30) days written notice be given to the City prior to any material modification or cancellation of such insurance. In the event of a material modification or cancellation of coverage, the City may terminate the Contract or stop the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, unless the City receives, prior to such effective date, another properly executed original Certificate of Insurance and original copies of endorsements or certified original policies, including all endorsements and attachments thereto evidencing coverage’s set forth herein and the insurance required herein is in full force and effect. Contractor shall not take possession, or use the Site, or commence operations under this Contract until the City has been furnished original Certificate(s) of Insurance and certified original copies of endorsements or policies of insurance including all endorsements and any and all 45635.01000\31182317.1 -83- GENERAL CONDITIONS other attachments as required in this Article. The original endorsements for each policy and the Certificate of Insurance shall be signed by an individual authorized by the insurance carrier to do so on its behalf. D. The Certificate(s) of Insurance, policies and endorsements shall so covenant and shall be construed as primary, and the City’s insurance and/or deductibles and/or self-insured retentions or self-insured programs shall not be construed as contributory. E. City reserves the right to adjust the monetary limits of insurance coverages during the term of this Contract including any extension thereof if, in the City’s reasonable judgment, the amount or type of insurance carried by the Contractor becomes inadequate. F. Contractor shall report to the City, in addition to the Contractor’s insurer, any and all insurance claims submitted by the Contractor in connection with the Work under this Contract. ARTICLE 40. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Time for Completion/Liquidated Damages. Time is of the essence in the completion of the Work. Work shall be commenced within ten (10) Days of the date stated in the City’s Notice to Proceed and shall be completed by Contractor in the time specified in the Contract Documents. The City is under no obligation to consider early completion of the Project; and the Contract completion date shall not be amended by the City’s receipt or acceptance of the Contractor’s proposed earlier completion date. Furthermore, Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, receive additional compensation from the City (including but not limited to indirect, general, administrative or other forms of overhead costs) for the period between the time of earlier completion proposed by the Contractor and the Contract completion date. If the Work is not completed as stated in the Contract Documents, it is understood that the City will suffer damage. In accordance with Government Code section 53069.85, being impractical and infeasible to determine the amount of actual damage, it is agreed that Contractor shall pay to the City as fixed and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum stipulated in the Contract for each calendar day of delay until the Work is fully completed. Contractor and its surety shall be liable for any liquidated damages. Any money due or to become due the Contractor may be retained to cover liquidated damages. B. Inclement Weather. Contractor shall abide by the Engineer’s determination of what constitutes inclement weather. Time extensions for inclement weather shall only be granted when the Work stopped during inclement weather is on the critical path of the Project schedule. C. Extension of Time. Contractor shall not be charged liquidated damages because of any delays in completion of the Work due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of Contractor (or its subcontractors or suppliers). Contractor shall within five (5) Days of identifying any such delay notify the City in writing of causes of delay. The City shall ascertain the facts and extent of delay and grant extension of time for completing the Work when, in its judgment, the facts justify such an extension. Time extensions to the Project shall be requested by 45635.01000\31182317.1 -84- GENERAL CONDITIONS the Contractor as they occur and without delay. No delay claims shall be permitted unless the event or occurrence delays the completion of the Project beyond the Contract completion date. D. No Damages for Reasonable Delay. The City’s liability to Contractor for delays for which the City is responsible shall be limited to only an extension of time unless such delays were unreasonable under the circumstances. In no case shall the City be liable for any costs which are borne by the Contractor in the regular course of business, including, but not limited to, home office overhead and other ongoing costs. Damages caused by unreasonable City delay, including delays caused by items that are the responsibility of the City pursuant to Government Code section 4215, shall be based on actual costs only, no proportions or formulas shall be used to calculate any delay damages. ARTICLE 41. COST BREAKDOWN AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES Contractor shall furnish on forms Approved by the City: A. Within ten (10) Days of Notice to Proceed with the Contract, a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the Contract price, if the Contract amount is a lump sum. B. A monthly itemized estimate of Work done for the purpose of making progress payments. In order for the City to consider and evaluate each progress payment application, the Contractor shall submit a detailed measurement of Work performed and a progress estimate of the value thereof before the tenth (10th) Day of the following month. C. Contractor shall submit, with each of its payment requests, an adjusted list of actual quantities, verified by the Engineer, for unit price items listed, if any, in the Bid Form. D. Following the City’s Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the City a written statement of the final quantities of unit price items for inclusion in the final payment request. E. The City shall have the right to adjust any estimate of quantity and to subsequently correct any error made in any estimate for payment. Contractor shall certify under penalty of perjury, that all cost breakdowns and periodic estimates accurately reflect the Work on the Project. ARTICLE 42. PROGRESS ESTIMATES AND PAYMENT A. By the tenth (10th) Day of the following calendar month, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a payment request which shall set forth in detail the value of the Work done for the period beginning with the date work was first commenced and ending on the end of the calendar month for which the payment request is prepared. Contractor shall include any amount earned for authorized extra work. From the total thus computed, a deduction shall be made in the amount of five percent (5%) for retention, except where the City has adopted a finding that the Work done under the Contract is substantially complex, and then the amount withheld as retention shall be 45635.01000\31182317.1 -85- GENERAL CONDITIONS the percentage specified in the Notice Inviting Bids. From the remainder a further deduction may be made in accordance with Section B below. The amount computed, less the amount withheld for retention and any amounts withheld as set forth below, shall be the amount of the Contractor’s payment request. B. The City may withhold a sufficient amount or amounts of any payment or payments otherwise due to Contractor, as in his judgment may be necessary to cover: 1. Payments which may be past due and payable for just claims against Contractor or any subcontractors for labor or materials furnished in and about the performance of work on the Project under this Contract. 2. Defective work not remedied. 3. Failure of Contractor to make proper payments to his subcontractor or for material or labor. 4. Completion of the Contract if there is a reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for balance then unpaid. 5. Damage to another contractor or a third party. 6. Amounts which may be due the City for claims against Contractor. 7. Failure of Contractor to keep the record (“as-built”) drawings up to date. 8. Failure to provide update on construction schedule as required herein. 9. Site cleanup. 10. Failure to comply with Contract Documents. 11. Liquidated damages. 12. Legally permitted penalties. C. The City may apply such withheld amount or amounts to payment of such claims or obligations at its discretion with the exception of subsections (B)(1), (3), and (5) of this Article, which must be retained or applied in accordance with applicable law. In so doing, the City shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the City shall be considered as a payment made under contract by the City to Contractor and the City shall not be liable to Contractor for such payments made in good faith. Such payments may be made without prior judicial determination of claim or obligations. The City will render Contractor a proper accounting of such funds disbursed on behalf of Contractor. D. Upon receipt, the Engineer shall review the payment request to determine whether it is undisputed and suitable for payment. If the payment request is determined to be unsuitable for payment, it shall be returned to Contractor as soon as practicable but not later than seven (7) Days after receipt, accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the payment request is not proper. The City shall make 45635.01000\31182317.1 -86- GENERAL CONDITIONS the progress payment within 30 calendar days after the receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted payment request from Contractor, provided that a release of liens and claims has been received from the Contractor pursuant to Civil Code section 8132. The number of days available to the City to make a payment without incurring interest pursuant to this paragraph shall be reduced by the number of days by which the Engineer exceeds the seven (7) Day requirement. E. A payment request shall be considered properly executed if funds are available for payment of the payment request and payment is not delayed due to an audit inquiry by the financial officer of the City. ARTICLE 43. SECURITIES FOR MONEY WITHHELD Pursuant to section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Contractor may request the City to make retention payments directly to an escrow agent or may substitute securities for any money withheld by the City to ensure performance under the contract. At the request and expense of Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited with the City or with a state or federally chartered bank as the escrow agent who shall return such securities to Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the contract. Deposit of securities with an escrow agent shall be subject to a written agreement substantially in the form provided in section 22300 of the Public Contract Code. ARTICLE 44. CHANGES AND EXTRA WORK. A. Contract Change Orders. 1. The City, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, and the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted accordingly. Except as otherwise provided herein, all such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including any adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, and the full and final settlement of all costs (direct, indirect and overhead) related to the Work authorized by the Change Order. 2. Contractor shall promptly execute changes in the Work as directed in writing by the City even when the parties have not reached agreement on whether the change increases the scope of Work or affects the Contract Price or Contract Time. All claims for additional compensation to the Contractor shall be presented in writing. No claim will be considered after the Work in question has been done unless a written Change Order has been issued or a timely written notice of claim has been made by Contractor. 3. Whenever any change is made as provided for herein, such change shall be considered and treated as though originally included in the Contract, and shall be subject to all terms, conditions, and provisions of the original Contract. 4. Contractor shall not be entitled to claim or bring suit for damages, whether for loss of profits or otherwise, on account of any decrease or omission of any item or portion of Work to be done. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -87- GENERAL CONDITIONS 5. No dispute, disagreement, or failure of the parties to reach agreement on the terms of the Change Order shall relieve the Contractor from the obligation to proceed with performance of the work, including Additional Work, promptly and expeditiously. 6. Contractor shall make available to the City any of the Contractor’s documents related to the Project immediately upon request of the City, as set forth in Article 52. 7. Any alterations, extensions of time, Additional Work, or any other changes may be made without securing consent of the Contractor’s surety or sureties. B. Contract Price Change. 1. Process for Determining Adjustments in Contract Price. a. Owner Initiated Change. The Contractor must submit a complete cost proposal, including any change in the Contract Price or Contract Time, within seven (7) Days after receipt of a scope of a proposed change order initiated by the City, unless the City requests that proposals be submitted in less than seven (7) Days. b. Contractor Initiated Change. The Contractor must give written notice of a proposed change order required for compliance with the Contract Documents within seven (7) Days of discovery of the facts giving rise to the proposed change order. c. Whenever possible, any changes to the Contract amount shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the City. d. Price quotations from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficiently detailed supporting documentation to permit verification by the City, including but not limited to estimates and quotations from subcontractors or material suppliers, as the City may reasonably request. Contractor shall certify the accuracy of all Change Order Requests under penalty of perjury. e. If the Contractor fails to submit a complete cost proposal within the seven (7) Day period (or as requested), the City has the right to order the Contractor in writing to commence the Work immediately on a time and materials basis and/or issue a lump sum change to the Contract Price and/or Contract Time in accordance with the City’s estimate. If the change is issued based on the City's estimate, the Contractor will waive its right to dispute the action unless within fifteen (15) Days following completion of the added/deleted work, the Contractor presents written proof that the City’s estimate was in error. 2. Unit Price Change Orders. a. When the actual quantity of a Unit Price item varies from the Bid Form, compensation for the change in quantity will be calculated by multiplying the actual quantity by the Unit Price. This calculation may result in either an 45635.01000\31182317.1 -88- GENERAL CONDITIONS additive or deductive Final Change Order pursuant to the Contract Documents. b. No Mark up for Overhead and Profit. Because the Contract Unit Prices provided in the Bid Form include Overhead and Profit as determined by Contractor at the time of Bid submission, no mark up or deduction for Overhead and Profit will be included in Unit Price Change Orders. c. Bid items included on the Bid Form may be deducted from the Work in their entirety without any negotiated extra costs. d. Contractor acknowledges that unit quantities are estimates and agrees that the estimated unit quantities listed on the Bid Form will be adjusted to reflect the actual unit quantities which may result in an adjustment to the Contract Unit Prices. Such an adjustment will be made by execution of a final additive or deductive Change Order following Contractor’s completion of the Work. Upon notification, Contractor’s failure to respond within seven (7) Days will result in City’s issuance of a unit quantity adjustment to the Contract Unit Prices and/or Contract Time in accordance with the Contract Documents. e. The City or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Unit Price in accordance with the Contract Documents if: i. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs by twenty-five percent (25%) or more from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract; and ii. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and iii. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Unit Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the City believes that the City is entitled to a decrease in Unit Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease.. 3. Lump Sum Change Orders. Compensation for Lump Sum Change Orders shall be limited to expenditures necessitated specifically by the Additional Work, and shall be segregated as follows: a. Labor. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each craft or type of worker at the time the Additional Work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes and insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs resulting from Federal, State or local laws, as well as assessment or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Additional Work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such new classifications. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -89- GENERAL CONDITIONS b. Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery. Materials costs shall be based upon supplier or manufacturer’s invoice. If invoices or other satisfactory evidence of cost are not furnished within fifteen (15) Days of delivery, then the City shall determine the materials cost, at its sole discretion. c. Tool and Equipment Use. Costs for the use of small tools, which are tools that have a replacement value of $1,000 or less, shall be considered included in the Overhead and Profit mark-ups established below. Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining equipment use costs shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies, or distributors, at the time the Work is performed. 4. Time and Materials Change Orders. a. General. The term Time and Materials means the sum of all costs reasonably and necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor for labor, materials, and equipment in the proper performance of Additional Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the City, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, and shall include only the following items. b. Timely and Final Documentation. i. T&M Daily Sheets. Contractor must submit timesheets, materials invoices, records of equipment hours, and records of rental equipment hours to the City’s Representative for an approval signature each day Additional Work is performed. Failure to get the City’s Representative’s approval signature each Day shall result in a waiver of Contractor’s right to claim these costs. The City’s Representative’s signature on time sheets only serves as verification that the Work was performed and is not indicative of City’s agreement to Contractor’s entitlement to the cost. ii. T&M Daily Summary Sheets. All documentation of incurred costs (“T&M Daily Summary Sheets”) shall be submitted by Contractor within three (3) Days of incurring the cost for labor, material, equipment, and special services as Additional Work is performed. Contractor’s actual costs shall be presented in a summary table in an electronic spreadsheet file by labor, material, equipment, and special services. Each T&M Daily Summary Sheet shall include Contractor’s actual costs incurred for the Additional Work performed that day and a cumulative total of Contractor’s actual costs incurred for the Additional Work. Contractor’s failure to provide a T&M Daily Summary Sheet showing a total cost summary within three (3) Days but within five (5) Days of performance of the Work will result in the Contractor’s otherwise allowable overhead and profit being reduced by 50% for that portion of Additional Work which was not documented in a timely manner. Contractor’s failure to submit the T&M Daily Summary Sheet within five (5) Days of performance of the Work will result in a total waiver of Contractor’s right to claim these costs. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -90- GENERAL CONDITIONS iii. T&M Total Cost Summary Sheet. Contractor shall submit a T&M Total Cost Summary Sheet, which shall include total actual costs, within seven (7) Days following completion of City approved Additional Work. Contractor’s total actual cost shall be presented in a summary table in an electronic spreadsheet file by labor, material, equipment, and special services. Contractor’s failure to submit the T&M Total Cost Summary Sheet within seven (7) Days of completion of the Additional Work will result in Contractor’s waiver for any reimbursement of any costs associated with the T&M Summary Sheets or the performance of the Additional Work. c. Labor. The Contractor will be paid the cost of labor for the workers used in the actual and direct performance of the Work. The cost of labor will be the sum of the actual wages paid (which shall include any employer payments to or on behalf of the workers for health and welfare, pension, vacation, and similar purposes) substantiated by timesheets and certified payroll for wages prevailing for each craft or type of workers performing the Additional Work at the time the Additional Work is done, and the labor surcharge set forth in the Department of Transportation publication entitled Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates, which is in effect on the date upon which the Work is accomplished and which is a part of the Contract. The labor surcharge shall constitute full compensation for all payments imposed by Federal, State, or local laws and for all other payments made to, or on behalf of, the workers, other than actual wages. i. Equipment Operator Exception. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be paid only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. ii. Foreman Exception. The labor costs for foremen shall be proportioned to all of their assigned work and only that applicable to the Additional Work shall be paid. Indirect labor costs, including, without limitation, the superintendent, project manager, and other labor identified in the Contract Documents will be considered Overhead. d. Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be itemized at invoice or lowest current price at which materials are locally available and delivered to the Project site in the quantities involved, plus the cost of sales tax, freight, delivery, and storage. i. Trade discounts available to the purchaser shall be credited to the City notwithstanding the fact that such discounts may not have been taken by Contractor. ii. For materials secured by other than a direct purchase and direct billing to the purchaser, the cost shall be deemed to be the price paid to the actual supplier as determined by the City’s Representative. iii. Payment for materials from sources owned wholly or in part by the purchaser shall not exceed the price paid by the purchaser for similar materials from said sources on Additional Work items or the current 45635.01000\31182317.1 -91- GENERAL CONDITIONS wholesale price for such materials delivered to the Project site, whichever price is lower. iv. If, in the opinion of the City’s Representative, the cost of materials is excessive, or Contractor does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost of such materials, then the cost shall be deemed to be the lowest current wholesale price for the total quantity concerned delivered to the Project site less trade discounts. v. The City reserves the right to furnish materials for the Additional Work and no Claim shall be allowed by Contractor for costs of such materials or Indirect Costs or profit on City furnished materials. e. Equipment. i. Rental Time. The rental time to be paid for equipment on the Project site shall be the time the equipment is in productive operation on the Additional Work being performed and, in addition, shall include the time required to move the equipment to the location of the Additional Work and return it to the original location or to another location requiring no more time than that required to return it to its original location; except that moving time will not be paid if the equipment is used on other than the Additional Work, even though located at the site of the Additional Work. (a) Rental Time Not Allowed. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. (b) Computation Method. The following shall be used in computing the rental time of equipment on the Project site. (i) When hourly rates are paid, any part of an hour less than 30 minutes of operation shall be considered to be 1/2-hour of operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 30 minutes will be considered one hour of operation. (ii) When daily rates are paid, any part of a day less than 4 hours operation shall be considered to be 1/2-day of operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 4 hours will be considered one day of operation. ii. Rental Rates. Contractor will be paid for the use of equipment at the lesser of (i) the actual rental rate, or (ii) the rental rate listed for that equipment in the California Department of Transportation publication entitled Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates, which is in effect on the date upon which the Contract was executed. Such rental rates will be used to compute payments for equipment whether the equipment is under Contractor’s control through direct ownership, leasing, renting, or another method of acquisition. The rental rate to be applied for use of each item of equipment shall be the rate (i.e., daily, monthly) resulting in the least total cost to the City for the total period of use. If it is deemed necessary by Contractor to use equipment not listed in the publication, an 45635.01000\31182317.1 -92- GENERAL CONDITIONS equitable rental rate for the equipment will be established by the City’s Representative. Contractor may furnish cost data which might assist the City’s Representative in the establishment of the rental rate. iii. Contractor-Owned Equipment. (a) For Contractor-owned equipment, the allowed equipment rental rate will be limited to the monthly equipment rental rate using a utilization rate of 173 hours per month. (b) For Contractor-owned equipment, the rental time to be paid for equipment on the Site shall be the time the equipment is in productive operation, unless, in the instance of standby time, the equipment could be actively used by Contractor on another project, then City shall pay for the entirety of the time the equipment is on Site. It shall be Contractor’s burden to demonstrate to the City that the equipment could be actively used on another project. iv. All equipment shall, in the opinion of the City’s Representative, be in good working condition and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be used. v. Before construction equipment is used on the Additional Work, Contractor shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number thereon at a conspicuous location, and shall furnish to the City’s Representative, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its identifying number and the scheduled Additional Work activities planned. vi. Unless otherwise specified, manufacturer’s rating and manufacturer approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment for the determination of applicable rental rates. Equipment which has no direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer. f. Special Services. Special work or services are defined as that Additional Work characterized by extraordinary complexity, sophistication, or innovation or a combination of the foregoing attributes which are unique to the construction industry. i. Invoices for Special Services. When the City’s Representative and Contractor determine that a special service is required which cannot be performed by the forces of Contractor or those of any of its Subcontractors, the special service may be performed by an entity especially skilled in the Additional Work. Invoices for special services based upon the current fair market value thereof may be accepted without complete itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental costs, after validation of market values by the City’s Representative. ii. Discount and Allowance. All invoices for special services will be adjusted by deducting all trade discounts offered or available, whether the discounts were taken or not. In lieu of Overhead and Profit specified 45635.01000\31182317.1 -93- GENERAL CONDITIONS herein, a total allowance not to exceed fifteen percent (15%) for Overhead and Profit will be added to invoices for Special Services. iii. When the City determines, in its sole discretion, that competitive bidding is necessary for certain special services, Contractor shall solicit competitive bids for those special services. g. Excluded Costs. The term Time and Material shall not include any of the following costs or any other home or field office overhead costs, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by Contractor’s allowance for Overhead and Profit. i. Overhead Cost. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal office or any branch office, material yard, or shop for general administration of the Additional Work; ii. Office Expenses. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices; iii. Capital Expenses. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Additional Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments; iv. Negligence. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including without limitation the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property; v. Other. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included in the Contract Documents; vi. Small Tools. Cost of small tools valued at less than $1,000 and that remain the property of Contractor; vii. Administrative Costs. Costs associated with the preparation of Change Orders (whether or not ultimately authorized), cost estimates, or the preparation or filing of Claims; viii. Anticipated Lost Profits. Expenses of Contractor associated with anticipated lost profits or lost revenues, lost income or earnings, lost interest on earnings, or unpaid retention; ix. Home Office Overhead. Costs derived from the computation of a “home office overhead” rate by application of the Eichleay, Allegheny, burden fluctuation, or other similar methods; 45635.01000\31182317.1 -94- GENERAL CONDITIONS x. Special Consultants and Attorneys. Costs of special consultants or attorneys, whether or not in the direct employ of Contractor, employed for services specifically related to the resolution of a Claim, dispute, or other matter arising out of or relating to the performance of the Additional Work. h. Overhead, Profit and Other Charges. The mark-up for overhead (including supervision) and profit on work added to the Contract shall be according to the following: i. “Net Cost” is defined as consisting of costs of labor, materials, and tools and equipment only excluding overhead and profit. The costs of applicable insurance and bond premium will be reimbursed to the Contractor and subcontractors at cost only, without mark-up. Contractor shall provide City with documentation of the costs, including, but not limited to, payroll records, invoices, and such other information as City may reasonably request. ii. For Work performed by the Contractor’s forces, the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the Net Cost of the Work. iii. For Work performed by a subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the subcontractor’s Net Cost of the Work to which the Contractor may add five percent (5%) of the subcontractor’s Net Cost. iv. For Work performed by a sub-subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of the sub- subcontractor’s Net Cost for Work to which the subcontractor and general contractor may each add an additional five percent (5%) of the Net Cost of the lower tier subcontractor. v. No additional mark-up will be allowed for lower tier subcontractors, and in no case shall the added cost for overhead and profit payable by City exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the Net Cost as defined herein, of the party that performs the Work. 5. All of the following costs are included in the markups for overhead and profit described above, and Contractor shall not receive any additional compensation for: Submittals, drawings, field drawings, Shop Drawings, including submissions of drawings; field inspection; General Superintendence; General administration and preparation of cost proposals, schedule analysis, Change Orders, and other supporting documentation; computer services; reproduction services; Salaries of project engineer, superintendent, timekeeper, storekeeper, and secretaries; Janitorial services; Small tools, incidentals and consumables; Temporary On-Site facilities (Offices, Telephones, High Speed Internet Access, Plumbing, Electrical Power, Lighting; Platforms, Fencing, Water), Jobsite and Home office overhead or other expenses; vehicles and fuel used for work otherwise included in the Contract Documents; Surveying; Estimating; Protection of Work; Handling and disposal fees; Final Cleanup; Other Incidental Work; Related Warranties; insurance and bond premiums. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -95- GENERAL CONDITIONS 6. For added or deducted Work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the City the subcontractor’s signed detailed record of the cost of labor, material and equipment, including the subcontractor markup for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to sub-subcontractors 7. For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to the City a detailed record of the cost to the Contractor, signed by such vendor or supplier. 8. Any change in the Work involving both additions and deletions shall indicate a net total cost, including subcontracts and materials. Allowance for overhead and profit, as specified herein, shall be applied if the net total cost is an increase in the Contract Price; overhead and profit allowances shall not be applied if the net total cost is a deduction to the Contract Price. The estimated cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material prices on the date the Contract was executed. 9. Contractor shall not reserve a right to assert impact costs, extended job site costs, extended overhead, constructive acceleration and/or actual acceleration beyond what is stated in the Change Order for Work. No claims shall be allowed for impact, extended overhead costs, constructive acceleration and/or actual acceleration due to a multiplicity of changes and/or clarifications. The Contractor may not change or modify the City’s change order form in an attempt to reserve additional rights. 10. If the City disagrees with the proposal submitted by Contractor, it will notify the Contractor and the City will provide its opinion of the appropriate price and/or time extension. If the Contractor agrees with the City, a Change Order will be issued by the City. If no agreement can be reached, the City shall have the right to issue a unilateral Change Order setting forth its determination of the reasonable additions or savings in costs and time attributable to the extra or deleted work. Such determination shall become final and binding if the Contractor fails to submit a claim in writing to the City within fifteen (15) Days of the issuance of the unilateral Change Order, disputing the terms of the unilateral Change Order, and providing such supporting documentation for its position as the City may require. C. Change of Contract Times. 1. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. 2. All changes in the Contract Price and/or adjustments to the Contract Times related to each change shall be included in Contractor’s COR pursuant to this Article. No cost or time will be allowed for cumulative effects of multiple changes. All Change Orders must state that the Contract Time is not changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. Failure to include a change to time shall waive any change to the time unless the parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the change to time resulting from the Change Order. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -96- GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. Notice of the amount of the request for adjustment in the Contract Times with supporting data shall be delivered within seven (7) Days after such start of occurrence, unless City’s Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the request. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed. 4. City may elect, at City’s sole discretion, to grant an extension in Contract Times, without Contractor’s request, because of delays or other factors. 5. Use of Float and Critical Path. a. Float is for the benefit of the Project. Float shall not be considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the City or the Contractor. b. Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation, and City will not compensate Contractor, for delays which impact early completion. Any difference in time between the Contractor’s early completion and the Contract Time shall be considered a part of the Project float. 6. Contractor’s entitlement to an extension of the Contract Times is limited to a City- caused extension of the critical path, reduced by the Contractor’s concurrent delays, and established by a proper time impact analysis. No time extension shall be allowed unless, and then only to the extent that, the City-caused delay extends the critical path beyond the previously approved Contract Time. If approved, the increase in time required to complete the Work shall be added to the Contract Time. a. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. b. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions (as determined by the City), Acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of City, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of City and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an time extension when the Work stopped is on the critical path. Such a non-compensable adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delays. Contractor must submit a timely request in accordance with the requirements of this Article. c. Utility-Related Delays. i. Contractor shall immediately notify in writing the utility owner and City’s Representative of its construction schedule and any subsequent changes in the construction schedule which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. Requests for extensions of time arising out of utility relocation or repair delays shall be filed in accordance with this Article. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -97- GENERAL CONDITIONS ii. Contractor shall not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, as noted in the Contract Documents or by the Underground Service Alert survey. 7. Content for Requests for Contract Extension. Contractor’s justification for entitlement shall be clear and complete citing specific Contract Document references and reasons on which Contractor’s entitlement is based. At a minimum, each request for a time extension must include: a. Each request for an extension of Contract Time must identify the impacting event, in narrative form, providing a description of the delay event and sufficient justification as to why the Contractor is entitled to a time extension. Contractor must demonstrate that the delay arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of both Contractor and any Subcontractors or Suppliers, or any other persons or organizations employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and that such causes in fact lead to performance or completion of the Work, or specified part in question, beyond the corresponding Contract Times, despite Contractor’s reasonable and diligent actions to guard against those effects. b. Each request for an extension of Contract Time must include a time impact analysis in CPM format, using the Contemporaneous Impacted As-Planned Schedule Analysis to calculate the impact of the delay event. 8. No Damages for Reasonable Delay. a. City’s liability to Contractor for delays for which City is responsible shall be limited to only an extension of time unless such delays were unreasonable under the circumstances. In no case shall City be liable for any costs which are borne by the Contractor in the regular course of business, including, but not limited to, home office overhead and other ongoing costs. b. Damages caused by unreasonable City delay that impact the critical path, including delays caused by items that are the responsibility of the City pursuant to Government Code section 4215, shall be compensated at the Daily Rate established in the Special Conditions. No other calculations, proportions or formulas shall be used to calculate any delay damages. c. City and City’s Representative, and the officers, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each of them, shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 9. Contractor’s failure, neglect, or refusal to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or any portion thereof, shall bar Contractor’s request for extensions of the Contract Times. Such failure, neglect, or refusal prejudices 45635.01000\31182317.1 -98- GENERAL CONDITIONS City’s and City’s Representative’s ability to recognize and mitigate delay, and such failure, neglect, or refusal prevent the timely analysis of requests for extensions of Contract Times, and whether such extensions may be warranted. Contractor hereby waives all rights to extensions of Contract Times due to delays or accelerations that result from or occur during periods of time for which Contractor fails, neglects, or refuses to fully comply with the requirements of this Article. ARTICLE 45. FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT A. The acceptance of the Work on behalf of the City will be made by the Engineer. Such acceptance by the City shall not constitute a waiver of defects. When the Work has been accepted there shall be paid to Contractor a sum equal to the contract price less any amounts previously paid Contractor and less any amounts withheld by the City from Contractor under the terms of the contract. The final five percent (5%), or the percentage specified in the notice inviting bids where the City has adopted a finding of substantially complete, shall not become due and payable until five (5) calendar days shall have elapsed after the expiration of the period within which all claims may be filed under the provisions of Civil Code section 9356. If the Contractor has placed securities with the City as described herein, the Contractor shall be paid a sum equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price less any amounts due the City under the terms of the Contract. B. Unless Contractor advises the City in writing prior to acceptance of the final five percent (5%) or the percentage specified in the notice inviting bids where the City has adopted a finding of substantially complete, or the return of securities held as described herein, said acceptance shall operate as a release to the City of all claims and all liability to Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with this work and for every act of negligence of the City and for all other claims relating to or arising out of this work. If Contractor advises the City in writing prior to acceptance of final payment or return of the securities that there is a dispute regarding the amount due the Contractor, the City may pay the undisputed amount contingent upon the Contractor furnishing a release of all undisputed claims against the City with the disputed claims in stated amounts being specifically excluded by Contractor from the operation of the release. No payments, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to release Contractor or its sureties from the Faithful Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond, or from any other obligation under this contract. C. In case of suspension of the contract any unpaid balance shall be and become the sole and absolute property of the City to the extent necessary to repay the City any excess in the cost of the Work above the contract price. D. Final payment shall be made no later than 60 days after the date of acceptance of the Work by the City or the date of occupation, beneficial use and enjoyment of the Work by the City including any operation only for testing, start-up or commissioning accompanied by cessation of labor on the Work, provided that a release of liens and claims has been received from the Contractor pursuant to Civil Code section 8136. In the event of a dispute between the City and the Contractor, the City may withhold from the final payment an amount not to exceed 150% of the disputed amount. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -99- GENERAL CONDITIONS E. Within ten (10) calendar days from the time that all or any portion of the retention proceeds are received by Contractor, Contractor shall pay each of its subcontractors from whom retention has been withheld each subcontractor’s share of the retention received. However, if a retention payment received by Contractor is specifically designated for a particular subcontractor, payment of the retention shall be made to the designated subcontractor if the payment is consistent with the terms of the subcontract. ARTICLE 46. OCCUPANCY The City reserves the right to occupy or utilize any portion of the Work at any time before completion, and such occupancy or use shall not constitute acceptance of any part of Work covered by this Contract. This use shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibilities under the Contract. ARTICLE 47. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall immediately defend (with counsel of the City’s choosing), indemnify and hold harmless the City, officials, officers, agents, employees, and representatives, and each of them from and against: A. Any and all claims, demands, causes of action, costs, expenses, injuries, losses or liabilities, in law or in equity, of every kind or nature whatsoever, but not limited to, injury to or death, including wrongful death, of any person, and damages to or destruction of property of any person, arising out of, related to, or in any manner directly or indirectly connected with the Work or this Contract, including claims made by subcontractors for nonpayment, including without limitation the payment of all consequential damages and attorney’s fees and other related costs and expenses, however caused, regardless of whether the allegations are false, fraudulent, or groundless, and regardless of any negligence of the City or its officers, employees, or authorized volunteers (including passive negligence), except the sole negligence or willful misconduct or active negligence of the City or its officials, officers, employees, or authorized volunteers. B. Contractor’s defense and indemnity obligation herein includes, but is not limited to damages, fines, penalties, attorney’s fees and costs arising from claims under the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or other federal or state disability access or discrimination laws arising from Contractor’s Work during the course of construction of the improvements or after the Work is complete, as the result of defects or negligence in Contractor’s construction of the improvements. C. Any and all actions, proceedings, damages, costs, expenses, fines, penalties or liabilities, in law or equity, of every kind or nature whatsoever, arising out of, resulting from, or on account of the violation of any governmental law or regulation, compliance with which is the responsibility of Contractor; D. Any and all losses, expenses, damages (including damages to the Work itself), attorney’s fees, and other costs, including all costs of defense which any of them may incur with respect to the failure, neglect, or refusal of Contractor to faithfully perform the Work and all of Contractor’s obligations under the agreement. Such 45635.01000\31182317.1 -100- GENERAL CONDITIONS costs, expenses, and damages shall include all costs, including attorney’s fees, incurred by the indemnified parties in any lawsuit to which they are a party. Contractor shall immediately defend, at Contractor’s own cost, expense and risk, with the City Council’s choosing, any and all such aforesaid suits, actions or other legal proceedings of every kind that may be brought or instituted against the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and representatives. Contractor shall pay and satisfy any judgment, award or decree that may be rendered against the City, its officials, officers, employees, agents, employees and representatives, in any such suit, action or other legal proceeding. Contractor shall reimburse the City, its officials, officers, agents, employees and representatives for any and all legal expenses and costs incurred by each of them in connection therewith or in enforcing the indemnity herein provided. The only limitations on this provision shall be those imposed by Civil Code section 2782. ARTICLE 48. PROCEDURE FOR RESOLVING DISPUTES Contractor shall timely comply with all notices and requests for changes to the Contract Time or Contract Price, including but not limited to all requirements of Article 44, Changes and Extra Work, as a prerequisite to filing any claim governed by this Article. The failure to timely submit a notice of delay or notice of change, or to timely request a change to the Contract Price or Contract Time, or to timely provide any other notice or request required herein shall constitute a waiver of the right to further pursue the claim under the Contract or at law. A. Intent. Effective January 1, 1991, Section 20104 et seq., of the California Public Contract Code prescribes a process utilizing informal conferences, non-binding judicial supervised mediation, and judicial arbitration to resolve disputes on construction claims of $375,000 or less. Effective January 1, 2017, Section 9204 of the Public Contract Code prescribes a process for negotiation and mediation to resolve disputes on construction claims. The intent of this Article is to implement Sections 20104 et seq. and Section 9204 of the California Public Contract Code. This Article shall be construed to be consistent with said statutes. B. Claims. For purposes of this Article, “Claim” means a separate demand by the Contractor, after a change order duly requested in accordance with Article 44 “Changes and Extra Work” has been denied by the City, for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from Work done by or on behalf of the Contractor pursuant to the Contract, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the City. Claims governed by this Article may not be filed unless and until the Contractor completes all procedures for giving notice of delay or change and for the requesting of a time extension or change order, including but not necessarily limited to the procedures contained in Article 44, Changes and Extra Work, and Contractor’s request for a change has been denied in whole or in part. Claims governed by this Article must be filed no later than the date of final payment. The claim shall be submitted in writing to the City and shall include on its first page the following in 16 point capital font: “THIS IS A CLAIM.” Furthermore, the claim shall include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Nothing herein is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims, including all requirements pertaining to compensation or payment for extra Work, disputed Work, and/or changed conditions. Failure to follow such contractual requirements shall bar any claims or subsequent lawsuits for compensation or payment thereon. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -101- GENERAL CONDITIONS C. Supporting Documentation. The Contractor shall submit all claims in the following format: 1. Summary of claim merit and price, reference Contract Document provisions pursuant to which the claim is made 2. List of documents relating to claim: a. Specifications b. Drawings c. Clarifications (Requests for Information) d. Schedules e. Other 3. Chronology of events and correspondence 4. Analysis of claim merit 5. Analysis of claim cost 6. Time impact analysis in CPM format 7. If Contractor’s claim is based in whole or in part on an allegation of errors or omissions in the Drawings or Specifications for the Project, Contractor shall provide a summary of the percentage of the claim subject to design errors or omissions and shall obtain a certificate of merit in support of the claim of design errors and omissions. D. City’s Response. Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this Article, City shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 Days, shall provide the Contractor a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim will be processed and made within 60 Days after the City issues its written statement. 1. If the City needs approval from its governing body to provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the claim, and the City’s governing body does not meet within the 45 Days or within the mutually agreed to extension of time following receipt of a claim sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the City shall have up to three Days following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the City’s governing body after the 45-Day period, or extension, expires to provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion. 2. Within 30 Days of receipt of a claim, the City may request in writing additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses or claims the City 45635.01000\31182317.1 -102- GENERAL CONDITIONS may have against the Contractor. If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of City and the Contractor. The City’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the Contractor within 30 Days (if the claim is less than $15,000, within 15 Days) after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the Contractor in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. E. Meet and Confer. If the Contractor disputes the City’s written response, or the City fails to respond within the time prescribed, the Contractor may so notify the City, in writing, either within 15 Days of receipt of the City’s response or within 15 Days of the City’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand, the City shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 Days for settlement of the dispute. F. Mediation. Within 10 business Days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the City shall provide the Contractor a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 Days after the City issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified by the Contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the City and the Contractor sharing the associated costs equally. The City and Contractor shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business Days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing, unless the parties agree to select a mediator at a later time. 1. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator. 2. For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including, but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this section. 3. Unless otherwise agreed to by the City and the Contractor in writing, the mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under Public Contract Code Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced. 4. The mediation shall be held no earlier than the date the Contractor completes the Work or the date that the Contractor last performs Work, whichever is earlier. All unresolved claims shall be considered jointly in a single mediation, unless a new unrelated claim arises after mediation is completed. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -103- GENERAL CONDITIONS G. Procedures After Mediation. If following the mediation, the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the Contractor must file a claim pursuant to Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code prior to initiating litigation. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the Contractor submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time the claim is denied, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer conference. H. Civil Actions. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims of $375,000 or less: 1. Within 60 Days, but no earlier than 30 Days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to non-binding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties or unless mediation was held prior to commencement of the action in accordance with Public Contract Code section 9204 and the terms of this Contract. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 Days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 Days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 Days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court. 2. If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1114.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil Procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, (A) arbitrators shall, when possible, be experienced in construction law, and (B) any party appealing an arbitration award who does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, also pay the attorney’s fees on appeal of the other party. I. Government Code Claims. In addition to any and all contract requirements pertaining to notices of and requests for compensation or payment for extra Work, disputed Work, construction claims and/or changed conditions, the Contractor must comply with the claim procedures set forth in Government Code Sections 900, et seq. prior to filing any lawsuit against the City. Such Government Code claims and any subsequent lawsuit based upon the Government Code claims shall be limited to those matters that remain unresolved after all procedures pertaining to extra Work, disputed Work, construction claims, and/or changed conditions have been followed by Contractor. If no such Government Code claim is submitted, or if the prerequisite contractual requirements are not satisfied, no action against the City may be filed. A Government Code claim must be filed no earlier than the date the Work is completed or the date the Contractor last performs Work on the Project, whichever occurs first. A Government Code claim shall be inclusive of all unresolved claims unless a new unrelated claim arises after the Government Code claim is submitted. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -104- GENERAL CONDITIONS J. Non-Waiver. The City’s failure to respond to a claim from the Contractor within the time periods described in this Article or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this Article shall result in the claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. ARTICLE 49. CITY’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT A. Termination for Cause by the City: 1. In the sole estimation of the City, if the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work or any separable part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the time specified by the Contract Documents, or any extension thereof, or fails to complete such Work within such time, or if the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if it should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of its insolvency, or the Contractor or any of its subcontractors should violate any of the provisions of this Contract, the City may serve written notice upon the Contractor and its Surety of the City's intention to terminate this Contract. This notice of intent to terminate shall contain the reasons for such intention to terminate this Contract, and a statement to the effect that the Contractor's right to perform this Contract shall cease and terminate upon the expiration of ten (10) calendar days unless such violations have ceased and arrangements satisfactory to the City have been made for correction of said violations. 2. In the event that the City serves such written notice of termination upon the Contractor and the Surety, the Surety shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract. If the Surety does not: (1) give the City written notice of Surety's intention to take over and commence performance of the Contract within 15 calendar days of the City's service of said notice of intent to terminate upon Surety; and (2) actually commence performance of the Contract within 30 calendar days of the City's service of said notice upon Surety; then the City may take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion by separate contract or by any other method it may deem advisable for the account and at the expense of the Contractor. 3. In the event that the City elects to obtain an alternative performance of the Contract as specified above: (1) the City may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completion of the Work such materials, appliances, plants and other property belonging to the Contractor that are on the site and reasonably necessary for such completion (A special lien to secure the claims of the City in the event of such suspension is hereby created against any property of Contractor taken into the possession of the City under the terms hereof and such lien may be enforced by sale of such property under the direction of the City Council without notice to Contractor. The proceeds of the sale after deducting all expenses thereof and connected therewith shall be credited to Contractor. If the net credits shall be in excess of the claims of the City against Contractor, the balance will be paid to Contractor or Contractor’s legal representatives.); and (2) Surety shall be liable to the City for any cost or other damage to the City necessitated by the City securing an alternate performance pursuant to this Article. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -105- GENERAL CONDITIONS B. Termination for Convenience by the City: 1. The City may terminate performance of the Work called for by the Contract Documents in whole or, from time to time, in part, if the City determines that a termination is in the City's interest. 2. The Contractor shall terminate all or any part of the Work upon delivery to the Contractor of a Notice of Termination specifying that the termination is for the convenience of the City, the extent of termination, and the Effective Date of such termination. 3. After receipt of Notice of Termination, and except as directed by the City's Representative, the Contractor shall, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any amounts due under this Termination for Convenience clause, immediately proceed with the following obligations: a. Stop Work as specified in the Notice. b. Complete any Work specified in the Notice of Termination in a least cost/shortest time manner while still maintaining the quality called for under the Contract Documents. c. Leave the property upon which the Contractor was working and upon which the facility (or facilities) forming the basis of the Contract Document is situated in a safe and sanitary manner such that it does not pose any threat to the public health or safety. d. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the portions of the Work terminated. e. Place no further subcontracts or orders, except as necessary to complete the continued portion of the Contract. f. Submit to the City's Representative, within ten (10) calendar days from the Effective Date of the Notice of Termination, all of the usual documentation called for by the Contract Documents to substantiate all costs incurred by the Contractor for labor, materials and equipment through the Effective Date of the Notice of Termination. Any documentation substantiating costs incurred by the Contractor solely as a result of the City's exercise of its right to terminate this Contract pursuant to this clause, which costs the contractor is authorized under the Contract documents to incur, shall: (1) be submitted to and received by the Engineer no later than 30 calendar days after the Effective Date of the Notice of Termination; (2) describe the costs incurred with particularity; and (3) be conspicuously identified as “Termination Costs occasioned by the City's Termination for Convenience.” 4. Termination of the Contract shall not relieve Surety of its obligation for any just claims arising out of or relating to the Work performed. 5. In the event that the City exercises its right to terminate this Contract pursuant to this clause, the City shall pay the Contractor, upon the Contractor's submission of the 45635.01000\31182317.1 -106- GENERAL CONDITIONS documentation required by this clause and other applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, the following amounts: a. All actual reimbursable costs incurred according to the provisions of this Contract. b. A reasonable allowance for profit on the cost of the Work performed, provided Contractor establishes to the satisfaction of the City's Representative that it is reasonably probable that Contractor would have made a profit had the Contract been completed and provided further, that the profit allowed shall in no event exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the costs. c. A reasonable allowance for Contractor's administrative costs in determining the amount payable due to termination of the Contract under this Article. C. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article, when immediate action is necessary to protect life and safety or to reduce significant exposure or liability, the City may immediately order Contractor to cease Work on the Project until such safety or liability issues are addressed to the satisfaction of the City or the Contract is terminated. ARTICLE 50. WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE OF WORK A. Contractor hereby warrants that materials and Work shall be completed in conformance with the Contract Documents and that the materials and Work provided will fulfill the requirements of this Warranty. Contractor hereby agrees to repair or replace, at the discretion of the City, any or all Work that may prove to be defective in its workmanship, materials furnished, methods of installation or fail to conform to the Contract Document requirements together with any other Work which may be damaged or displaced by such defect(s) within a period of one (1) year from the date of the Notice of Completion of the Project without any expense whatever to the City, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse and neglect excepted. Contractor shall be required to promptly repair or replace defective equipment or materials, at Contractor’s option. All costs associated with such corrective actions and testing, including the removal, replacement, and reinstitution of equipment and materials necessary to gain access, shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B. For any Work so corrected, Contractor’s obligation hereunder to correct defective Work shall be reinstated for an additional one (1) year period, commencing with the date of acceptance of such corrected Work. The reinstatement of the one (1) year warranty shall apply only to that portion of work that was corrected. Contractor shall perform such tests as City may require to verify that any corrective actions, including, without limitation, redesign, repairs, and replacements comply with the requirements of the Contract. In the event of Contractor’s failure to comply with the above- mentioned conditions within ten (10) calendar days after being notified in writing of required repairs, to the reasonable satisfaction of the City, the City shall have the right to correct and replace any defective or non-conforming Work and any work damaged by such work or the replacement or correction thereof at Contractor’s sole expense. Contractor shall be obligated to fully reimburse the City for any expenses incurred hereunder immediately upon demand. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -107- GENERAL CONDITIONS C. In addition to the warranty set forth in this Article, Contractor shall obtain for City all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice and assign to City any and all manufacturer’s or installer’s warranties for equipment or materials not manufactured by Contractor and provided as part of the Work, to the extent that such third-party warranties are assignable and extend beyond the warranty period set forth in this Article. Contractor shall furnish the City with all warranty and guarantee documents prior to final Acceptance of the Project by the City as required. D. When specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or when directed by the Engineer, the City may furnish materials or products to the Contractor for installation. In the event any act or failure to act by Contractor shall cause a warranty applicable to any materials or products purchased by the City for installation by the Contractor to be voided or reduced, Contractor shall indemnify City from and against any cost, expense, or other liability arising therefrom, and shall be responsible to the City for the cost of any repairs, replacement or other costs that would have been covered by the warranty but for such act or failure to act by Contractor. E. The Contractor shall remedy at its expense any damage to City-owned or controlled real or personal property. F. The City shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of any failure, defect, or damage. The Contractor shall within ten (10) calendar days after being notified commence and perform with due diligence all necessary Work. If the Contractor fails to promptly remedy any defect, or damage; the City shall have the right to replace, repair or otherwise remedy the defect, or damage at the Contractor’s expense. G. In the event of any emergency constituting an immediate hazard to health, safety, property, or licensees, when caused by Work of the Contractor not in accordance with the Contract requirements, the City may undertake at Contractor’s expense, and without prior notice, all Work necessary to correct such condition. H. Acceptance of Defective Work. 1. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work, the City prefers to accept it, City may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to City’s evaluation of and determination to accept such Defective Work and for the diminished value of the Work. 2. If any acceptance of defective work occurs prior to release of the Project Retention, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work and all costs incurred by City. 3. If the Project Retention is held in an escrow account as permitted by the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly alert the escrow holder, in writing, of the amount of Retention to be paid to City. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -108- GENERAL CONDITIONS 4. If the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after release of the Project Retention, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to City. I. City May Correct Defective Work. 1. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from City’s Representative to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by City, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, City may, after seven (7) Days’ written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency. 2. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, City may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take possession of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow City and City’s Representative, and the agents, employees, other contractors, and consultants of each of them, access to the Site to enable City to exercise the rights and remedies to correct the Defective Work. 3. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by City correcting the Defective Work will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions into the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. 4. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include, but not be limited to, all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Defective Work. 5. If the Change Order is executed after all payments under the Contract have been paid by City and the Project Retention is held in an escrow account as permitted by the Contract Documents, Contractor will promptly alert the escrow holder, in writing, of the amount of Retention to be paid to City. 6. If the Change Order is executed after release of the Project Retention, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to City. 7. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to City correcting Defective work. J. Nothing in the Warranty or in the Contract Documents shall be construed to limit the rights and remedies available to City at law or in equity, including, but not limited to, Code of Civil Procedure section 337.15. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -109- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 51. DOCUMENT RETENTION & EXAMINATION A. In accordance with Government Code section 8546.7, records of both the City and the Contractor shall be subject to examination and audit by the State Auditor General for a period of three (3) years after final payment. B. Contractor shall make available to the City any of the Contractor’s other documents related to the Project immediately upon request of the City. C. In addition to the State Auditor rights above, the City shall have the right to examine and audit all books, estimates, records, contracts, documents, bid documents, subcontracts, and other data of the Contractor (including computations and projections) related to negotiating, pricing, or performing the modification in order to evaluate the accuracy and completeness of the cost or pricing data at no additional cost to the City, for a period of four (4) years after final payment. ARTICLE 52. SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Work or on the Project site. Contractor shall permit other contractors reasonable access and storage of their materials and execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs. B. To ensure proper execution of its subsequent Work, Contractor shall immediately inspect work already in place and shall at once report to the Engineer any problems with the Work in place or discrepancies with the Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall ascertain to its own satisfaction the scope of the Project and nature of any other contracts that have been or may be awarded by the City in prosecution of the Project to the end that Contractor may perform this Contract in the light of such other contracts, if any. Nothing herein contained shall be interpreted as granting to Contractor exclusive occupancy at site of the Project. Contractor shall not cause any unnecessary hindrance or delay to any other contractor working on the Project. If simultaneous execution of any contract for the Project is likely to cause interference with performance of some other contract or contracts, the Engineer shall decide which Contractor shall cease Work temporarily and which contractor shall continue or whether work can be coordinated so that contractors may proceed simultaneously. The City shall not be responsible for any damages suffered or for extra costs incurred by Contractor resulting directly or indirectly from award, performance, or attempted performance of any other contract or contracts on the Project site. ARTICLE 53. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF All notices shall be in writing and either served by personal delivery or mailed to the other party as designated in the Bid Forms. Written notice to the Contractor shall be addressed to Contractor’s principal place of business unless Contractor designates another address in writing for service of notice. Notice to City shall be addressed to the City as designated in the Notice Inviting Bids unless City designates another address in writing for service of notice. Notice shall be effective upon receipt or five (5) calendar days after being sent by first class mail, whichever is earlier. Notice given by facsimile shall not be effective unless acknowledged in writing by the receiving party. 45635.01000\31182317.1 -110- GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 54. NOTICE OF THIRD PARTY CLAIMS Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 9201, the City shall provide the Contractor with timely notification of the receipt of any third-party claims relating to the Contract. The City is entitled to recover reasonable costs incurred in providing such notification. ARTICLE 55. STATE LICENSE BOARD NOTICE Contractors are required by law to be licensed and regulated by the Contractors’ State License Board which has jurisdiction to investigate complaints against contractors if a complaint regarding a patent act or omission is filed within four (4) years of the date of the alleged violation. A complaint regarding a latent act or omission pertaining to structural defects must be filed within ten (10) years of the date of the alleged violation. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors’ State License Board, P.O. Box 26000, Sacramento, California 95826. ARTICLE 56. INTEGRATION A. Oral Modifications Ineffective. No oral order, objection, direction, claim or notice by any party or person shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations contained in the Contract Documents. B. Contract Documents Represent Entire Contract. The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement of the City and Contractor. ARTICLE 57. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT Contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet or otherwise dispose of the rights or title of interest of any or all of this contract without the prior written consent of the City. Any assignment or change of Contractor’s name of legal entity without the written consent of the City shall be void. Any assignment of money due or to become due under this Contract shall be subject to a prior lien for services rendered or Material supplied for performance of Work called for under the Contract Documents in favor of all persons, firms, or corporations rendering such services or supplying such Materials to the extent that claims are filed pursuant to the Civil Code, the Code of Civil Procedure or the Government Code. ARTICLE 58. CHANGE IN NAME AND NATURE OF CONTRACTOR’S LEGAL ENTITY Should a change be contemplated in the name or nature of the Contractor’s legal entity, the Contractor shall first notify the City in order that proper steps may be taken to have the change reflected on the Contract and all related documents. No change of Contractor’s name or nature will affect City’s rights under the Contract, including but not limited to the bonds. ARTICLE 59. ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST ACTIONS Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 7103.5, in entering into a public works contract or subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, Contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the City all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 USC, Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from the purchase of goods, services, or 45635.01000\31182317.1 -111- GENERAL CONDITIONS materials pursuant to this contract or any subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the City tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the parties. ARTICLE 60. PROHIBITED INTERESTS No City official or representative who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the City to negotiate, supervise, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, supervising, making, accepting or approving any engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with construction of the project, shall be or become directly or indirectly interested financially in the Contract. ARTICLE 61. CONTROLLING LAW Notwithstanding any subcontract or other contract with any subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization performing any part of the Work, this Contract shall be governed by the law of the State of California excluding any choice of law provisions. ARTICLE 62. JURISDICTION; VENUE Contractor and any subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization performing any part of the Work agrees that any action or suits at law or in equity arising out of or related to the bidding, award, or performance of the Work shall be maintained in the Superior Court of Los Angeles County, California, and expressly consent to the jurisdiction of said court, regardless of residence or domicile, and agree that said court shall be a proper venue for any such action. ARTICLE 63. LAWS AND REGULATIONS A. Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on conduct of work as indicated and specified. If Contractor observes that drawings and specifications are at variance therewith, it shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided for in this Contract for changes in work. If Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, it shall bear all costs arising therefrom. B. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarity with the Americans with Disabilities Act (“ADA”) (42 U.S.C. § 12101 et seq.). The Work will be performed in compliance with ADA regulations. ARTICLE 64. PATENTS Contractor shall hold and save the City, officials, officers, employees, and authorized volunteers harmless from liability of any nature or kind of claim therefrom including costs and expenses for or on account of any patented or unpatented invention, article or appliance manufactured, furnished or used by Contractor in the performance of this contract. ARTICLE 65. OWNERSHIP OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All Contract Documents furnished by the City are City property. They are not to be used by Contractor or any subcontractor on other work nor shall Contractor claim any right to such 45635.01000\31182317.1 -112- GENERAL CONDITIONS documents. With exception of one complete set of Contract Documents, all documents shall be returned to the City on request at completion of the Work. ARTICLE 66. NOTICE OF TAXABLE POSSESSORY INTEREST In accordance with Revenue and Taxation Code section 107.6, the Contract Documents may create a possessory interest subject to personal property taxation for which Contractor will be responsible. ARTICLE 67. SURVIVAL OF OBLIGATIONS All reresentations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 Engineer of Record. A. For purposes of this Project, the Engineer of Record or Engineer shall be: Eric Yang, PE. 1.2 Location of the Project. A. The Project is located at various locations throughout the City of Azusa, CA. B. The general location of the Project is shown on City Drawing No. ________, Sheet 1. 1.3 Shared Cost Savings for Reductions in Contract Price; Value Engineering. NOT USED. 1.4 Status of the Project Area and Rights-of-Way. A. City, at its expense, will provide all rights-of-way or permits, or both, covering the crossing of private property and public and private rights-of-way necessary for the permanent Work; provided, however, Contractor shall, at its expense, obtain any bonds or insurance policies or pay any fees and enter into any agreements required by a controlling authority, e.g., Caltrans or Union Pacific Railroad Company, before Contractor enters upon any property or right-of-way under the jurisdiction of any such controlling authority for the purpose of performing Work. B. City has acquired or is negotiating to acquire any rights-of-way, or both, necessary for the permanent Work. C. If such permits are required, all operations of Contractor shall conform to the restrictions, regulations, and requirements set forth in said permits, copies of which will be included in the Contract Documents. D. Contractor may be required, as a condition for receiving final payment, to obtain, and provide City’s Representative with copies of, executed damage releases from the owners of public and private property whose property has been damaged by the Work. The damage releases will be on a form provided by City. E. Contractor shall, also, as a condition for receiving final payment, obtain, and provide City’s Representative with copies of, executed damage releases from the owners of certain public and private property or areas which have been crossed by the Work or otherwise affected by the Work. The damage releases will be on a form provided by City. 1.5 Site Data. A. The data provided herein is for the information of Contractor and is subject to all limitations and conditions set forth in the Contract Documents. B. Subsurface Exploration Data. The following data are included in the Project Manual: SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. _____ C. Other Site Data. The following data are available for inspection at City’s office: 1. _____ Copies of these reports, drawings and other materials may be examined at City’s office during regular business hours. 1.6 Pre-Purchased or Pre-Negotiated Material. NOT USED. 1.7 Designation of City’s Representative. A. Unless otherwise modified by City, City’s Representative shall be Robert Delgadillo. 1.8 Modification of Hours of Work. Working hours for this project are between 7:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. - Monday through Friday, excluding legal holidays and weekends. The Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, etc., shall not generate any noise at the work site, storage sites, staging areas, etc., before or after the normal working hours prescribed above. Should the Contractor elect to work outside normal working hours, Contractor must first obtain special permission from the Director of Public Works / CityEngineer. 1.9 Project Retention In accordance with Public Contract Code § 7201, City will withhold 5% of each progress payment as retention on the Project. 1.10 RESERVED. 1.11 Liquidated Damages Due to Contractor Delay. A. Time is of the essence. Should Contractor fail to complete all or any part of the Work within the time specified in the Contract Documents, City will suffer damage, the amount of which is difficult, if not impossible, to ascertain and, pursuant to the authority of Government Code section 53069.85, City shall therefore be entitled to $3,000 per Day as liquidated damages for each Day or part thereof that actual completion extends beyond the time specified. B. Liquidated damages may be deducted from progress payments due Contractor, Project retention or may be collected directly from Contractor, or from Contractor's surety. These provisions for liquidated damages shall not prevent City, in case of Contractor's default, from terminating the Contractor. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.12 Utility Outages – Notices to Residents. A. Should Contractor’s operations require interruption of any utility service, Contractor shall notify City at least ten (10) Days prior to the scheduled outage. Contractor will notify all impacted residents on a form provided by City at least seven (7) Days prior to the scheduled outage. B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing, at its cost, any temporary utility or facilities necessitated by the utility outage. 1.13 Schedule Constraints. NOT USED. 1.14 Noise Restrictions NOT USED. 1.15 Safety Programs. NOT USED. 1.16 Coordination with Other Contractors. NOT USED. END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The standard specifications for this project shall be based on the "Greenbook", A. current edition, except as amended by these bid, contract documents, and project plans. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 LAYOUT OF WORK AND QUANTITY SURVEYS General. The Contractor shall utilize a properly licensed surveyor to perform all layout A. surveys required for the control and completion of the Work, and all necessary surveys to compute quantities of Work performed. City and/or the Engineer of Record has established primary control to be used by the Contractor for establishing lines and grades required for the Work. Primary control consists of benchmarks and horizontal control points in the vicinity of the Work. A listing and identification of the primary control is provided on the Drawings. Before beginning any layout work or construction activity, the Contractor shall check and verify primary control, and shall advise the City Representative of any discrepancies. Quantity surveys. The Contractor shall perform such surveys and computations as B. are necessary to determine quantities of Work performed or placed during each progress payment period, and shall perform all surveys necessary for the City Representative to determine final quantities of Work in place. The City Representative will determine final quantities based upon the survey data provided by the Contractor, and the design lines and grades. If requested by the City Representative, the Contractor shall provide an electronic copy of data used for quantity computations. All surveys performed for measurement of final quantities of Work and material shall be subject to approval of City’s Representative. Unless waived by City’s Representative in each specific case, quantity surveys made by the Contractor shall be made in the presence of City’s Representative. Surveying C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Accuracy. Degree of accuracy shall be an order high enough to satisfy tolerances specified for the Work and the following: (a) Right-of-way and alignment of tangents and curves shall be within 0.1 foot. (b) Structure points shall be set within 0.01 foot, except where operational function of the special features or installation of metalwork and equipment require closer tolerances. When formwork has been placed and is ready for concrete, the Contractor shall check the formwork for conformance with the drawings and to ensure that the forms are sufficiently within the tolerance limits for the completed work. (c) Cross-section points shall be located within 0.1 foot, horizontally and vertically. (d) Aerial Mapping shall meet National Mapping Standards for 2-foot contour intervals. Records. Survey data shall be recorded in accordance with recognized professional D. surveying standards. Original field notes, computations, and other surveying data shall be recorded on electronic data collectors or in standard field books and must be of sufficient quality to enable the Contractor to prepare accurate record drawings as required by the Contract Documents. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, E. equipment, and labor required for surveys for the layout of work and quantity surveys shall be included in the Schedule of Pay Items for items of work requiring the surveys. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. 3.2 SCHEDULE Estimated Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare a Project schedule and shall A. submit this to the Engineer for Approval at the Pre-Construction Meeting. The receipt or Approval of any schedules by the Engineer or the City shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor is fully responsible to determine and provide for any and all staffing and resources at levels which allow for good quality and timely completion of the Project. Contractor’s failure to incorporate all elements of Work required for the performance of the Contract or any inaccuracy in the schedule shall not excuse the Contractor from performing all Work required for a completed Project within the specified Contract time period. If the required schedule is not received by the time the first payment under the Contract is due, Contractor shall not be paid until the schedule is received, reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. Schedule Contents. The schedule shall indicate the beginning and completion dates B. of all phases of construction; critical path for all critical, sequential time related activities; and “float time” for all “slack” or “gaps” in the non-critical activities. The schedule shall clearly identify all staffing and other resources which in the Contractor’s judgment are needed to complete the Project within the time specified for completion. The overall Project Schedule duration shall be within the Contract time. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Schedule Updates. Contractor shall continuously update its construction schedule. C. Contractor shall submit an updated and accurate construction schedule to the Engineer monthly and when requested to do so by Engineer or Public Works Inspector. The Engineer may withhold progress payments or other amounts due under the Contract Documents if Contractor fails to submit an updated and accurate construction schedule. 3.3 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE NOT USED. 3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY All traffic detector loops, fences, walls, culverts, property line monuments, or other A. obstructions (except property line monuments within five (5) feet of the centerline of the mains) which are removed, damaged, or destroyed in the course of the Work, shall be replaced or repaired to the original condition. If Contractor provides the City with reasonable notice of the need for such repair or replacement, it shall be performed by the City. If the Contractor fails to provide the City with reasonable notice, the repair or replacement shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor to the satisfaction of the City, whether or not those obstructions have been shown on the Plans, unless otherwise stated herein. It is then the Contractor’s responsibility to employ at its expense a Licensed Land Surveyor to restore all property line monuments located more than five (5) feet from the centerline of the mains, which are destroyed or obliterated. Property line monuments located within five (5) feet of the centerline of the mains will be replaced by the City at no expense to the Contractor, provided the City is notified at least 48 hours before the property line monuments are damaged. Contractor shall provide such heat, covering, and enclosures as are necessary to B. protect all Work, materials, equipment, appliances, and tools against damage by weather conditions. Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect existing sidewalks, curbs, C. pavements, utilities, and other adjoining property and structures, and to avoid damage thereto, and Contractor shall repair any damage thereto caused by the Work operations. Contractor shall: 1. Enclose the working area with a substantial barricade, and arrange work to cause minimum amount of inconvenience and danger to the public. 2. Provide substantial barricades around any shrubs or trees indicated to be preserved. 3. Deliver materials to the Project site over a route designated by the Engineer. 4. Provide any and all dust control required and follow the Applicable air quality regulations as appropriate. If the Contractor does not comply, the City shall have the immediate authority to provide dust control and deduct the cost from payments to the Contractor. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 5. Confine Contractor’s apparatus, the storage of materials, and the operations of its workers to limits required by law, ordinances, permits, or directions of the Engineer. Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the Project site with its materials. 6. Take care to prevent disturbing or covering any survey markers, monuments, or other devices marking property boundaries or corners. If such markers are disturbed by accident, they shall be replaced by a civil engineer or land surveyor acceptable to the City, at no cost to the City. 7. Ensure that existing facilities, fences and other structures are all adequately protected and that, upon completion of all Work, all facilities that may have been damaged are restored to a condition acceptable to the City. 8. Preserve and protect from injury all buildings, pole lines and all direction, warning and mileage signs that have been placed within the right-of-way. 9. At the completion of work each day, leave the Project site in a clean, safe condition. 10. Comply with any stage construction and traffic control plans. Access to residences and businesses shall be maintained at all times, unless otherwise permitted in writing by the City. These precautionary measures will apply continuously and not be limited to normal D. working hours. Full compensation for the Work involved in the preservation of life, safety and property as above specified shall be considered as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of Work, and no additional allowance will be made therefore. Should damage to persons or property occur as a result of the Work, Contractor shall E. be responsible for proper investigation, documentation, including video or photography, to adequately memorialize and make a record of what transpired. The City shall be entitled to inspect and copy any such documentation, video, or photographs. 3.5 SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS Work Included. A. Contractor shall conduct thorough pre-construction and post-construction site condition surveys of the entire project area. Site Conditions surveys shall include written documentation of the conditions found, as well as photographs and video recordings of the area within at least 80 feet of any construction area and staging area. The written notes, photographs, and video shall be suitable for forensic purposes to resolve any damage claims that may arise as a result of construction. Submittals. B. 1. Written documentation of site condition survey at pre-construction and post- construction. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Photographs as described herein of pre-construction and post-construction conditions. 3. Video recordings as described herein of pre-construction and post-construction conditions. 4. Submittals shall be made within three days of the surveys. All post-construction data shall be submitted prior to the final project inspection. Site Condition Written Documentation. C. Written documentation shall include the time, date, and conditions under which the site survey was made. The documentation shall note the condition of structures, pavement, sidewalks, utilities, fences, and etc. within the work areas. Photographs. D. 1. General – Contractor shall take enough photographs during each site survey to provide a record of conditions existing prior to construction and conditions after construction. Pre-construction photographs shall be taken prior to any construction or mobilization of equipment, but not more that one week prior to actual start of work. The pre-construction photographs may be staged at different times to match the progression of the Work. 2. The photographs shall document existing damage to public and private facilities, both prior to and after construction. Conditions to be documented include, but are not limited to: sidewalk cracks, broken curbs, separated property walls, improvements within public right-of-ways, access roads used, utility covers and markings, signs, pavement striping, pavement, unique or unusual conditions, adjacent driveways, landscaping, survey markers, and any feature directed by the Engineer. Private property that is adjacent to the public right-of-way shall be documented to the extent visible from the public right-of-way. 3. Photographs shall include items to indicate scale, as needed. In particular, scales or other items shall be laid next to close ups of structural cracks and other damaged areas being recorded. Scaling shall also be used to document elevation differences, as needed. 4. One set of color prints shall be submitted. Additional sets shall be available for reviewing in settling any construction disputes. A set of photos shall also be furnished in electronic format. The resolution shall be at least equal to 7 mega- pixels. All photos shall be documented as to time and date taken, photographer, project number, location, and orientation. Documentation shall include a brief description of objects photographed. Video Recording. E. 1. Video recordings shall document the conditions of the entire area affected by construction, as well as nearby structures and facilities. The general documentation requirements for videos are the same as for photographs. Video recorders shall accurately and continuously record the time and date. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Video recordings shall include an audio portion made simultaneously during the videoing. The audio recording shall describe the location, time, orientation, and objects being recorded. Special commentary shall be provided for unusual conditions or damage noted. 3. Video equipment shall be capable of producing high resolution images and shall have zoom capabilities. 4. Video recordings shall provide an overall picture of the sites and shall provide detailed images of damaged areas. Video shall extend to the maximum height of structures. 5. The Engineer shall have the right to reject any audio video recordings submitted with unintelligible audio, uncontrolled pan or zoom, or of poor quality. Video recordings shall be repeated when rejected. 6. Video recordings shall be submitted with labels indicating the project, date, recorder, and other pertinent information. Recordings shall be submitted on standard DVDs in a standard format. Timing. F. Contractor shall provide written notice of the time scheduled for the site conditions survey and the place it is to begin. Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s concurrence prior to beginning the condition survey. The Engineer reserves the right to cancel the survey due to weather conditions or other problems. Videoing shall be done during times of good visibility and no videoing or photography shall be done during periods of visible precipitation or when standing water obscures pavement. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an opportunity to have a representative present when taking the photos and provide guidance during photographing. Site Surveyor. G. The site condition surveyor(s) shall be experienced in construction and potential damage concerns. The site condition surveyor(s) shall be familiar with the photography and video equipment being used. Field Quality Control. H. Prior to submitting videos and photographs, the Contractor shall spot check the photos and videos in the field to insure they accurately reflect the actual conditions and to insure they are correctly labeled. Soils Compaction Testing. I. 1. All soils compaction testing will be done by a licensed geotechnical engineer furnished by the City. Soils compaction testing will be done for all footings and foundations prior to placement of rebar or concrete. 2. For pipeline construction, soil compaction testing will be done at 100-foot intervals at the bottom of the trench prior to placement of pipe bedding; at the top GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of the pipe bedding above the pipe; every two vertical feet of trench backfill; at the top of the trench backfill, which sould be the bottom of the pavement section; and at the top of the aggregate base prior to pavement construction. 3.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS General. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all Work required for A. furnishing submittals to City in accordance with Contract Documents. Technical Manuals. B. 1. The Contractor shall submit technical operation and maintenance information for each item of mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in an organized manner in the Technical Manual. It shall be written so that it can be used and understood by City’s operation and maintenance staff. 2. The Technical Manual shall be subdivided first by specification section number; second, by equipment item; and last, by "Category." "Categories" shall conform to the following (as applicable): (a) Category 1 - Equipment Summary: (1) Summary: A summary table shall indicate the equipment name, equipment number, and process area in which the equipment is installed. (b) Category 2 - Operational Procedures: (1) Procedures: Manufacturer-recommended procedures on the following shall be included in Part 2: a. Installation b. Adjustment c. Startup d. Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or related instrumentation needed for operation e. Operation procedures f. Load changes g. Calibration h. Shutdown i. Troubleshooting j. Disassembly k. Reassembly GENERAL REQUIREMENTS l. Realignment m. Testing to determine performance efficiency n. Tabulation of proper settings for all pressure relief valves, low and high pressure switches, and other protection devices o. List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact settings (c) Category 3 - Preventive Maintenance Procedures: (1) Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include all manufacturer-recommended procedures to be performed on a periodic basis, both by removing and replacing the equipment or component, and by leaving the equipment in place. (2) Schedules: Recommended frequency of preventive maintenance procedures shall be included. Lubrication schedules, including lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature ranges, shall be covered. (d) Category 4 - Parts List: (1) Parts List: A complete parts list shall be furnished, including a generic description and manufacturer's identification number for each part. Addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and parts warehouse shall be included. (2) Drawings: Cross-sectional or exploded view drawings shall accompany the parts list. (e) Category 5 - Wiring Diagrams: (1) Diagrams: Part 5 shall include complete internal and connection wiring diagrams for electrical equipment items. (f) Category 6 - Shop Drawings: (1) Drawings: This part shall include approved shop or fabrication drawings, complete with dimensions. (g) Category 7 - Safety: (1) Procedures: This part describes the safety precautions to be taken when operating and maintaining the equipment or working near it. (h) Category 8 - Documentation: (1) All equipment warranties, affidavits, and certifications required by the Technical Specifications shall be placed in this part. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3. The Contractor shall furnish to City six (6) identical Technical Manuals. Each set shall consist of one or more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard binder. Spare Parts List - The Contractor shall furnish to City six (6) identical sets of spare C. parts information for all mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation equipment. The spare parts list shall include the current list price of each spare part. The spare parts list shall include those spare parts which each manufacturer recommends be maintained by City in inventory. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name, address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to assist City in ordering. The Contractor shall cross-reference all spare parts lists to the equipment numbers designated in the Contract Documents. The spare parts lists shall be bound in standard size, 3-ring binder. Record Drawings D. 1. The Contractor shall maintain one record set of Drawings at the Site. On these, it shall mark all Project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the information represented in the original Contract Documents, including buried or concealed construction and utility features which are revealed during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract Drawings. Said record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or directed to fully indicate the Work as actually constructed. These master record drawings of the as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by Addenda and Change Orders shall be maintained up-to-date during the progress of the Project. Red ink shall be used for alterations and notes. Notes shall identify relevant Change Orders by number and date. 2. For all Projects involving the installation of any pipeline, Contractor shall survey and record the top of the pipe at a minimum of every 100 linear feet, and at each bend, recording both the horizontal and vertical locations. 3. Record drawings shall be accessible to City’s Representative at all times during the construction period. Failure on the Contractor’s part to keep record drawings current could result in withholding partial payment. 4. Upon Completion of the Project and as a condition of final acceptance, the Contractor shall finalize and deliver a complete set of Record Drawings to City’s Representative. The information submitted by the Contractor will be assumed to be correct, and the Contractor shall be responsible for, and liable to City, for the accuracy of such information, and for any errors or omissions which may or may not appear on the Record Drawings. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, E. equipment, and labor required to complete the Manuals and Record Drawings shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.7 MATERIALS Materials to be Furnished by the Contractor A. 1. Inspection of Materials. Materials furnished by the Contractor which will become a part of the Project shall be subject to inspection at any one or more of the following locations, as determined by City’s Representative: at the place of production or manufacture, at the shipping point, or at the site of the Work. To allow sufficient time to provide for inspection, the Contractor shall submit to City’s Representative, at the time of issuance, copies of purchase orders or other written instrument confirming procurement of the materials, including drawings and other pertinent information, covering materials on which inspection will be made. 2. No later than fourteen (14) Days prior to manufacture of material, Contractor shall inform City’s Representative, in writing, the date the material is to be manufactured. 3. Contractors Obligations. The inspection of materials at any of the locations specified above or the waiving of the inspection thereof shall not impact whether the materials and equipment conform to the Contract Documents. Contractor will not be relieved from furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents due to City’s inspection or lack of inspection of the equipment or materials. Acceptance of any materials will be made only after materials are installed in the Project. 4. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to accommodate City’s testing efforts, including any travel required by Contractor’s forces, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items related to the materials requiring testing. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. 3.8 LOCAL CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Access to Work and Haul Routes A. 1. General. All work on the rights-of-way necessary for access to the Site shall be performed by the Contractor. 2. Access, Damage, Restoration. The Contractor shall make his own investigation of the condition of available public or private roads and of clearances, restrictions, bridge-load limits, permit or bond requirements, and other limitations that affect or may affect transportation and ingress or egress at the Site. Claims for changes in Contract Price or Contract Times arising out of the unavailability of transportation facilities or limitations thereon shall not be considered by City. 3. The Contractor shall maintain and repair any damage arising out of Contractor’s operations to all roads used during construction of the Project, and upon completion of all Work, but prior to final acceptance, the roads shall be restored to their original condition. Prior to using any road for access to the Site, the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Contractor shall conduct a photograph and/or video survey of the roadway with a copy submitted to City’s Representative. 4. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to complete this Work, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Power. Contractor shall provide at its own expense all necessary power required for B. operations under the contract. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order such modern equipment and installations as shall be adequate in the opinion of the Engineer to perform in a safe and satisfactory manner the Work required by the contract. Construction Water. C. 1. Construction water shall not be used for purposes other than those required to satisfactorily complete the contract. 2. All connections to the City's water system used for the purposes of obtaining construction water shall utilize a temporary construction meter and backflow prevention device supplied by the City. The City-furnished backflow prevention device shall be tested immediately after installation and the construction meter and backflow prevention device shall not be placed into service until the backflow prevention device passes such tests. Backflow prevention device testing shall be performed in accordance with applicable standards, and test results shall be provided to the Engineer. If the temporary construction meter and backflow prevention device are moved to alternate location(s) during construction, the backflow prevention device shall again be tested as described above immediately after re-installation. 3. For each temporary construction meter requested by the Contractor for the performance of work under this contract, an amount equivalent to the deposit requirement for temporary construction meters listed in the current approved version of the City’s Policies and Procedures Manual shall be withheld from the final contract payment until the temporary construction meters are returned. Operation of Existing Water Facilities D. 1. The Contractor shall not operate any of the existing water systems, including pumps, motors, and hydrants, but shall contact the City two (2) working days in advance with a list and location of the water system facilities that will require operating, opening, stopping, or closure by the City. 2. At the option of the Engineer, the Contractor may be permitted to operate valves for the purpose of making connections to existing mains. The City will perform all notification to existing customers regarding temporary loss of service. 3. Contractor shall submit a request on City’s standard form for any shut-down of existing water facilities. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4. [**INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NOTICE (DOOR HANGERS) REQUIREMENTS, IF ANY**]. Construction at Existing Utilities E. 1. General. Where the Work to be performed crosses or otherwise interferes with water, sewer, gas, or oil pipelines; buried cable; or other public or private utilities, the Contractor shall perform construction in such a manner so that no damage will result to either public or private utilities. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the actual locations of, and make accommodates to maintain, all utilities. 2. Permission, Notice and Liability. Before any utility is taken out of service, permission shall be obtained by the Contractor from the owner. The owner, any impacted resident or business owner and the City Representative will be advised of the nature and duration of the utility outage as well as the Contractor’s plan for providing temporary utilities if required by the owner. The Contractor shall be liable for all damage which may result from its failure to maintain utilities during the progress of the Work, and the Contractor shall indemnify City as required by the Contract Documents from all claims arising out of or connected with damage to utilities encountered during construction; damages resulting from disruption of service; and injury to persons or damage to property resulting from the negligent, accidental, or intentional breaching of utilities. 3. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to complete this Work, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Traffic Control F. 1. General. Contractor shall abide by traffic control plans approved by the appropriate jurisdiction. 2. Protections. Roads subject to interference by the Work shall be kept open or suitable temporary passages through the Work shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient flasher lights, flag persons, danger signals, and signs, and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Work and the safety of the public. No construction work along public or private roads may proceed until the Contractor has proper barricades, flasher lights, flag persons, signals, and signs in place at the construction site. 3. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to complete this Work, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Cleaning Up G. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Contractor at all times shall keep premises free from debris such as waste, rubbish, and excess materials and equipment. Contractor shall not store debris under, in, or about the premises. Contractor shall also clean all asphalt and concrete areas to the degree necessary to remove oil, grease, fuel, or other stains caused by Contractor operations or equipment. The use of water, resulting in mud on streets, will not be permitted as substitute for sweeping or other methods. Dust control may require having a water truck onsite for the duration of the project, and/or use of temporary hoses and pipelines to convey water. 2. Contractor shall fully clean up the site at the completion of the Work. If the Contractor fails to immediately clean up at the completion of the Work, the City may do so and the cost of such clean up shall be charged back to the Contractor. 3.9 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY PROTECTION Environmental Conditions A. NOT USED. Landscape and Vegetation Preservation B. 1. General. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and vegetation, and shall conduct operations so as to prevent unnecessary destruction, scarring, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the Work. 2. Damage and Restoration. Movement of crews and equipment within the rights-of- way and over routes provided for access to the Work shall be performed in a manner to prevent damage to property. When no longer required, construction roads shall be restored to original contours. 3. Upon completion of the Work, and following removal of construction facilities and required cleanup, land used for construction purposes and not required for the completed installation shall be scarified and regraded, as required, so that all surfaces are left in a condition that will facilitate natural revegetation, provide for proper drainage, and prevent erosion. 4. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to complete this Work, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Protected Species C. 1. General. If, in the performance of the Work, evidence of the possible occurrence of any Federally listed threatened or endangered plant or animal is discovered, the Contractor shall notify the City Representative immediately, giving the location and nature of the findings. Written confirmation of the evidence, location and nature of the findings shall be forwarded to City within 2 Days. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Procedures. The Contractor shall immediately cease all construction activities in the immediate area of the discovery to the extent necessary to protect the endangered plant or animal. If directed by the City Representative, Contractor will refrain from working in the immediate area, suspend the Work in its entirety, or alter its performance to ensure full compliance with all applicable permits, laws and regulations. Any City directed changes to the Work as a result of a siting will be pursuant to the Contract Documents. 3. False Siting. Any costs or delays incurred by City or the Contractor due to unreasonable or false notification of an endangered plant or animal will be borne by the Contractor. 4. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to comply with this paragraph, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Preservation of Historical and Archeological Resources D. 1. General. If, in the performance of the Work, Contractor should unearth cultural resources (for example, human remains, animal bones, stone tools, artifacts and/or midden deposits) through excavation, grading, watering or other means, the Contractor notify the Construction/Archeological Monitor and/or the City Representative immediately, giving the location and nature of the findings. Written confirmation of the evidence, location and nature of the findings shall be forwarded to the Construction/Archeological Monitor and/or City within 2 Days. 2. Procedures. The Contractor shall immediately cease all construction activities in the immediate area of the discovery to the extent necessary to protect the cultural resource. If directed by the City Representative, Contractor will refrain from working in the immediate area, suspend the Work in its entirety, or re-sequence and/or alter its performance to ensure full compliance with all applicable permits, laws and regulations. Should the presence of cultural resources be confirmed, the Contractor will assist the City Representative and the Construction/Archeological Monitor in the preparation and implementation of a data recovery plan. The Contractor shall provide such cooperation and assistance as may be necessary to preserve the cultural resources for removal or other disposition. Any City directed changes to the Work as a result of the cultural resource will be pursuant to the Contract Documents. 3. Contractor’s Liability. Should Contractor, without permission, injure, destroy, excavate, appropriate, or remove any cultural resource on or adjacent to the Site, it will be subject to disciplinary action, arrest and penalty under applicable law. The Contractor shall be principally responsible for all costs of mitigation and/or restoration of cultural resources related to the unauthorized actions identified above. Contractor shall be required to pay for unauthorized damage and mitigation costs to cultural resources (historical and archeological resources) as GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a result of unauthorized activities that damage cultural resources and shall indemnify City pursuant to the Contract Documents. 4. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to comply with this paragraph, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Dust and Pollution Control E. 1. Contractor shall provide all necessary material, equipment and labor to prevent and control the emission of dust and any other potential pollutant on site. 2. Contractor shall not discharge into the atmosphere from any source smoke, dust or other air contaminants in violation of the law, rules, and regulations of the governing agency. 3. Cost. Unless otherwise called for by the Contract Documents, the cost of all material, equipment, and labor required to comply with this paragraph, shall be included in Contractor’s bid and distributed in the Schedule of Pay Items. No additional compensation shall be made to the Contractor for this Work. Fugitive Dust F. NOT USED. OR 1. In addition to all other environmental and air quality requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor must also comply with the most recent version of any rules implemented by the Air Quality Management District (AQMD) with jurisdiction over the Project in order to reduce the amount of particulate matter entrained in the ambient air as a result of the Project. All equipment shall be AQMD compliant and permitted, as needed. 2. City has considered these other requirements when determining the Contract Times and no additional time or compensation will be added to the Contract due to these requirements. Management of Storm, Surface and Other Waters G. 1. Storm water, surface water, groundwater, and nuisance, or other waters may be encountered at various times during construction of the Project. Federal and State laws require the City and its contractors to manage such waters pursuant to the requirements of California State Water Resources Control Board Order Number 2009-0009-DWQ, the Federal Clean Water Act, and the California Porter Cologne Water Quality Control Act. Contractor acknowledges that it has investigated the risk arising from such waters in conjunction with the Project, and assumes any and all risks and liabilities arising therefrom. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. The Contractor shall perform all construction operations in such a manner as to comply, and ensure all subcontractors to comply, with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws, orders, and regulations concerning the control and abatement of water pollution; and all terms and conditions of any applicable permits issued for the Project. In the event there is a conflict between Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and requirements, the most stringent shall apply. 3. Contractor violations. If noncompliance should occur, the Contractor shall report this to the City Representative immediately, with the specific information submitted in writing within 2 Days. Consistent violations of applicable Federal, State, or local laws, orders, regulations, or Water Quality Standards may result in City stopping all site activity until compliance is ensured. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any change in Contract Price or Contract Times, claim for damage, or additional compensation by reason of such a work stoppage. Corrective measures required to bring activities into compliance shall be at the Contractor's expense. 4. Compliance with Construction General Storm water Permit. Contractor shall be required to comply with all aspects of the State Water Resources Control Board (State Board) Water Quality Order No. 2009-0009-DWQ, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity (Permit) for all projects that involve construction on or disturbance of one acre or more of land or which are part of a larger common area of development. (a) SECTION 7 – RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR Add to Section 7-8.6.1 General The Contractor shall provide a Water Pollution Control Program (WPCP) which describes in specific detail the Contractor’s responsibilities to prevent contamination of the storm water collection system. The plan shall address both common construction activities and extraordinary events and meets the requirements of the “National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Storm Water Discharges associated with construction activity. The plan shall address the prevention of particulates or pollutants from entering the storm water system from the job site, whether due to routine operations or spills. Water pollution control work includes implementation, inspection maintenance and removal of all Best Management Practices (BMP) devices as outlined in the WPCP and as directed by the Engineer. Construction Stormwater Monitoring work includes, but is not limited to, providing a Qualified WPCP Practitioner (QSP) for implementation, and following the aspects of Order No. 2009‐009‐DWQ, 2010‐0014‐DWQ and any applicable amendments, under direction of the City. The Contractor shall provide continuously at the jobsite all the tools, equipment, and materials necessary to implement the WPCP at all times GENERAL REQUIREMENTS from project initiation through completion, including any punch list or warranty work on the project. (1) The Contractor shall submit the following: i) One (1) final electronic copy of the approved WPCP on a CD or DVD ii) Weekly inspection logs of WPCP adherence and BMPs (2) Protection of Existing Storm Water System: As the first order of work, the Contractor shall protect the existing storm water system for entrance of particulates and pollutants. Such protection shall include implementing the BMPs as outlined in the WPCP. Materials Storage Areas: All materials and/or equipment storage areas where liquid construction materials such as asphalt emulsions, paving oils, seal coat materials, etc. shall be protected by a physical barrier capable of containing the entire volume of stored liquid materials. During active construction activities, portions of the barrier may be removed for access. However, the barrier materials must be readily accessible for replacement by on-site construction personnel. The barrier must be in place at all times during the absence of Contractor personnel at the storage site. System Inspection and Maintenance: The Contractor shall inspect and repair/replace any damaged or clogged element on a daily basis. The Contractor shall provide a monitoring log of each inspection. Non-Storm Spills or Pollution: If necessary, the WPCP shall address practices for cleanup of spilled or leaked pollutants such as hydraulic oil from damaged or leaking equipment. The plan shall include readily available equipment and materials to contain and absorb the pollutants, collection of these materials, and disposal of the materials to an approved disposal site. The plan shall include ultimate disposal from the Contractor’s yard. The Contractor shall keep a record of any spills on the daily inspection logs. In addition, at the end of the project, the Contractor must certify that all contaminated materials have been properly disposed in accordance with the WPCP. The Contractor shall allow authorized agents of the California Regional Water Quality Control Board, State Water Resources Control Board, United States Environmental Protection Agency and the City of Ausa to: 1) Enter upon the construction site(s) and the Contractor’s facilities pertinent to the work. 2) Have access to and copy records that must be kept as specified in the Permit. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3) Inspect the construction site and related soil stabilization practices and sediment control measures 4) Sample or monitor for the purpose of ensuring compliance with the Permit. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately upon request from the regulatory agencies to enter, inspect, sample, monitor or otherwise access the project site or the Contractor’s records. The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs and for liabilities imposed by law as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the provisions set forth in this section, “Erosion, Sediment and Water Pollution Control,” including but not limited to compliance with the applicable provisions of the Federal, State, and local regulations. For the purposes of this paragraph, costs and liabilities include, but are not limited to, fines, penalties and damages, whether assessed against the City or the Contractor, including those levied under the Federal Clean Water Act and the State Porter Cologne Water Quality Act. Replace Section 7-8.6.5 Payment The Contractor shall be paid for the work of preparing, implementing, inspecting, maintaining, and removing the WPCP on a lump sum basis as indicated in the Bid Schedule. In addition, failure to perform and document the required daily inspections shall result in a daily penalty of $250.00 per calendar day. The imposition of the penalty shall not relieve the Contractor of any obligations of these project requirements. (b) City retains the right to procure and maintain coverage under the Permit for the Project site if the Contractor fails to draft a WPCP or other Permit related document, or fails to proceed in a manner that is satisfactory to City. City reserves the right to implement its own WPCP at the Project site, and hire additional contractors to maintain compliance. Whether Contractor has adequately maintained compliance with the Permit shall be City’s sole determination. In the event that Contractor has failed or is unable to maintain compliance with the Permit, any costs or fines incurred by City in implementing a WPCP, or otherwise maintaining compliance with the Construction General Permit shall be paid by the Contractor. (c) Failure to implement the WPCP or otherwise comply with the Permit is a violation of federal and state law. Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify City as required by the Contract Documents for any noncompliance or alleged noncompliance with the Permit arising out of or in connection with the Project, except for liability resulting from the sole established negligence, willful misconduct or active negligence of City. City may seek damages from Contractor for delay in completing the Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, caused by Contractor’s failure to comply with the Permit. 5. In addition to compliance with the Permit, Contractor shall comply with the lawful requirements of any applicable municipality, district, drainage district, flood GENERAL REQUIREMENTS control district, and other local agencies regarding discharges of storm water, surface water, groundwater or other nuisance waters off of the Project site. 6. Oil storage tanks management. (a) Storage tank placement. All oil or other petroleum product (hereinafter referred to collectively as oil) storage tanks shall be placed at least 20 feet from streams, flowing or dry watercourses, lakes, wetlands, reservoirs, and any other water source. (b) Storage area dikes. Storage areas shall be diked at least 12 inches high or graded and sloped to permit safe containment of leaks and spills equal to the capacity of all tanks and/or containers located within each area, plus a sufficient amount of freeboard to contain the 25-year rainstorm. (c) Diked area barriers. Diked areas shall have an impermeable barrier at least 10 mils thick. Areas used for refueling operations shall have an impermeable liner at least 10 mils thick buried under 2 to 4 inches of soil. (d) Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasure Plan (SPCC). Where the location of a construction site is such that oil from an accidental spillage could reasonably be expected to enter into or upon the navigable waters of the United States or adjoining shorelines, and the aggregate storage of oil at the site is over 1,320 gallons or a single container has a capacity in excess of 660 gallons, the Contractor shall prepare an SPCC Plan. The Contractor shall submit the SPCC Plan to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to delivery or storage of oil at the site. The Plan must have been reviewed and certified by a registered professional engineer in accordance with 40 C.F.R., part 112 7. Underground tank prohibition. The Contractor shall not use underground storage tanks. 8. Construction safety standards. The Contractor shall comply with the sanitation and potable water requirements of Section 7 of United States Bureau of Reclamation's publication “Reclamation Safety And Health Standards.” 9. Other Permits. (a) Other permits applicable to the Project are listed in the Special Conditions. The Contractor shall obtain all other necessary licenses and permits. (b) Monitoring. The Contractor is required to conduct monitoring in order to meet the requirements of the permits, which may include sampling, testing and inspections. (c) Recordkeeping. The Contractor shall retain all records and data required by the permits for the time specified in the contract. 10. Cost. Except as specified herein, the cost of complying with this section shall be included in the Schedule of Pay Items for work which necessitate the water pollution prevention measures required by this paragraph. END OF GENERAL REQUIREMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNALS AND COMMUNICATIONS Each respective bid item as shown on the proposal form shall comply with the respective section of the most current edition of State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, its supplements, and any other publication as specified or listed in the General Conditions. If there is a conflict between these inclusions and the Standard Specifications, these inclusions shall have precedence, with the following changes and/or additions, unless indicated otherwise: Division VIII Miscellaneous Constructiom 73-3 Sidewalks, Gutter Depressions, Island Paving, Curb Ramps, Aand Driveways 73-3.01A Summary Curb ramp shall be installed at the locations as shown on the plans. Division IX Traffic Control Devices 82 Signs and Markers Add to 82-1.02 Materials LED Internally Illuminated street name signs (IISNS) shall be used throughout the project. LED IISNS type shall be per project plans unless otherwise approved by the City inspector. 82-2.01 General All regulartory signs with white background shall have Type VIII retroreflective sheeting. All regulatory signs with red background and all warning signs shall have Type XI retroreflective sheeting. Division X Electrical Work 86-1.02 Materials 86-1.02A General 86-1.02A(1) Closed Circuit Television Camera System 86-1.02A(1)(a) General Closed circuit television (CCTV) camera system consists of installing COHU|HD RISE 4220HD Series or equivalent CCTV camera assembly, pole mount, system cables, and surge protector. 86-1.02A(1)(b) Closed Circuit Television Camera Assembly Prototype equipment will not be allowed. All equipment must be current standard production units. The CCTV camera assembly must include these components: 1. Camera TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 2. Motorized zoom lens 3. Pressurized enclosure 4. Pan and tilt unit The CCTV camera assembly must have all necessary wiring, cables, and connectors. CCTV camera assemblies must be plug-compatible, interchangeable and suitable for use with the CCTV camera cable assembly. Contractor must apply an approved weather-resistant spray to the inside of the connectors before engaging the connectors. CCTV camera assembly components must be rated for NEMA 4X, IP 66 or IP 67. 86-1.02A(1)(c) Camera Technical Requirents Cameras supplied must meet the following: Parameter Specification Sensor 1/2.8” CMOS Resolution 1920 x 1080 Sensitivity Standard Color, 1/30, f1.4 .04 lux (0.04 fc) B/W, 1/30, f1.6 0.04lux (0.004 fc) Digital Slow Shutter Color, 1/2, f 1.4 0.025 lux (0.0025 fc) B/W, 1/2, f1.6 0.0025 lux (0.00025 fc) Optical Zoom Range 30X, 4.4 to 132 mm The camera must be equipped with an electronic shutter with selectable speeds ranging from 1/4 to 1/10,000 second. The camera must have the capability of superimposing 3 lines of 24 alphanumeric characters on the upper left corner of the video image. Characters must be displayed in uppercase with white font with a black border. The camera assembly must be able to activate or blank the alphanumeric display by commands through the serial port. Each character must be between 25 and 30 TV lines high. Lines 2 and 3 must be programmable, supporting all ASCII symbols from space (20 hexadecimal) to Z (5A hexadecimal). Line 1 must display the word "CAMERA" and some status information generated as follows: CHARACTER DESCRIPTION 1 to 6 "CAMERA" 7 space (blank) 8 to 10 Camera ID TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 11 space 12 to 13 space, LC, LP or IM 14 space 15 to 16 space or preset position number Characters 12-13 Detail The Camera Assembly must display space (blank) unless one of the conditions below is detected, in which case the Camera Assembly must display the corresponding characters. In a case where more than one condition is detected, the characters corresponding to the highest priority condition must be displayed (1 being highest priority and 6 being the lowest priority). The conditions are as follows: Condition Char. Priority Local LC 1 Iris Manual IM 2 Low Pressure LP 3 Alarm 2 A2 4 Alarm 3 A3 5 Alarm 4 A4 6 The camera assembly must be able to detect and retain in memory the above alarm and status conditions. In addition to displaying these data on the video, they must also be sent to the CCT through the serial port. The description is as follows: Local: This condition is activated at the CCTV site using a laptop computer. Iris Manual: This condition is activated by command through the serial port. Characters 15-16 Detail If a preset position is active, the Camera Assembly must display the corresponding preset position number in decimal, sector id, character generator. 86-1.02A(1)(d) Electrical Requirements Cameras supplied must meet the following: Parameter Specification Operating Voltage PoE or 24 V(ac) Power Consumption 60 W (Maximum) Video Output Signal NTSC, 1 V p-p at 75 ohms, unbalanced Video Output Connector Standard BNC bulkhead on rear of camera Signal To Noise Ratio >50 dB Synchronization Internal sync or phase adjustable line lock Video Output Level 1.0 V p-p (75 Ω composite) Gain Control Automatic Automatic Back Focus (Automatic White Balance) Required TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Programming must be stored non-volatile memory and the CCTV assembly firmware must be updateable via serial communication. 86-1.02A(1)(e) Environmental Requirements Cameras supplied must meet the following: Parameter Specification Protection Rating IP68 Operating Temperature From -34 to 74 ˚C 86-1.02A(1)(f) Motorized Zoom Lens 86-1.02A(1)(f)(i) General The lens must have motors for zoom, focus and iris. The lens must have capability for focus and zoom preset positions. A telescopic converter or extender must not be used to achieve required focal length range. 86-1.02A(1)(f)(ii) Technical and Functional Requirements The lens must meet the following: Parameter Specification Iris Motorized, with automatic and manual adjust modes Focal Length 4.4 to 132 mm (Optical power not less than 30X) Lens Aperture From F1.4 to F4.6 Horizontal angle of view at Maximum Focal Length 63.4 to 2.1 degrees When the camera is pointed at a very bright object and or when the camera and lens is first turned on, the image produced by the lens and camera combination must not optically "oscillate" (i.e., produce an image that alternates from too light to too dark) or otherwise be unstable. Each lens must have an automatic, motor-driven iris with manual override. The lens must include mechanical or electrical means to protect the motors from over running in the extreme position. The iris must be controlled directly through the camera in automatic mode and from any keyboard connected into the camera system in the manual mode. The automatic iris must provide continuous aperture adjustments of the lens as determined by the amount of light reaching the camera imager. The power supply and electronics for iris motor must be contained within the environmental housing. When the power is removed from the lens, the lens iris must automatically close. The motorized-iris cable must be strain relieved or sufficiently rugged so the cable will not fail at the point where it leaves the lens assembly. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 86-1.02A(1)(g) Environmental Enclosure 86-1.02A(1)(g)(i) General The environmental enclosure must be the sealed, pressurized type, designed to withstand exposure to sand, dust, fungus, and salt atmosphere, and house the assembled camera, motorized zoom lens and all internal wiring. It must operate on a voltage range of 120 V(ac) ± 10 percent power source. The enclosure must include an internal thermostatically controlled heater assembly to minimize external faceplate condensation. The enclosure or IOC must be pressurized with 5 psi dry nitrogen. The enclosure must have a valve for pressurizing. In addition, a pressure relief valve with a 20 psi rating must be provided to protect the enclosure from overcharging. The notation "CAUTION - PRESSURIZED" must be printed on the enclosure. The letter height must be at least 1/4 inch. 86-1.02A(1)(g)(ii) Technical and Functional Requirements The housing must meet the following: Parameter Specification Construction All aluminum Finish White, light beige or gray that is either baked enamel or powder coat Weight Less than 20 lb excluding heater Camera Mounting Pole mount The camera lens must be positioned in the center of the housing window. The housing unit must have lens preset capabilities. The housing must not interfere with the widest viewing angle of the motorized zoom lens. The camera enclosure must not incur any physical damage after a shock, return to normal operation immediately and operate within the specified vibration (see Note 1 below table). Parameter Specification Shock Up to 10 G while in non-operation mode Vibration From 5 to 60 Hz with 0.083 inch total excursion, and 5 G rms vibration from 60 to 1000 Hz. Note 1: Where the manufacturer's cut sheet or specification data does not contain shock and vibration data a listing of at least 2 project sites with identical equipment, with similar installation conditions and similar traffic patterns showing continuous functional performance of at least 2 years may be substituted. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Any enclosure supplied must include a sun shield or shroud to protect the housing from the direct rays of the sun. The sun shroud must be made specifically for the model of enclosure that is selected. 86-1.02A(1)(h) Pan and Tilt Unit 86-1.02A(1)(h)(i) General The pan and tilt unit must consist of the pan and tilt unit itself along with any electrical or communication interfaces required to perform the functions specified. The pan and tilt unit must be designed to operate under a full range of environmental conditions. The pan and tilt unit with camera assembly mounted must withstand a wind load of 80 mph. The cable connector must be fully weather protected. External body components must be manufactured from aluminum that have been anodized, painted or coated to prevent oxidation and corrosion. Access into the pan and tilt unit for routine maintenance or adjustments must not require removal of the pan and tilt from the installation site, nor removal of the camera enclosure from the pan and tilt unit. Access cover must be readily removable regardless of the tilt position. 86-1.02A(1)(h)(ii) Technical Requirements The housing must meet the following: Parameter Specification Pan and Tilt Worms Ground and polished Stainless Steel Pan and Tilt Worm Gears Non-metallic material Camera Mount Compatible with camera housing Bearings on Rotating Surfaces Heavy duty roller type Overload Protection Provided - internal Construction Corrosion resistant steel or aluminum Finish Weather resistant paint or polyurethane Seals "O" ring or gaskets for all weather protection of pan and tilt unit and cables. 86-1.02A(1)(h)(iii) Functional Requirements The housing must meet the following: Parameter Specification Braking: Pan And Tilt Mechanical or Electrical to limit coast Overload Protection Motors: Impedance protected Angular Travel Pan: 360 degrees horizontal, Continuous Tilt: From +5 up to -90 degrees down Pan Speed From 0.1 to 45 degrees/s variable-speed Tilt Speed From 0.1 to 45 degrees/s variable-speed Pan And Tilt Position Preset Positions camera to a predetermined azimuth, elevation and lens position (Up to 512 Presets) 86-1.02A(1)(h)(iv) Pan and Tilt Stops TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS The pan and tilt unit must have pan and tilt stops. The settings of these pan and tilt stops will be determined by the Engineer. 86-1.02A(1)(i) Software and Operational Requirements The proposed camera protocol must include integrated video camera system communication drivers for flexibility and system interoperability. The camera system must support both serial TIA-422 and TIA-232 communication channels at a minimum, allowing field selection of the following protocol drivers as required; Camera and pan and tilt functions are operated via TIA-232 and TIA-422 serial communication. Communication bytes described below are expressed in hexadecimal. When any other format is specified, the values must be translated into hexadecimal. The protocol for communication from CCT to Camera Assembly must be as follows: Byte Description 1 1B 2-4 43, 54, 56 5 Camera Assembly ID, least-significant byte 6 Camera Assembly ID, most-significant byte 7 Number of command and data bytes 8 COMMAND 9-X DATA X+1 CHECKSUM Byte 1: 1B implies communication from the Central Communications Central (CCT) to Camera Assembly. Byte 2 through 4: ASCII code values for "CCTV." Byte 5 and 6: Camera Assembly ID. This ID will be used to communicate to a specific CCTV on a multi-drop communication line. Byte 7: This number will indicate how many command and data bytes will follow. Byte 8: See Table 1 below. Byte 9 to X: See Table 1 below. Byte X plus 1: Checksum. This is a hexadecimal sum of Bytes 1 to X. TABLE 1 Byte 7 Byte 8 ASCII Byte 9 to Cha r. Description Byte X 1 Q Status Query - 1 R Pan Right - 1 L Pan Left - 1 U Tilt Up - 1 D Tilt Down - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 1 I Zoom In - 1 O Zoom Out - 1 N Focus Near - 1 F Focus Far - 1 J Iris Open - 1 K Iris Close - 1 M Iris Manual - 1 m Iris Auto - 1 p Pan Stop - 1 t Tilt Stop - 1 z Zoom Stop - 1 f Focus Stop - 1 i Iris Stop - Up to 33 (Decimal) C Set Char. Display Up to 32 ASCII Char. 1 A Activate Char. Display - 1 B Blank Char. Display - 2 P Set Preset Position Position Number (1-10 Decimal) 2 G Go to Preset Position Position Number (1-10 Decimal) 2 S Set Relay Relay Number (1-6) 2 s Reset Relay Relay Number (1-6) 1 E Turn on Camera - 1 e Turn off Camera - 1 X Reset Camera - 9 Y Go to coordinates Coord. data (8 bytes) The protocol for communication from Camera Assembly to CCT must conform to the following: The camera assembly must send a message back to CCT in response to every (valid) command received as follows: BYTE DESCRIPTION 1 09 2 to 4 43, 54, 56 5 Camera Assembly ID, L.S. byte 6 Camera Assembly ID, M.S. byte 7 0C 8 COMMAND 9 to 11 STATUS 12 to 19 POSITION DATA 20 CHECKSUM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Byte 1: 09 implies communication from the Camera Assembly to CCT. Byte 2 through 4: ASCII values for CCTV. Byte 5, 6: Camera Assembly ID. Byte 7: This number indicates that there are 12 bytes to follow before checksum. Byte 8: This will be identical to byte 8 of the message from CCT. Byte 9-11: Status bytes. These bytes are described in the tables below. Bit 1 is the least significant bit (LSB). Byte 9 BIT FUNCTION 0 1 1 Focus Auto Manual 2 Color/Mono Color Mono 3 Color/Mono Auto Manual 4 Integration Auto Manual 5 Integration Decrease Increase 6 Data Flow Control Off On 7 Iris Auto Manual 8 Char. Display Blank Active Byte 10 BIT FUNCTION 0 1 1 Reserved 2 Local/Remote Local Remote 3 Camera power Off On 4 Pressure Good Low 5 Alarm 2 No alarm Alarm present 6 Alarm 3 No alarm Alarm present 7 Alarm 4 No alarm Alarm present 8 Video status Video Present No Video No Video: The Camera Assembly must have the circuitry to detect absence and presence of video sync signal on its video input. Absence of the video sync signal must indicate a no-video condition. Byte 11: This byte will equal zero if the camera is not positioned at any of the preset positions. Otherwise this byte will contain the preset position number (1 to 10 decimal). Byte 12-19: These bytes must contain pan, tilt, zoom and focus position data. The values for the extreme positions are described below. The values range from 0000 to 0FFF (0 to 4095 decimal) and must change linearly as the positions are varied. The extreme position data are as follows: Byte 12 Byte 13 00 00 Pan Left 0F FF Pan Right Byte 14 Byte 15 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 00 00 Tilt Down 0F FF Tilt Up Byte 16 Byte 17 00 00 Zoom Out 0F FF Zoom In Byte 18 Byte 19 00 00 Focus Far 0F FF Focus Near Byte 20 is checksum. The checksum is a hexadecimal sum of all the bytes 1 to X. 86-1.02A(1)(j) Closed Circuit Television Camera Cable Assembly 86-1.02A(1)(j)(i) General The closed circuit television (CCTV) camera cable assembly must conform to the details shown on the plans and the special provisions. 86-1.02A(1)(j)(ii) Technical Requirements The camera cable assembly connector assignments connectors are shown on the plans. The CCTV camera cable assembly must conform to the following: 1. General Overall Cable, Nom. weight/1,000 feet not to exceed: 300 lb Overall Cable Minimum Bending Radius: 9 inches All Materials, Temperature Rating, meet or exceed: From -30 to 165 °F Overall Cable, Outside Diameter, not to exceed: 1.7 inches Outside Jacket, Tinned Copper Braid Shield, minimum: 80 percent Pulling tension, maximum: 500 lb Overall Cable, Outside Jacket: Black Thermoplastic Elastomer 2. For video - Coax Cable Coax Tinned Copper Braid Shield, minimum: 95 percent Coax Insulation Material: Solid Polyethylene Coax Core Outside Diameter: 0.121 inch Coax Outside Diameter: 0.178 inch TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Coax Outside Jacket: Cotton Braid 3. For power - Shielded group of 3 twisted pairs of No. 22 AWG cables. The individual conductors must be color coded with PVC insulation for 300V minimum and used for distance up to 750 ft for 115 V(ac). 4. For data - Shielded group of 5 twisted pairs of No. 26 AWG cables 5. For ground - A solid No. 8 AWG ground wire must be provided between the camera assembly and the CCTV cabinet grounding electrode. 86-1.02A(1)(j)(iii) Testing Requirements Comply with section 86-2.14B for testing of hybrid cables and connectors must be performed in accordance with provisions in section 86-2.14B, "Field Testing" of the Standard Specifications and these special provisions. Any cable lengths found to have faults must be replaced and retested. You must dispose of the removed faulty cable. The cable termination must be randomly inspected for contact crimping quality control. Any contact found not crimped with the correct crimping tool and is defect must be rejected. You must redo the termination until defects are corrected. Before the beginning of work, the coaxial cable length of hybrid cable must be tested for attenuation and faults to ensure compliance with specifications contained herein using a time domain reflectometer (TDR). For the purpose of these special provisions, one or more of the following defines a fault in a long length of cable: 1. Return loss measurements indicating that attenuation exceeds 3 dB at 5 to 30 MHz in a portion of cable less than 10 feet long. 2. A return loss measurement indicating that there is a short in the cable. 3. A return loss measurement indicating a cut or open circuit in the cable. 4. A visual inspection that reveals exposure of or damage to the cable shielding 86-1.02A(1)(k) Submittals A minimum of 10 days before the scheduled delivery of the closed circuit television camera assembly to the project site, submit: 1. A certificate of compliance. The certificate must include a copy of applicable test reports on the closed circuit television camera assembly. 2. Four sets of documentation containing complete specifications and operation details of each of the components of the CCTV camera assembly. 3. Four copies of the maintenance manuals for the pan and tilt unit. 4. Four sets of wiring diagrams showing wire colors, functions, and pin assignments for connecting these CCTV camera assembly components to each other and to the encoder. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 5. Manufacturer's cut sheets or specifications data of CCTV camera cable assemblies, including connectors with strain relief back shells. 6. A copy of the CCTV camera cable assembly testing procedures and manufacturer's test results. 86-1.02A(1)(l) Pre-acceptance Testing For each CCTV system location perform the specific quality control requirements for testing and documentation. Notify the City Inspector in writing 15 days before to the scheduled testing. All testing must be performed by you, at a mutually agreed time and place, and in the presence of the City Inspector. Demonstrate all the features of the CCTV camera system. Provide the necessary equipment required to access the CCTV camera equipment for testing. The City Inspector will use the results from the pre-acceptance testing, and may discuss with the on-site technician, to determine settings used in final testing and documentation of the CCTV camera system. 86-1.02A(1)(m) Testing and Documentation Contractor shall be responsible for testing and documentation required for approval and acceptance of the production, installation, and operation of these materials and equipment. The following identifies the specific quality control requirements for testing and documentation: 1. Test cables, after installation with connectors attached, for continuity and shorts or grounds. 2. Adjust and set limit stops to the pan and tilt unit at each camera site to prevent the view of the areas outside of the roadway system. The final settings will be approved by the Engineer. 3. Perform a local functional test at each of the CCTV locations. At your option, the test may be performed directly at the CCTV cabinet or remotely via keyboard or keyboard and personal computer. Verify all the CCTV features. Contractor shall provide test equipment. 4. Arrange to have a technician, qualified to work on the closed circuit television assembly and employed by the closed circuit television assembly manufacturer or the manufacturer's representative, present at the time the equipment is turned on. 86-1.02A(1)(n) Warranty Furnish a 2-year replacement warranty from the manufacturer of CCTV camera assembly, 1G Switch and POE Switch against defects in materials and workmanship or failures. The effective date of the warranty is the date of acceptance of the installation. Submit warranty documentation before installation. Replacement CCTV camera assembly, Ethernet switch Type 1, TIA-232 to TIA-422 converter, temperature sensor, and video encoder must be furnished within 10 days of receipt of a failed unit. The City does not pay for replacement. Deliver replacement CCTV camera assembly, Ethernet switch Type 1 and video encoder to City of AZUSA Department of Public Works at: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 213 East Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, CA 91702 86-1.02A(2) Wireless Interconnect System 86-1.02A(2)(a) General Wireless interconnect system consists of installing wireless radios, antennas, cabling and software. All radios must meet FCC part 15 and IC RSS-210 rules/regulations. Support and provide the following wireless protocols. · IEEE 802.11a/n (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) · Proprietary Wireless Protocol Radios must be available as an Integrated Panel Antenna, Access Point Cluster (4 radio modules), Dual (2 radio modules) or Stand-Alone Enclosure (1 or 2 radio modules). Embedded GPS units must be available in Integrated Panel Antenna, Stand- Alone Enclosure and Access Point Cluster (4 Radio Modules). Radios must be configurable as an Access Point, Remote Station, Repeater or Mesh Node. Integrated and stand-alone single module radios must consume less than 8 watts of power per unit. Radios must be configurable using network monitoring software. Software must include a complete toolset to assist in advanced network monitoring and radio configuration. Radio software must be capable of monitoring real time bi- directional data. The software must utilize drag and drop radio programming, and Microsoft SQL Server for managing radio and wireless network information. Radios must include Adaptive Modulation, Dynamic Frequency Selection, Automatic Transmit Power Control –RF link must be monitored to automatically adjust the data rate to optimize the maximum link performance. Features must include GPS-based geo-location on unit with external status panel displaying a Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) and an external reset button to help with installation. Radios shall meet IP67 and exceed NEMA environmental specifications with performance testing over operating temperatures of -40° to +80C. Radios will be powered by an IEEE 802.3 af/at Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Injector with surge protection or a certified IEEE 802.3 af/at (POE) Switch. This will include 160ft of outdoor-rated Ethernet cable. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 86-1.02A(2)(b) Techincal and Operational Requirements Operating Frequency: 5.150-5.825 Ghz RF Data Rate: Up to 300 Mbps (per radio module) Receiver Sensitivity: -74 to -94 dBm Radio Output Power: Up to 30 dBm – 1000 mW Channel Width: 20, 40 Mhz Typical Range: Up to 20 miles (LOS) at 54 Mbps Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Injector: Surge protected Antenna Type: Type N(F) – Stand alone 23 dBi – Integrated Panel 19 dBi – Sector Antenna Network Operation Modes: Point to Point Point to Multipoint Mesh 86-1.02B Conduit and Accessories Type 3, schedule 80, conduit shall be used throughout the Project unless otherwise noted on the project plans. 86-1.02C Pull Boxes 86-1.02C(1) General Delete 4th paragraph and replace with: The cover marking must include CITY OF AZUSA FIBER OPTICS 86-1.02C(1)(a) Submittals Before shipping pull boxes to the job site, submit a list of materials used to fabricate the pull boxes to City of Azusa Public Works. Include: 1. Contract number 2. Manufacturer's name 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions 4. Your contact information Submit reports for pull boxes from an NRTL-accredited laboratory. Before installing a pull box and cover, submit the manufacturer's replacement warranty for them. 86-1.02C(1)(b) Quality Control and Assurance TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 86-1.02C(1)(b)(i) Functional Testing The pull box and cover must be tested under ANSI/SCTE 77, "Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity." 86-1.02C(1)(b)(ii) Warranty Provide a 2-year manufacturer's replacement warranty for the pull box and cover. The warranty period starts on the date of Contract acceptance. Deliver replacement parts within 5 business days after you receive notification of a failed pull box, cover, or both to the City of Azusa Department of Public Works at: 809 Angeleno Avenue, Azusa, CA 91702 86-1.02C(1)(b)(iii) MATERIALS The pull box and cover must comply with ANSI/SCTE 77, "Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity," for tier 22 load rating and must be gray or brown. Each pull box cover must have an electronic marker cast inside. A pull box extension must be made of the same material as the pull box and attached to the box to maintain the minimum combined depths. Include recesses for a hanger if a transformer or other device must be placed in a pull box. The bolts, nuts, and washers must be a captive design. The captive bolt must be capable of withstanding a torque from 55 to 60 ft-lb and minimum pull-out strength of 750 lb. Perform the test with the cover in place and the bolts torqued. The pull box and cover must not be damaged while performing the test. Hardware must be stainless steel with 18 percent chromium and 8 percent nickel content. Galvanize ferrous metal parts under section 75-1.05. The manufacturer's instructions must include: 1. Quantity and size of entries that can be made without degrading the strength of the pull box below the tier 22 load rating 2. Locations where side entries cannot be made 3. Acceptable method for creating the entry The tier 22 load rating must be labeled or stenciled by the manufacturer on the inside and outside of the pull box and on the underside of the cover. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 86-1.02F(3)(d)(ii) Conductor Signal Cables 3CSC and 12CSC shall be used throughout the project unless otherwise approved by the City inspector. 86-1.02K Luminaires LED luminaires shall be used throughout the project. Luminaire type shall be per project plans unless otherwise approved by the City inspector. 86-1.02Q(5) Battery Backup System Cabinets Battery backup system shall be attached to service equipment enclosures. 86-1.02Q Cabinets 86-1.02Q(3) Controller Cabinets Replace 86-1.02Q(3) with the following: The controller cabinet must be a Model 332 or 333L as indicated on project plans, comply with TEES, and be on the Authorized Material List for traffic signal control equipment. 86-1.02Q(3)(a) Controllers The Contractor shall arrange to have a representative of the Engineer and signal technician present at the time the controller assembly is turned on. The technician shall be fully qualified to work in the controller assembly, and shall be employed by the controller manufacturer or authorized representative. The Engineer shall be notified at least 24-hours prior to turn on. This specification describes the Advance Traffic Controller (ATC) Standard published by AASHTO, ITE and NEMA. 1.1. Controller shall meet or exceed the following standard where applicable: 1.1.1. Caltrans TEES (Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications) 2009 standards 1.1.2. ATC (Advanced Transportation Controller) 6.24 standards 1.1.3. NTCIP (National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol)1201/1202 1.2. Controllers shall have McCain Omni eX Controller Program program installed (latest version build). 1.3. The FLeX controllers shall have the following components and features: 1.3.1. Operating system 1.3.1.1. Linux 1.3.2. Microprocessors 1.3.2.1. Freescale PowerQUICC II Pro microprocessor 1.3.3. Memory 1.3.3.1. 16MB Flash memory TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 1.3.3.2. 256MB DRAM 1.3.3.3. 2MB non-volatile SRAM 1.3.4. Backup real-time clock (RTC) 1.3.5. Communication Interfaces 1.3.5.1. SDLC (2) 1.3.5.2. Serial (asynchronous) (3) 1.3.5.3. ENET 1: 100 Base-T Ethernet ports (2) 1.3.5.4. ENET 2: 100 Base-T Ethernet ports (2) dedicated for local communicaitons 1.3.5.5. USB ports (2) 1.3.5.6. Wi-Fi 1.3.6. Front panel interface 1.3.6.1. 16 lines x 40 character display 1.3.6.2. 7 x 4 keypad (28 key) 1.3.6.3. Datakey 1.3.7. Cabinet interfaces 1.3.7.1. C1S, C11S 86-1.02Q(3)(b) Conflict Monitors Conflict monitors shall comply with all applicable specifications outline in the Caltrans TEES (Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications) standards. The unit shall be rack-mountable in a Caltrans 33X type cabinet, provide 18 channel capacity, be IP addressable, and compatible with 2070 type controllers. 86-1.02R Signal Heads 12-inch LED signal heads shall be used throughout the extent of the project. 86-1.02S Pedestrian Signal Heads LED countdown pedestrian signal heads shall be used throughout the extent of the project. 86-1.02T Accessible Pedestrian Signals Accessible pedestrian signals shall be used throughout the extent of the project. 87-1.03 Construction 87-1.03A General 87-1.03A(1) Closed Circuit Television System 87-1.03A(1)(a) Construction TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS You must make the necessary adjustments on different components of the CCTV camera assembly. This includes the back-focus and tracking adjustments on the lens and color balancing of the camera. You must ensure the back-focus adjustment on the camera is such that the lens focus is properly set and maintained when adjusting the focal length from zoom to wide angle. You must make this adjustment with the lens iris at full open position. This adjustment must be made such that when the zoom is adjusted from long range (telephoto) to wide angle, no refocusing is necessary. The City Inspector will notify you of the pan and tilt presets and stops for you to set prior to the CCTV camera assembly installation check. You must perform the installation check in the presence of the City Inspector. At your option, the test of the operation (pan, tilt, zoom, iris and wiper) of the pan and tilt unit may be performed at the CCTV cabinet adjacent to the camera or by remote keyboard location. You must furnish a color video monitor, for testing only, to view the actual camera image. Upon completion of the installation check, the City Inspector will verify operation of the pan and tilt unit. Any additional adjustments necessary to restore the presets and stops to acceptable parameters is at your expense. Control cable must be routed from the CCTV camera assembly to the video encoder and AC power inside the pole. Wiring must run continuous from source to destination without splices. Cable slack of not less than 3 feet must be provided for equipment movement at pull boxes, vaults or cabinets. The cable must be secured and coiled neatly. The cables and connectors must be installed to allow the camera and lens to be disconnected without removing the environmental camera housing. You are responsible for testing and documentation required to establish approval and acceptance of the production, installation, and operation of these materials and equipment. You must provide materials necessary to make the connectors functional. Materials used to make the connectors must be compatible and must adhere to manufacturer's recommendations. 87-1.03V Detectors 87-1.03V(4) Video Detection System 87-1.03V(4)(a) General Video detection system consists of installing Iteris RZ4 Wide Dynamic Range or equal video detection camera, video detection processor (VDP), IP video 4-channel encoder, cables, software and all auxiliary equipment required to control the system. 87-1.03V(4)(b) Technical and Operational Requirements TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Video detection cameras used for traffic and bicycle detection shall be furnished by the VDP supplier and shall be qualified by the supplier to ensure proper system operation. The camera shall produce a useable video image of the bodies of vehicles and bicycles under all roadway lighting conditions, regardless of time of day. The minimum range of scene luminance over which the camera shall produce a useable video image shall be the minimum range from nighttime to daytime, but not less than the range 2.0 lux to 10,000 lux. The camera shall use a CCD sensing element and shall output color video with resolution of not less than 380 lines horizontal. The camera shall include an electronic shutter control and iris based upon average scene luminance. The camera shall include a variable focal length lens with variable focus that can be adjusted, without opening up the camera housing, to suit the site geometry by means of a portable interface device designed for that purpose and manufactured by the detection system supplier. The horizontal field-of-view (FOV) shall be adjustable from 9 to 45 degrees. This camera configuration may be used for the majority of detection approaches in order to minimize the setup time and spares required by the user. The camera shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed enclosure. The enclosure shall be made of aluminum. The housing shall be field-rotatable to allow proper alignment between the camera and the traveled road surface. The camera enclosure shall be equipped with a sunshield. The sunshield shall include a provision for water diversion to prevent water from flowing in the camera's field of view. The camera enclosure with sunshield shall be less than 6" diameter, less than 15" long, and shall weigh less than 6 pounds when the camera and lens are mounted inside the enclosure. The camera enclosure shall include a thermostatically controlled heater to assure proper operation of the lens functions at low temperatures and prevent moisture condensation on the optical faceplate of the enclosure. When mounted outdoors in the enclosure, the camera shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range from -34 °C to +60 °C and a humidity range from 0% RH to 100% RH. Measurement of satisfactory video shall be based upon VDP system operation. The camera shall be powered by 120-240 VAC 50/60 Hz. Power consumption shall be 15 watts or less under all conditions. An optional power configuration shall be available to facilitate 12 VDC operations. The cameras shall be installed on signal mast arms or luminaire mast arms of traffic signal poles. For optimum detection, the camera should be centered above the lane mark on the traveled roadway. The camera shall view approaching vehicles at a distance not to exceed 350 feet for reliable detection (height-to-distance ratio of 1:10). Camera placement and FOV shall be unobstructed and as noted in the installation documentation provided by the supplier. The camera enclosure shall be equipped with separate, weather-tight connections for power and video cables at the rear of the enclosure. These connections may also allow diagnostic testing and viewing of video at the camera while the camera is TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS installed on a mast arm or pole using an optional lens adjustment module (LAM) supplied by the VDP supplier. Video and power shall not reside within the same connector. Multiple camera configurations shall be available to support color video output in either NTSC standards. The video signal shall be fully isolated from the camera enclosure and power cabling. The coaxial cable to be used between the camera and the VDP in the traffic cabinet shall be Belden 8281. This cable shall be suitable for installation in conduit or overhead with appropriate span wire. 75-ohm BNC plug connectors should be used at both the camera and cabinet ends. The coaxial cable, BNC connector, and crimping tool shall be approved by the supplier of the video detection system, and the manufacturer's instructions must be followed to ensure proper connection. The power cabling shall be 16-18 AWG 3-conductor cable with a minimum outside diameter of 6-9 mm. The cabling shall comply with the National Electric Code, as well as local electrical codes. The video detection camera shall be installed by supplier factory-certified installers and as recommended by the supplier and documented in installation materials provided by the supplier. Proof of factory certification shall be provided. A minimum of 24 detection zones shall be supported and each detection zone shall be user-definable in size and shape to suit the site and the desired vehicle detection region. A single detection zone shall be able to replace multiple inductive loops and the detection zones shall be OR'ed as the default or may be AND'ed together to indicate vehicle or bicycle presence on a single phase of traffic movement. Detection zones are drawn on the video image from the video camera. To do this, a pointing device is used to outline the detection zones with a graphical interface that is built into the VDP and displayed on a video monitor. The type of pointing device shall communicate through either a 9-pin RS-232 port or a standard USB port. No separate computer shall be required to program the basic detection zones. The VDP's memory shall be non-volatile to prevent data loss during power outages. The VDP shall continue to operate (that is, detect vehicles) using the existing zone configurations even when the operator is defining/modifying a zone pattern. The new zone configuration shall not go into effect until the configuration is saved by the operator. The selection of the detection zone for current use shall be done either through a local menu selection or remote computer via a communication port. It shall be possible to activate or download a detection zone pattern for a camera. When a vehicle or bicycle is detected crossing a detection zone, the detection zone will flash on the video overlay display screen to confirm the detection of the vehicle. Detection shall be at least 98% accurate in most weather conditions. Detection accuracy depends on site geometry, camera placement, camera quality, weather conditions, and detection zone location. These accuracy levels do not include allowances for occlusion or poor video due to camera location or quality. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Detector placement shall not be more distant from the camera than ten times the mounting height of the camera. The VDP shall provide a minimum of 24 channels of vehicle or bicycle presence detection per camera through a standard detector rack edge connector and one or more extension modules or through a wiring harness. If a loss of video signal occurs, the VDP shall output a constant call for each enabled detector output channel. During the background learning period, the VDP shall output a constant call. Detection-zone output capabilities shall be configurable to allow the selection of presence, pulse, extend, and delay outputs. Timing parameters of pulse, extend, and delay outputs shall be user-definable from a minimum of 0.1 to 25.0 seconds. A minimum of six detection zones shall be able to count the number of vehicles detected. The count value shall be internally stored for later retrieval through the communication port. The data collection interval shall be user-definable in periods of a minimum of 5, 15, 30 or 60 minutes, or optional counts by phase. 87-1.02F(5)(c) Warranty The video detection system supplier shall provide a 2-year warranty on the video detection system and camera. During the warranty period, technical support shall be available from the supplier via telephone and this support shall be available from factory-certified personnel or factory-certified installers. Updates to VDP software shall be available from the supplier without charge. 87-1.03V(4)(d) Maintenace and Support The video-detection-system supplier shall maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance and repair of the video detection system. These parts shall be available for delivery within 30 days of placement of an acceptable order at the then current pricing and terms-of-sale of the supplier of said parts. The video detection system supplier shall maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the video detection system. This technical support shall be available via telephone, or via personnel sent to the installation site upon placement of an acceptable order at the then current pricing and terms-of-sale of the supplier of on- site technical support services. During the video detection system installation process, the supplier shall provide eight hours of installation and training support. Installation or training support shall be provided by a factory- authorized representative. Add to section 87-19 Fiber Optic Cable System 87-19.01 General Add the following: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Fiber optic cable shall be single mode fiber optic cables with 72 fibers for distribution and 12 fibers for connection to local controllers. A ground conductor shall be run in the same conduit per standard specifications. Fiber optic cables shall have coiled slack in each pull box/splice vault as follows: No. 5 & No. 6 pull box – 10 feet minimum No. 6E pull box – 20 feet minimum Splice vaults – 40 feet minimum 87-19.01B Definitions Add the following: Breakout method: See mid-span access method definition. Connector: A mechanical device used to align and join two fibers together to provide a means for attaching to and decoupling from a transmitter, receiver, or another fiber (i.e., patch panel). Connectorized: Termination point of a fiber after connectors have been affixed. FO: Fiber optic. FOTP: Fiber optic test procedure(s) as defined by ANSI EIA/TIA standards. FTC: Fiber trunkline cable. Light Source: A portable fiber optic test equipment that, in conjunction with a power meter, is used to perform end-to-end attenuation testing. It contains a stabilized light source operating at the designed wavelength of the system under test. It also couples light from the source into the fiber to be received at the far end by the receiver. Link: A passive section of the system, the ends of which are to be connected to active components. A link may include splices and couplers. For example, a video data link may be from video FO transmitter to video FO receiver. Link Loss Budget: A calculation of the overall permissible attenuation from the fiber optic transmitter (source) to the fiber optic receiver (detector). Loose Tube Cable: Type of cable construction in which fibers are placed in buffer tubes to isolate them from outside forces (stress). A flooding compound or material is applied to the interstitial cable core to prevent water migration and penetration. This type of cable is primarily for outdoor applications. Mid-span Access Method: Description of a procedure in which fibers from a single buffer tube are accessed and spliced to an adjoining cable without cutting the unused fibers in the buffer tube, or disturbing the remaining buffer tubes in the cable. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR): A fiber optic test equipment (similar in appearance to an oscilloscope) that is used to measure the total amount of power loss between 2 points and over the corresponding distance. It provides a visual and TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS printed display of the relative location of system components such as fiber sections, splices and connectors as well as the losses that are attributed to each component and or defects in the fiber. Power Meter: A portable fiber optic test equipment that, when coupled with a light source, is used to perform end-to-end attenuation testing. It contains a detector that is sensitive to light at the designed wavelength of the system under test. Its display indicates the amount of power injected by the light source that arrives at the receiving end of the link. Segment: A section of fiber optic cable that is not connected to any active device and may or may not have splices per the design. SM: Single-mode SMFO: Single-mode Fiber Optic Cable. Splice: The permanent joining of fiber ends to identical or similar fibers. Splice Enclosure: An environmentally sealed container used to organize and protect splice trays. The container allows splitting or routing of fiber cables from and to multiple locations. Splice Tray: A container used to organize and protect spliced fibers. Splice or Fiber Optic Vault: An underground container used to house excess cable and splice enclosures. System Performance Margin: A calculation of the overall "End to End" permissible attenuation from the fiber optic transmitter (source) to the fiber optic receiver (detector). The system performance margin should be at least 6 dB. This includes the difference between the active component link loss budget, the passive cable attenuation (total fiber loss) and the total connector/splice loss. Tight Buffered Cable: Type of non-breakout cable construction where each glass fiber is tightly buffered (directly coated) with a protective thermoplastic coating to 900 µm with the exception of the protective thermoplastic coating. The tight buffered cable must meet all the characteristics of the fiber in the fiber optic outside plant cable specified elsewhere in these specifications. SECTION 87-19.01C SUBMITTALS Delete 1st sentence and replace with: Submit documentation of compliance from manufacturer before ordering the material that shows factory test results, submit: ADD TO SECTION 87-19.01C SUBMITTAL 87-19.01C(1) FACTORY TESTING DOCUMENTATION Prior to arrival of the cable, the Contractor shall provide detailed test procedures for all field testing to the Engineer. The procedures shall include the tests involved and how the tests are to be conducted. These test plans shall be subject to the approval of the TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS Engineer. The procedures shall include the tests involved and how the tests are to be conducted. Included in the test procedures shall be the model, manufacturer, configuration, calibration and alignment procedures for all proposed test equipment. Submit to the City Inspector the cable manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance with the Fiber Characteristics Tables of these special provisions. Before shipment, but while on the shipping reel, 100 percent of all fibers must be tested for attenuation. Copies of test results must be: 1. Maintained on file with a file identification number by the manufacturer for a minimum of 7 years 2. Attached to the cable reel in a waterproof pouch 3. Submitted to the Contractor and to the City Inspector ADD TO SECTION 87-19.01D QUALITY ASSURANCE 87-19.01D(2) QUALITY CONTROL 87-19.01D(2)(a) FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation and materials necessary to perform all non-factory testing. The Engineer must be notified 2 working days before all field tests. The notification must include the exact location of the system or components to be tested. A. General Testing shall include the tests on elements of the passive fiber optic components: (1) at the factory, (2) after delivery to the project site but prior to installation, (3) after installation but prior to connection to any other portion of the system, and (4) during final system testing. All active components shall be tested after installation. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation and materials necessary to perform all testing. The Engineer shall be notified in writing a minimum of two working days prior to all field tests. The notification shall include the exact location or portion of the system to be tested. Documentation of all test results shall be provided to the Engineer for approval within two working days after the test involved. The Contractors attention is directed to "As- Builts" elsewhere in these special provisions, regarding the requirements for recording test results. Attenuation tests shall be performed with an OTDR capable of recording and displaying anomalies of 0.2 dB as a minimum. Single mode fibers (SM) shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. The OTDR shall have a printer capable of producing a verifying test trace with fiber identification as shown in the sample "Link Loss Budget Work Sheet", numerical loss values, the date and the operator's name. It shall be provided on a USB drive that has associated software to do comparisons and reproductions on 8.5 inch x 11 inch paper, via a personal computer. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS B. Factory Testing Verification of the fiber specifications as listed in the Fiber Characteristics Table shall be supplied by the Manufacturer with the appropriate documentation. After cabling, before shipment but while on the shipping reel, 100 percent of all fibers shall be tested for attenuation. Copies of the results shall be (1) maintained on file at the Contractor's, Manufacturer's and Owner's place of business with a file identification number for a minimum of 10 years, (2) attached to the cable reel in a waterproof pouch, and (3) submitted to the Contractor and to the Engineer prior to the delivery of the cable to the job site. C. Arrival On Site The cable and reel shall be physically inspected by the Contractor on delivery and 100 percent of the fibers shall be tested with the OTDR for attenuation to confirm that the cable meets requirements. Test results shall be recorded, dated, compared and filed with the copy accompanying the shipping reel in a weather proof envelope. Attenuation deviations from the shipping records greater than 5 percent shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing. The cable shall not be installed until completion of this test sequence and written approval by the Engineer is received. Copies of traces and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory, the reel of fiber optic cable shall be considered unacceptable and all records corresponding to that reel of cable shall be marked accordingly. The unsatisfactory reels of cable shall be replaced with new reels of cable at the Contractor's expense. The new reels of cable shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 87-19.02B Splice Vaults: Fiber optic splice vault must be precast of non-PCC material. Non-PCC material must be resistant to fire, chemicals and ultraviolet exposure. The non-PCC material must show no appreciable change in physical properties with exposure to the weather. Non-PCC material must be dense and free of voids or porosity. Non-PCC vault and covers shall be of sufficient rigidity that when a 100 lbf concentrated force is applied perpendicularly to the midpoint of one of the long sides at the top, while the opposite long side is supported by a rigid surface, it shall be possible to remove the cover without the use of tools. When a vertical force of 1500 lbf is applied, through a 0.5 inch by 3 inch by 6 inch steel plate, to a non-PCC cover in place on a splice vault, the cover shall not fail and shall not deflect more than 0.25 inch. Covers must be the non-skid type. Cover marking must be "CITY OF AZUSA FIBER OPTICS" on each cover. Each cover must have inset lifting pull slots. Cover hold down bolts or cap screws and nuts must be of brass, stainless steel, or other non-corroding metal material. 87-19.02C FIBER OPTIC CABLE Each fiber optic cable for this project shall be Corning Cable Systems, ALTOS Lite Gel-Free Cables, Single-Jacket/Single-Armor type, loose tube and contain single mode (SM) dual- window (1310 nm and 1550 nm) fibers as shown on the Plans and shall conform to these special provisions. Detail specifications for Class IVa dispersion unshifted single mode optical fibers as TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS described by TIA-492CAAAXBBQB is shown in the following table. Property FOTP(s) Test Conditions Requirement Cladding diameter µm 45 or 48 or 176 125±1.0 Cladding non-circularity 45 or 48 or 176 < 1.0 % Core/cladding concentricity error µm 45 or 176 < 1.0 Coating diameter µm 55 or 163 or 173 250 ± 15 Coating/cladding concentricity error µm 55 or 163 or 173 < 20 Tensile strength proof test 31 100 kips Coating strip force lbf 400 1.2 in length 1.0 min, 9.0 max Attenuation coefficient dB/mi 78 or 61 or 120 @ 1310 nm 0.8 78 or 61 or 120 @ 1500 nm 0.6 Mode field diameter 164 or 165 or 167 @ 1310 nm 9.1 ± 0.5 <0.10 ADD TO SECTION 87-19.02D FIBER OPTIC SPLICE ENCLOSURES Where splicing is required inside the pull box or splice vault, the Contractor is responsible for supplying the splice closure and all accessories including bond connectors and proper end plates to provide splices as recommended by the manufacturer. Unless noted otherwise, splice closure shall be Corning Splice Closure part number SCF-6C22-01-72 or approved equivalent. ADD TO SECTION 87-19.02E FIBER DISTRIBUTION UNITS Fiber distribution unit (FDU) and fiber patch panel shall be Corning CLSSC-01U, or approved equal, 19” rack mount. All fibers from the drop cable shall be terminated into FDU. Splice trays must accommodate a maximum of 24 fusion splices and must allow for a minimum bend radius of 2 inches. All new pigtails shall utilize factory installed SC or LC duplex connectors. Unless otherwise shown on plans, all new FDU’s shall accommodate 2 to 4 -12 SC or LC duplex adapter bulkheads. ADD TO SECTION 87-19.02I FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS AND COUPLERS The contractor shall provide any and all necessary cable(s) and connector(s) modifications for work with existing drop cables to connect with new SFP transceivers. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the use SC-LC duplex or LC-LC duplex patch cord cable shall be used to connect with new SFP transceivers on new Ethernet switches. Add to section 87-19.03 CONSTRUCTION: 87-19.03A GENERAL A. After Cable Installation After the fiber optic cable has been pulled but before breakout and termination, 100 percent of all the fibers shall be tested for continuity. Test results shall be recorded and dated. Any segment of cable that does not meet specifications shall be replaced with a new segment, without additional splices, at the Contractor's expense. The new segment of cable shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS the Engineer for approval. B. Outdoor Splices At the conclusion of splicing operations at one location, and before the closure is sealed, all splices shall be tested with the OTDR, in both directions. Splice segments shall be tested at 1310 nm and at 1550 nm. The mean bi-directional loss of individual splice losses shall not exceed 0.2 dB. Measurement results shall be recorded, dated, validated by the OTDR trace printout and filed with the records of the respective cable runs. Copies of traces and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory, the splice shall be unacceptable. The unsatisfactory splice shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new splice shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. C. System Verification at Completion a. OTDR Testing Once the passive cabling system has been installed and is ready for activation, 100 percent of the fiber links shall be tested with the OTDR for attenuation. Test results shall be recorded, dated, compared and filed with previous copies. Copies of traces and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. If the OTDR test results are unsatisfactory the link shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new link shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. b. Test Failures If during any of these system verification tests, the results prove to be unsatisfactory, the fiber optic cable and or defective splice enclosures will not be accepted. The unsatisfactory components shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. The new segment of cable shall undergo the same testing procedure to determine acceptability. Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The removal and replacement of a segment of cable shall be interpreted as the removal and replacement of a single contiguous length of cable connecting two splices, two connectors, or a splice and a connector. The removal of only the small section containing the failure and therefore introducing new unplanned splices will not be allowed. 87-19.03C FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLTION FO cable must be installed in conduit system or cable tray system as shown. FO conduit system consists of communication conduits, communication pull boxes. FO splice vaults and cabinets. Cable installation must comply with the procedures specified by the manufacturer. Mechanical aids may be used provided that a tension measuring device is placed to the end of the cable. The tension applied must not exceed 600 lbf or the manufacturers recommended pulling tension, whichever is less. The FO cable must be installed using a cable pulling lubricant recommended by the cable manufacture and a non-abrasive pull tape. Station your personnel at each communication pull box, vault, and cabinet through which the cable is pulled to lubricate and prevent kinking or other damage. During cable installation, the bend radius must be maintained at not less than twenty times TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS the outside diameter of the cable. The cable grips for installing the FO cable must have a ball bearing swivel to prevent the cable from twisting during installation. If approved by the City Inspector, the fiber cable may be installed using the air blown method. Otherwise the pulled cable installation method specified in section 86-2.08G(3)(A) shall be used. If integral innerduct is used, the duct splice points or any temporary splices of innerduct used for installation must withstand a static air pressure of 110 psi. The fiber installation equipment must incorporate a mechanical drive unit or pusher that feeds cable into the pressurized innerduct to provide a sufficient push force on the cable, which is coupled with the drag force created by the high-speed airflow. The unit must be equipped with controls to regulate the flow rate of compressed air entering the duct and any hydraulic or pneumatic pressure applied to the cable. It must accommodate longitudinally ribbed or smooth wall ducts from nominal 0.625-inch to 2-inch inner diameter. Mid assist or cascading of equipment must be for the installation of long cable runs. The equipment must incorporate safety shutoff valves to disable the system in the event of sudden changes in pneumatic or hydraulic pressure. The equipment must not require the use of a piston or any other air capturing device to impose a pulling force at the front end of the cable, which also significantly restricts the free flow of air through the inner duct. It must incorporate the use of a counting device to determine the speed of the cable during installation and the length of the cable installed. 87-19.03D FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPLICES Place the splice enclosure where a splice is required as shown. The splice enclosure must be bolted to the side wall of the splice vault. Individual fibers must be looped one full turn within the splice tray to allow for future splicing. No stress is to be applied on the fiber when it is located in its final position. The cable must be installed without splices except where specifically allowed as shown. Minimum slack of the cable must be provided at each cable access location as indicated in section 87-19.01. Field cable splices must be done either in splice vaults, splice enclosures or in cabinets as shown. Unless otherwise allowed, the cable splices must be fusion type. The mean splice loss must not exceed 0.07 dB per splice. The mean splice loss must be obtained by measuring the loss through the splice in both directions and then averaging the resultant values. The mid-span access method must be used to access the individual fibers in a cable for splicing to another cable as shown. Cable manufacturers recommended procedures and approved tools must be used when performing a mid-span access. Only the fibers to be spliced may be cut. All measures must be taken to avoid damaging buffer tubes and individual fibers including those not being used in the mid-span access. Use the breakout method to access individual fiber. The cable "breakout" is produced by: 1. Removing the jacket just beyond the last tie-wrap point, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 2. Exposing 3 to 6 feet of the cable buffers, aramid strength yarn and central fiberglass strength member, and 3. Cutting aramid yarn, central strength member and the buffer tubes to expose the individual glass fibers for splicing or connection to the appropriate device. Cable manufactures recommended procedures and approved tools must be used when performing a midspan access. Measures must be taken to avoid damaging buffer tubes and individual fibers not being used in the mid-span access. You will be allowed to splice up to 5 fibers to repair any damage done during mid-span access splicing without penalty. You will be assessed $300.00 penalty for each additional splice. Any single fiber may not have more than 3 unplanned splices. If the fiber needs to be spliced more than 3 times, the entire length of fiber optic cable must be replaced at your expense. 87-19.03E SPLICE ENCLOSURE INSTALLTION Splice trays must accommodate a minimum of 12 fusion splices each. The individual fibers must be looped at least one full turn within the splice tray to avoid micro bending. A 2-inch minimum bend radius must be maintained during installation and after final assembly in the optical fiber splice tray. Each bare fiber must be individually restrained in a splice tray. Place the optical fibers in buffer tubes and the bare optical fibers in the splice tray without any discernable tensile force on the optical fiber. All splices must be protected with a metal reinforced thermal shrink sleeve. You must label all fiber optic cables with tags. All tags placed along one cable must contain the same cable identification code unique for that cable. Tags must be placed on the cables at the following points: 1. Fiber optic vault entrance and exit 2. Splice Enclosures entrance and exit Labels must be affixed to the cable per the manufacturer's recommendations that will not cause damage to the cable. 87-19.03F FIBER OPTIC DISTRIBUTION UNIT INSTALLATION The termination splices must connect the cable span ends with pigtails. The termination splices must be placed in splice trays and the splice trays must then be placed in the fiber optic splice enclosure. All splices must be protected with a metal reinforced thermal shrink sleeve. You must label all fiber optic cables with tags. All tags placed along one cable must contain the same cable identification code unique for that cable. Individual fibers must be looped one full turn within the splice tray to allow for future splicing. No stress is to be applied on the fiber when it is located in its final position. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 87-19.02K Ethernet Switches The Ethernet switch shall be used for providing data link and network between various devices in the field cabinet and the TMC via fiber optic cables or wireless interconnect. The contractor shall furnish and install the necessary Ethernet switches and other miscellaneous communications equipment to provide communication from the project’s traffic signal locations back to the City of Azusa’s TMC. Traffic Management Center (TMC) Switch 1. Description: This is a specification that defines a IPv4/v6 Layer 3 Switch that may be mounted in a 19” Rack Mount configuration with up to 28 total ports that is environmentally hardened to operate in harsh environments and areas with high Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). This specification defines a switch based on 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet and Gigabit/10G standards for fiber optic connectivity. a. Port Configuration Table: The Switch shall be provided in the following configuration: i.16-port 10/100/1000BASE-T/TX ii.8-port 1000BASE SFP Combo iii.4-port 10G SFP 2. Materials: Provide an Ethernet Switch that is new and incorporates an environmentally protected Metal case to IP 30. 3. General Requirements: a. Minimum of 24K Media Access Control (MAC) addresses b. 32 Megabits Buffer Memory c. Port Mirroring d. ACL (Access Control List) with up to 4096 entries e. MAC Based Port Trunking f. Switching method store-and-forward i.Non-blocking full wire speed forwarding rate 1. 14,880 pps @ 10 Mbps 2. 148,800 pps for 100 Mbps 3. 1,488,000 pps for 1000 Mbps 4. 14,880,952 pps for 10Gbps g. Protocols Supported: The Ethernet Switch shall support the following protocols: i.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 10 Megabit Ethernet ii.Link Aggregation 1. Static Trunk (4 groups, support MAC base) 2. IEEE802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol iii.IEEE 802.3u 100 Megabit Ethernet iv.IEEE 802.3z 1000 Megabit Ethernet/1000 BASE-SX/LX v.IEEE 802.3-2015 10G Fiber vi.IEEE 802.3x Flow Control vii.IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Tagging viii.IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Algorithm ix.IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Algorithm TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS x.IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) xi.IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) xii.IP Multicast Filtering through Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP snooping v1, v2 & v3 per RFC 2236) xiii.IEEE 802.1p Quality of Service (QOS): 1. Priority Queues: 8 queues per port 2. Traffic classification based on IEEE 802.1p CoS, DSCP, 3. WRR (Weighted round robin) and strict mode 4. Rate Limiting (Ingress/Egress) xiv.IEEE 802.1x Security 1. Radius Server 2. Port-based Network Access Control (NAC) xv.SNMP V1, V2, & V3 xvi.α-Ring for High Speed Redundancy Recovery < 15ms xvii.IGMP Snooping V1, V2 & V3 xviii.NTP V1 / V2 xix.GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) xx.GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) xxi.IPv4 Support: 1. RIP V1/V2 2. OSPFv2 3. Static Routing (1K) 4. VRRP xxii.IPv6 Support: 1. RIPng 2. OSPFv3 3. PIM6-DM 4. PIM6-SM 5. VRRPv3 h. Port Configuration Specifications: i.10/100/1000 T/TX ports (RJ-45) 1. RJ-45 female connector 2. Automatic and user-selectable speed setting (10/100/1000 mbps) 3. Automatic and user-selectable half/full duplex setting 4. Rate Controlled 2Mbps to 1000Mbps @ 0.5 Mbps Increments 5. Drives up to 100 m of Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable at 10 Mbps 6. Drives up to 100 m of Category 5 UTP cable at 100 Mbps 7. Drives up to 100 m of Category 5e, 6a or 7 UTP cable at 1000 Mbps ii.1000 Fiber Optic Ports using SFP module 1. Compatible with hardened Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) module 1000 Mbps Fiber Optic Port Specification Table Typical Distance * Nominal Wavelength Fiber Type Connector Optical Budget 10 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 11.5 dB 20 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 15 dB 40km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 19 dB TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS * Distance numbers are standard designations used by the Ethernet industry and should not be used as factors in fiber optic network design. Optical budgets are minimum guaranteed values that should be used for network design. iii.10G Fiber Optic Ports using SFP module 1. Compatible with hardened Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) modules in accordance with IEEE 802.3-2015 i. Management: The Ethernet Switch shall provide the following management capabilities: i.Front Panel LED indicators for port status and activity on each port ii.Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP)/Web Browser device configuration interface iii.Console RS232 Port Command Line Interface (CLI) iv.USB Type A Port for saving configuration to a USB Storage Device v.Telnet device configuration interface (CLI) vi.Allow multiple simultaneous management sessions or automatically terminate existing session when a new session is requested vii.Multi-level user account/password against unauthorized configuration viii.Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 1, 2 & 3 device status, diagnostic, and alarm monitoring and remote configuration ix.Remote Monitoring (RMON) network monitoring x.Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) remote firmware upgrades and configuration import/export xi.Request for Comments (RFC)-1213-compliant Management Information Base (MIB) files xii.Standard and device specific MIB2 files j. Regulatory Approvals: The Ethernet Switch shall be certified to the following regulatory standards: i.Product Safety: UL508 or UL60950, EN60950-1, IEC60950-1 ii.EMI 1. FCC Part 15B Class A 2. VCCI Class A 3. EN61000-6-4 iii.EMS: 1. EN61000-6-2 Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environments 2. EN61000-4-2 (ESD Standards) 3. EN61000-4-3 (Radiated RFI Standards) 4. EN61000-4-4 (Burst standards) 5. EN61000-4-5 (Surge Standards) 6. EN61000-4-6 (Induced RFI Standards) 7. EN61000-4-8 (Magnetic Field Standards) iv.Environmental Test Compliance: 1. IEC60068-2-6 Fc (Vibration Resistance) 2. IEC60068-2-27 Ea (Shock) 3. FED STD 101C Method 5007.1 (Free fall w/package) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS 4. NEMA TS2 Environmental Requirements for Traffic Control Equipment Compliant (Certification Pending) k. Environmental: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate without any active cooling in the following environmental conditions: i.-40ºC to 75ºC operating temperature range ii.-40ºC to 85ºC storage temperature range iii.5% to 95% operating relative humidity (non-condensing) iv.No Fans l. Operating Power: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate with the following power requirements: i.Redundant Power inputs: 2x 100-240VAC m. Dimensions: The Ethernet Switch dimensions shall not exceed the following maximums: i.42 x 375.5 x 44.2mm (W x D x H) ii.(17.4" x 14.8" x 1.74") 4. Construction Methods: a. General: Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization and commonality. 5. Mechanical Components: Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel; no self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. 6. Documentation Requirements: Provide complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: a. Complete performance specifications (functional, electrical, mechanical and environmental) for the unit. b. Complete installation procedures. c. Complete operations and configuration procedures 7. Warranty: The Ethernet switch products shall be guaranteed free of design and manufacturing defects by the original equipment manufacturer. Product shall have a LIMITED LIFETIME warranty. Local Controller (Corridor Splice Locations) Switch 1. Description: This is a specification that defines an Ethernet Switch that may be mounted in a 19” Rack Mount configuration with up to 28 total ports that is environmentally hardened to operate in harsh environments. This specification defines a switch based on 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet and Gigabit/10G standards for fiber optic connectivity. a. Port Configuration Table: The Switch shall be provided in the following configuration: i.16-port 10/100/1000BASE-TX ii.8-port 100/1000BASE SFP Combo TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS iii.4-port 1G/10G SFP 2. Materials: Provide an Ethernet Switch that is new and incorporates an environmentally protected Metal case to IP 30. 3. General Requirements: a. Minimum of 16,000 Media Access Control (MAC) addresses b. 12 Megabits Buffer Memory c. Port Mirroring d. ACL (Access Control List) e. MAC Based Port Trunking f. Switching method store-and-forward i.Non-blocking full wire speed forwarding rate 1. 14,880 pps @ 10 Mbps 2. 148,800 pps for 100 Mbps 3. 1,488,000 pps for 1000 Mbps 4. 14,880,952 pps for 10Gbps g. Protocols Supported: The Ethernet Switch shall support the following protocols: i.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 10 Megabit Ethernet ii.Link Aggregation 1. Static Trunk (4 groups, support MAC base) 2. IEEE802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol iii.IEEE 802.3u 100 Megabit Ethernet iv.IEEE 802.3z 1000 Megabit Ethernet/1000 BASE-SX/LX v.IEEE 802.3-2015 10G Fiber vi.IEEE 802.3x Flow Control vii.IEEE 802.1Q Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Tagging viii.IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Algorithm ix.IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Algorithm x.IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) xi.IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) xii.IP Multicast Filtering through Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP snooping v1, v2 & v3 per RFC 2236) xiii.IEEE 802.1p Quality of Service (QOS), 8-level transmission priorities xiv.IEEE 802.1x Security 1. Radius Server 2. Port-based Network Access Control (NAC) xv.SNMP V1, V2, & V3 xvi.α-Ring for High Speed Redundancy Recovery < 15ms xvii.IGMP Snooping V1, V2 & V3 xviii.NTP V1 / V2 xix.GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) xx.GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) xxi.RIP V1/V2 xxii.Static Routing xxiii.VRRP xxiv.Maximum number of routes in hardware: 64 entries h. Port Configuration Specifications: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS i. 10/100/1000 T/TX ports (RJ-45) 1. RJ-45 female connector 2. Automatic and user-selectable speed setting (10/100/1000 mbps) 3. Automatic and user-selectable half/full duplex setting 4. Rate Controlled 2Mbps to 1000Mbps @ 0.5 Mbps Increments 5. Drives up to 100 m of Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable at 10 Mbps 6. Drives up to 100 m of Category 5 UTP cable at 100 Mbps 7. Drives up to 100 m of Category 5e, 6a or 7 UTP cable at 1000 Mbps ii. 1000 Fiber Optic Ports using SFP module 1. Compatible with hardened Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) module 1000 Mbps Fiber Optic Port Specification Table Typical Distance * Nominal Wavelength Fiber Type Connector Optical Budget 10 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 11.5 dB 20 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 15 dB 40km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 19 dB * Distance numbers are standard designations used by the Ethernet industry and should not be used as factors in fiber optic network design. Optical budgets are minimum guaranteed values that should be used for network design. iii.10G Fiber Optic Ports using SFP module 1. Compatible with hardened Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) modules in accordance with IEEE 802.3-2015 i. Management: The Ethernet Switch shall provide the following management capabilities: i.Front Panel LED indicators for port status and activity on each port ii.Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP)/Web Browser device configuration interface iii.Console RS232 Port Command Line Interface (CLI) iv.USB Type A Port for saving configuration to a USB Storage Device v.Telnet device configuration interface (CLI) vi.Allow multiple simultaneous management sessions or automatically terminate existing session when a new session is requested vii.Multi-level user account/password against unauthorized configuration viii.Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 1, 2 & 3 device status, diagnostic, and alarm monitoring and remote configuration ix.Remote Monitoring (RMON) network monitoring x.Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) remote firmware upgrades and configuration import/export xi.Request for Comments (RFC)-1213-compliant Management Information Base (MIB) files xii.Standard and device specific MIB2 files j. Regulatory Approvals: The Ethernet Switch shall be certified to the following regulatory standards: i. Product Safety: UL508 or UL60950, EN60950-1, IEC60950-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS ii.EMI 1. FCC Part 15B Class A 2. EN61000-6-4 3. EN61000-3-2 4. EN61000-3-3 iii.EMS: 1. EN61000-6-2 Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environments 2. EN61000-4-2 (ESD Standards) 3. EN61000-4-3 (Radiated RFI Standards) 4. EN61000-4-4 (Burst standards) 5. EN61000-4-5 (Surge Standards) 6. EN61000-4-6 (Induced RFI Standards) 7. EN61000-4-8 (Magnetic Field Standards) iv. Environmental Test Compliance: 1. IEC60068-2-6 Fc (Vibration Resistance) 2. IEC60068-2-27 Ea (Shock) 3. FED STD 101C Method 5007.1 (Free fall w/package) 4. NEMA TS2 Environmental Requirements for Traffic Control Equipment k. Environmental: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate without any active cooling in the following environmental conditions: i.-40ºC to 75ºC operating temperature range ii.-40ºC to 85ºC storage temperature range iii.5% to 95% operating relative humidity (non-condensing) iv.No Fans l. Operating Power: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate with the following power requirements: i.Redundant Power inputs: 2x Terminal Block: 12-24VDC m. Dimensions: The Ethernet Switch dimensions shall not exceed the following maximums: i.430 x 375 x 44.2mm (W x D x H) ii.(16.9" x 14.7" x 1.74") 4. Construction Methods: a. General: Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization and commonality. 5. Mechanical Components: Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel; no self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. 6. Documentation Requirements: Provide complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: a. Complete performance specifications (functional, electrical, mechanical and environmental) for the unit. b. Complete installation procedures. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS c. Complete operations and configuration procedures 7. Warranty: The Ethernet switch products shall be guaranteed free of design and manufacturing defects by the original equipment manufacturer. Product shall have a LIMITED LIFETIME warranty. Local Controller Switch 1. Description: This is a specification that defines an Ethernet Switch that may be mounted by Standard DIN Rail or Shelf Mount with up to 12 total ports supporting 60W Power over Ethernet that is environmentally hardened to operate in harsh environments. This specification defines an Ethernet Switch based on 10/100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet standards for both copper and fiber optic connectivity. a. Port Configuration Table: The Ethernet Switch shall be provided in the following configuration: i. 8 Ports 10/100TX Ultra PoE (60W per port with a maximum of 240W total) ii. 2 Ports 1000BASE-X SFP (DDM) 2. Materials: Provide an Ethernet Switch that is new and incorporates an environmentally protected aluminum case to IP 30. 3. General Requirements: a. Minimum of 16k Media Access Control (MAC) addresses b. 12 Mbits Buffer Memory c. Port Mirroring d. MAC Based Port Trunking (up to 3 groups of 4 ports per group) e. Dual firmware image support f. Switching method store-and-forward i. Non-blocking full wire speed forwarding rate 1. 14,880 pps @ 10 Mbps 2. 148,800 pps for 100 Mbps 3. 1,488,000 pps for 1000 Mbps g. Protocols Supported: The Ethernet Switch shall support the following protocols: i. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 802.3 10 Megabit Ethernet ii. IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/100BASE-FX iii. IEEE 801.3z 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX iv. IEEE802.3ab 1000BASE-T v. IEEE 802.3x Flow Control vi. VLANs 1. IEEE 802.1Q Tag VLANs (128 groups, 4096 VID) 2. GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) 3. GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) vii. IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Algorithm viii. IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Algorithm ix. IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS x. IP Multicast Filtering through Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP snooping v1, v2 & v3 per RFC 2236) xi. IEEE 802.1p Quality of Service (QOS), 8-level transmission priorities xii. IEEE 802.1x Security 1. Radius Server xiii. IEEE 802.3af/at Power over Ethernet (PoE) xiv. SNMP V1, V2, & V3 xv. Link Aggregation 1. Static Trunk (4 groups, support MAC base) 2. IEEE802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol xvi. Alpha-Ring for High Speed Redundancy Recovery < 15ms xvii. IGMP Snooping V1, V2 & V3 xviii. NTP V1 / V2 h. Port Configuration Specifications: i. 10/100 T/TX ports (Copper Twisted Pair) 1. RJ-45 female connector 2. Automatic and user-selectable speed setting (10/100 mbps) 3. Automatic and user-selectable half/full duplex setting 4. Rate Controlled 2Mbps to 100Mbps @ 0.5 Mbps Increments 5. Drives up to 100 m of Category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable at 10 Mbps 6. Drives up to 100 m of Category 5 UTP cable at 100 Mbps ii. 1000 Fiber Optic Ports using SFP module 1. Compatible with hardened Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) module 1000 Mbps Fiber Optic Port Specification Table Typical Distance * Nominal Wavelength Fiber Type Connector Optical Budget 10 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 11.5 dB 20 km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 15 dB 40km 1310 nm Single Mode LC 19 dB * Distance numbers are standard designations used by the Ethernet industry and should not be used as factors in fiber optic network design. Optical budgets are minimum guaranteed values that should be used for network design. i. Management: The Ethernet Switch shall provide the following management capabilities: i. Front Panel LED indicators for port status and activity on each port ii. Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP)/Web Browser device configuration interface iii. Console RS232 Port Command Line Interface (CLI) iv. Telnet device configuration interface (CLI) v. Allow multiple simultaneous management sessions or automatically terminate existing session when a new session is requested vi. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 1, 2 & 3 device status, diagnostic, and alarm monitoring and remote configuration vii. Remote Monitoring (RMON) network monitoring TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS viii. Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) remote firmware upgrades and configuration import/export ix. Request for Comments (RFC)-1213-compliant Management Information Base (MIB) files x. Standard and device specific MIB2 files j. Regulatory Approvals: The Ethernet Switch shall be certified to the following regulatory standards: i. Product Safety: UL 61010 ii. EMI 1. FCC Part 15B, Class A 2. EN61000-6-4 3. EN61000-3-2 4. EN61000-3-3 iii. EMS: 1. EN61000-6-2 Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environments 2. EN61000-4-2 (ESD Standards) 3. EN61000-4-3 (Radiated RFI Standards) 4. EN61000-4-4 (Burst standards) 5. EN61000-4-5 (Surge Standards) 6. EN61000-4-6 (Induced RFI Standards) 7. EN61000-4-8 (Magnetic Field Standards) iv. Environmental Test Compliance: 1. IEC60068-2-6 Fc (Vibration Resistance) 2. IEC 60068-2-27 Ea (Shock) 3. FED STD 101C Method 5007.1 (Free fall w/package) 4. NEMA TS2 Environmental Requirements for Traffic Control Equipment k. Environmental: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate in the following environmental conditions: i. -40ºC to 75ºC operating temperature range ii. -40ºC to 85ºC storage temperature range iii. 5% to 95% operating relative humidity (non-condensing) l. Operating Power: The Ethernet Switch shall be designed to operate with the following power requirements: i. 2 x Terminal Block 52 VDC to 57 VDC ii. Polarity Reversal Protection iii. External Universal Power Supply Optional 1. 100 - 240 VAC 2. 50 - 60 Hz iv. 10.5W (non PoE) / 250.4W (with PoE) maximum power dissipation m. Operating Temperatures: i. -40 to 75 degrees C (-40 to 167 degrees F) ii. Tested at -40 to 85 degrees C (-40 to 185 degrees F) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS n. Dimensions: The Ethernet Switch dimensions shall not exceed the following maximums: i. Width: 2.85 in. (71.4 mm) ii. Depth: 5.6 in. (140 mm) iii. Height: 6.8 in. (170 mm) iv. Weight: 3.74 lb. (1.7 kg) o. Power over Ethernet (PoE) Technology: The 10/100TX ports shall meet the following power specifications: i. Alternative A&B ii. Pins 1/2(+), 3/6(-); Pins 7/8(+), 4/5(-) iii. Output 1. Ports 1-8 support PoE+ (15.4W/30W/60W) 2. IEEE 802.3af a. up to 15.4W/Port, 47-57VDC b. up to 30W/Port, 52-57VDC c. up to 60W/port, 52-57VDC 4. Construction Methods: a. General: Provide equipment that utilizes the latest available techniques for design and construction with a minimum number of parts, subassemblies, circuits, cards, and modules to maximize standardization and commonality. 5. Mechanical Components: Provide external screws, nuts and locking washers that are stainless steel; no self-tapping screws will be used. Provide parts made of corrosion resistant material, such as plastic, stainless steel, anodized aluminum or brass. 6. Documentation Requirements: Provide five complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: a. Complete performance specifications (functional, electrical, mechanical and environmental) for the unit. b. Complete installation procedures. c. Complete operations and configuration procedures 7. Warranty: The Ethernet switch products shall be guaranteed free of design and manufacturing defects by the original equipment manufacturer. Product shall have a LIMITED LIFETIME warranty. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 41 800-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 800-1.1 GENERAL The purpose of this section is to provide general information necessary for the construction, installation, modification and/or integration of traffic systems infrastructure, ITS equipment and/or appurtenances for the City of AZUSA (CITY) in accordance with the details shown on the Project PLANS and requirements of these SPECIFICATIONS. 800-1.2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS The terms and definitions in these SPECIFICATIONS, were obtained from multiple sources, and have been reviewed and edited to better fit the needs of the CITY. Therefore, they supersede the context and usage of the terms and definitions found in current editions of the CALTRANS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS and the GREENBOOK. In the event of conflicting or confusing usage, the CONTRACTOR shall seek clarification from the ENGINEER. Approval/Approved – The written approval of the Public Works Director, CITY ENGINEER, or authorized Engineer in charge of project. Approved Equal/Equivalent – The item, material or method offered by contractor that has received approval by the PROJECT ENGINEER as a substitute item, material or method in lieu of an item, material, or method that is specified. Assembly - A complete machine, structure or unit of a machine that was manufactured by fitting together parts and/or modules. CALTRANS – Refers to the State of California Department of Transportation CITY – Refers to the City of AZUSA. ENGINEER - Refers to the CITY Director of Public Works, CITY Engineer or authorized representative responsible for project implementation The GREENBOOK - Refers to and conforms to the current edition of “The GREENBOOK” Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. All electrical TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 42 materials and equipment furnished and installed under this section shall conform to all other ordinances, specifications, standards and regulations of the CITY. Hub - Refers to a communication facility, either a field cabinet or the TMC, used to distribute/relay data, video information and control from traffic management devices to supervisory and control monitors. Second Sources - Produced by more than one manufacturer. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - Refers to and conforms to the current edition of the CALTRANS Standard Specifications, unless noted otherwise. STANDARD PLANS - Refers to and conforms to the current edition of the CALTRANS Standard Plans, unless noted otherwise. STATE – Refers to the State of California. 800-1.3 ABBREVIATIONS 800-1.3.1 GENERAL This section supplements Section 1-3.1 of the GREENBOOK and Section 1-1.06 of the STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. 800-1.3.2 COMMON USAGE Abbreviation Word(s) AC 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz ungrounded power source. AC- 120 Volts AC, 60 hertz grounded return to the power source. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ANSI American National Standard Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 43 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge CALTRANS State of California Department of Transportation DIN Deutsch Industrie Norm EIA Electrical Industries Association ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. Hz Hertz IES Illumination Engineers Society ITS Intelligent Transportation Systems ITU International Telephone Union MIL-STD Military Standard NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC National Electrical Safety Council NETA National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. NTP Notice to Proceed OTDR Optical Time Domain Reflectometer PVC Polyvinyl chloride TMC City of AZUSA Traffic Management Center TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 44 TEES CALTRANS' Standard Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 45 800-2 PROJECT WORK SCOPE 800-2.1 GENERAL The CONTRACTOR shall install, terminate and test single-mode fiber optic cable, install all associated fiber termination equipment, and all necessary appurtenances, install and configure data communications and ITS equipment as shown on the Project PLANS as a minimum (Base Bid) under this CONTRACT. The PLANS and SPECIFICATIONS provide a detailed layout and design for the traffic control system. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct a detailed design review of the complete system and submit changes to drawings, schematics, material lists and related documentation for approval by the ENGINEER prior to construction. The CONTRACTOR shall submit cut sheets, specifications and samples (if any) from the manufacturer for approval by the ENGINEER 14 days prior to purchase of any cable, equipment or device. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for minor changes as necessary to meet the intent of the PLANS and SPECIFICATIONS at no additional cost to the CITY. All construction and/or system modifications shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance before work. Where applicable, the CITY may exercise its right to award any additional work through change order and/or additive alternative bid items. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and manufactured articles and shall perform all operations and equipment integration necessary to construct the traffic signal communication system facilities as shown on the PLANS and as specified herein. The hardware, construction services, and support services specified within these SPECIFICATIONS are intended to describe the minimum configuration that would be acceptable for the TMC. The detailed technical specification contained herein should be used by the bidder to develop a functional and integrated system configuration. All changes are subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all incidental accessories necessary to make the system complete in all respects and ready for operation, even if not particularly specified. All incidentals shall be furnished, delivered and installed by the CONTRACTOR without additional expense to the CITY. Minor CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 46 details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work and in the CONTRACTOR's bid, the same as if herein specified. All cables, including but not limited to, data and interface cables, coaxial cables, AC and DC Power cables, and connectors not specifically mentioned herein which may be located within traffic signal and the hub cabinet, shall be supplied by THE CONTRACTOR as required by PROJECT to achieve the intended system operation. 800-2.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS The Central Traffic Management System controls, monitors, and performs equipment diagnostics and alert functions on the designed intersections from the City’s TMC. The project goal is to implement the traffic communications infrastructure and enhance traffic surveillance to provide better management of traffic signal coordination and congestion. The Traffic Management System (TMS) will be an integrated suite of Windows or area-wide applications running on a network of Windows based microcomputers. The local area network operating environment shall support multiple workstations. The graphical user interface (GUI) will provide multiple users with an interface via a multi-tasking Windows 7 (or greater)/Server 2016™. It is essential that file, communications, polling and schedule management be operated independent of an operator. The system shall support both serial and Ethernet/IP connections to field devices. Refer to the PLANS for specific work items and equipment requirements by location as called out in the PLANS. Single-mode fiber optic cable shall be utilized to exchange all data between the hub and the TMC. In the event of uncertainty, the CONTRACTOR shall contact the ENGINEER or designated CITY representative to submit questions. 800-2.3 SUBMITTALS Prior to the purchase or fabrication of any equipment or material for use on this project, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval by the ENGINEER, appropriate catalog cut sheets and specifications for all standard, off-the-shelf items and shall submit shop drawings and other necessary data for all non-catalog or custom-made items. Once the submittals are approved and are in their complete and final form, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) more copies for a total submittal package of four (4). Detailed submittal data is required. If reprinted literature, such as catalog cut sheets, is used to satisfy some or all of the submittal data requirements, there shall be no statements on the literature that conflict with the requirements of the contract CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 47 documents. Any such statements shall be crossed off and initialed by the CONTRACTOR. Explanation of how specifications shall be met pertaining to items changed from the literature shall be given. All submittals shall be for new stock which shall give the City of AZUSA the rights to the latest model with updates applied at the time of installation. For equipment and materials requiring fabrication, pre-assembly or field-assembly, the CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed shop drawings or PLANS and component lists and specifications showing the construction, fabrication and installation of these "special" items. For each component of "special" items, submittal information meeting the same requirements as for "off-the-shelf" items shall be provided. 800-2.4 DOCUMENTATION The CONTRACTOR shall prepare as-built documentation, which depicts an accurate representation of the total system installed by the CONTRACTOR. A total of four (4) copies of each are required. The as- built documentation shall consist of the following documents as a minimum and as applicable: 1. Operator's Manuals - A manual containing a general description and detailed operating and installation instructions shall be provided for each different type or model of equipment. This manual shall also contain instructions for possible modification to the equipment within the capability of the equipment. 2. Maintenance Procedures Manuals - A manual containing detailed preventive and corrective maintenance procedures shall be provided for each different type or model of equipment. Step- by-step field and bench trouble-shooting procedures shall be included. A detailed parts list shall be included. 3. Equipment Assembly Drawings - A pictorial drawing showing the physical location and identification of each component shall be provided for each different electronic unit and each different subassembly of each unit. It may also be applicable to indicate location information on the as-built PLANS. 4. Cabinet and Rack Wiring Diagrams - A wiring diagram shall be provided for each cabinet and equipment rack. 5. System Connection Diagrams - Connection diagrams for the entire system, CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 48 including block diagrams, terminal numbers, and conductor color codes for the work performed by the CONTRACTOR, shall be cross-referenced to correlate with existing wiring diagrams and shall be addenda thereto. Payment for the submittals and documentation shall be considered included in the contract price paid for the item of work requiring submittal and documentation. 800-3 TRAFFIC OPERATIONS CENTRAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 800-3.1 CENTRAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE SPECIFICATIONS The Traffic Management System (TMS) shall be an integrated suite of Windows or area-wide applications running on Windows based microcomputers. The local area network operating environment shall support multiple workstations. The graphical user interface (GUI) shall provide multiple users an interface via a multi-tasking Windows 10/Server 2016™. File, communications, polling and schedule management shall operate without the need of operator. The Central System Software (CSS) shall be McCain Transparity or equal and shall follow the specifications as outlined below: CENTRAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE (CSS) SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND SYSTEM PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS · CSS shall be a Windows-based application using client-server architecture. · CSS shall operate on Microsoft Windows Server 2016 and Windows 10. · CSS shall use Microsoft SQL Server 2017. · CSS shall have ability to run in a virtual server environment. · CSS shall support remote connections via Virtual Private Network (VPN) access. · CSS client application shall automatically check and apply software updates. o CSS client updates shall not require administrative permissions. STANDARDS AND DEVICE SUPPORT SYSTEM SHALL SUPPORT NTCIP COMPLIANT COMMUNICATION · CSS shall support all mandatory and optional NTCIP 1201 objects. · CSS shall support all mandatory and optional NTCIP 1202 objects. · CSS shall support McCain Omni eX vendor specific objects (MIB available upon request). CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 49 · CSS shall support XML interface to L.A. County Information Exchange Network (IEN). CSS SHALL SUPPORT THE MCCAIN OMNI EX NTCIP COMPLIANT SOFTWARE: · Phase (16), Pedestrian (16), Overlap (16), Preemption (8), and Detector status (128). · Master and Local Cycle Timer (counting from zero to cycle limit) · Controller date and time. · External Alarm Status (up to 8 external controller alarms) · Critical Alarm Status (Stop-time, Cabinet Flash) · Upload/download of complete timing parameter database. COMMUNICATIONS · CSS shall perform second-by-second status polling to signalized intersections. · CSS shall perform event-triggered polling to signalized intersections. · CSS shall support IP and Serial traffic controller communication. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) · GUI shall provide a uniform and consistent scheme for use of buttons, menus, and forms. · GUI shall provide controls for stacking, docking, un-docking, hiding, or splitting the window panes which can be easily organized on multiple monitors in an advanced traffic management center. · GUI shall provide a means for labeling external traffic controller alarms and display the user defined name when alarm is active (i.e. “Battery Backup” or “Door Open”). CSS SHALL DISPLAY DEVICE STATUS IN A SYSTEM WIDE MAP CSS System Maps shall support: · Common GIS map navigation controls (i.e. panning, zooming, small/large scale hiding) · Ability to incorporate industry standard ESRI vector and/or image files. · User selectable layers. · User selectable Web-based backgrounds o Online ArcGIS o Online Open Street Map o Online Bing CSS System Maps shall display: · The operational and alarm status of each traffic controller. · System link and/or system detector status CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 50 · Overlay congestion and arterial performance data · Contextual menus for launching device specific commands · On-hover, display intersection name, operational status, and alarm status. CSS SHALL DISPLAY DETAILED REAL-TIME STATUS OF TRAFFIC CONTROLLER SOFTWARE CSS shall present the detailed real-time status of a signalized intersection including: · Phase output status · Pedestrian status · Overlap status · Preemption status · Vehicle detector status · Master/Local cycle timer status · Alarm status · Controller date/time CSS SHALL PERMIT USERS TO SEND COMMANDS TO TRAFFIC CONTROLLER SOFTWARE Authorized users shall be able to send the following commands from the central system: · Vehicle Calls · Pedestrian calls · EV Preemption · Manual Override of Operational Status o Coordination Plan, Free, or Software Flash CSS SHOULD DISPLAY TIME-SPACE DIAGRAM o Display green-band progression o Display the design speed o Display real-time link speeds TRAFFIC CONTROLLER TIMING EDITOR · Shall provide immediate feedback when users have entered invalid data · Shall provide immediate feedback when users have unsaved changes · Shall allow users to invert column and header rows of each displayed page. · Shall provide an intuitive and nested navigation scheme for displaying timing parameters · Shall support single page or full timing database uploads/downloads. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 51 · Shall print all or a subset of timing parameters · Shall support timing archives and restoration of previously archived parameters · Shall display side-by-side comparison of timing from different sources, for example: o Central database vs. Controller database o Controller “A” database vs. Controller “B” database o Archived timing vs. Controller database o Imported timing vs. Central database TIMING PARAMETER AUDIT & MISMATCH REPORT · CSS shall provide a mechanism for checking the central system timing database against the timing parameters stored in the local controller. o Database mismatches shall be displayed in an interactive report/list. o Users shall be able to easily identify and correct timing parameter mismatches · Timing audits shall be available on-demand or as scheduled actions. ADVANCED TIMING PARAMETER VALIDATION The ideal CSS should perform advanced validation routines against user entered timing BEFORE committing changes to central database or controller database (i.e. ensure selected split values do not exceed cycle length). CSS shall allow users add hyperlinks to IP enabled devices SYSTEM REPORTS AND EVENT LOGGING CSS SHALL STORE A DATABASE OF SYSTEM EVENTS CONTROLLER ALARMS · Cabinet flash · Stop-time · External alarms · Local Override · Keyboard Entry · Coordination Alarm (NTCIP controllers only) · Detector Fault · Offline CONTROLLER OPERATING MODE · Coordinated CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 52 · Transition · Free · Software Flash · Preempt o EV Preempt o Transit Priority USER ACTIVITY LOG CSS shall log events related to user activity, such as: · Login / logoff · Timing parameter modifications · User commands to traffic controller · System configuration changes CSS SHALL PROVIDE SYSTEM AND OPERATIONAL REPORTS The ideal CSS should display visual charts in addition to raw data where appropriate. SYSTEM LINK PERFORMANCE System link performance report should compare flow trends of several links and/or lanes. · Volume, Occupancy, and Speed over time. SPLIT MEASURES OF EFFECTIVENESS The Split Measures of Effectiveness report should display the following: · Split utilization of each phase · Active pattern, cycle length McCain Omni eX only: · Reason for phase termination o Phase not serviced o Coord. force-off o Vehicle gap out o Vehicle max out o External force-off o Ped extend CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 53 CENTRAL SCHEDULER CSS shall provide a single mechanism for ALL scheduled actions including: · Traffic controller/group TOD operations (pattern selection) · Device log collection · Collection of traffic data (volume, occupancy, and speed). · Email notifications and reports · Date/time broadcast to all or select controllers · Timing parameter audit / mismatch report. o Mismatches shall be recorded and trigger email notification. ADVANCED OPERATIONS CSS SHALL PERMIT USERS TO LOGICALLY GROUP TRAFFIC CONTROLLERS · Groups shall NOT be limited to traffic controllers on the same communications channel · Traffic controllers shall be capable of multi-group membership. · Traffic controllers shall be capable of coordinated operations with different groups depending on TOD · Traffic controllers may be grouped via geographic region w/out operational functions. · Operators shall be capable of defining emergency evacuation groups which when activated shall send manual override commands to ensure emergency plans are not overridden by standard TOD commands. · Group types shall include: o Coordination Group o Traffic Adaptive Group o Ramp Meter Group o Jurisdiction CSS SHOULD SUPPORT TRAFFIC RESPONSIVE OPERATION · Traffic responsive routine shall utilize data collected from user-defined system detectors in order to select a timing pattern/plan that is best suited for the traffic conditions. · Traffic responsive routine shall select the favored direction for coordination based on the ratio of inbound/outbound traffic or use a fixed offset defined by the user. · Users shall be able to define the volume and occupancy thresholds that best suit each coordination pattern/plan. · Traffic responsive shall utilize a user-defined “lockout” period to prevent excess transitions. CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 54 CSS SHOULD SUPPORT TRAFFIC ADAPTIVE OPERATIONS · The ideal CSS should provide an option for Traffic Adaptive Operations. · Traffic Adaptive operations shall adjust cycle, split, and offset each cycle in response to changing traffic demands along the coordinated system and at each intersection. EVENT ACTION MANAGEMENT · The ideal CSS should provide mechanisms for Incident Action Management and Dynamic Grouping of Traffic Controllers in response to congestion incidents. The exact functionality of these features should be defined and described by the CSS provider. SYSTEM SECURITY · CSS shall require System Admins to create a username and password for each system user. · Users shall be assigned to Access Levels which dictate the user’s permissions within the CSS · CSS shall permit System Admins to create custom Access Levels · At a minimum, CSS shall enforce the following user permissions: o System Configuration o Broadcast controller date/time o Import/Export device timing o Save/edit device timing o Set Vehicle/Ped calls o Set Preemption calls USER ACTIVITY LOCKS · CSS shall prevent users from performing conflicting command actions · CSS shall permit users to “unlock” control from “inactive” users 800-3.2 SYSTEM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 800-3.2.1 CENTRAL SYSTEMS SERVERS The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a communications processor/remote access server (and file server in peer-to-peer networks) for the central system servers that shall consist of a microcomputer system (Dell Precision Rack 7000 Series (7910)) or an approved equal and at a minimum meet the following requirements: · Minimum 2.6 GHz Quad Core Processor (AMD or Intel) · RAID 5 or greater CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 55 · 16 GB RAM or greater · SVGA color graphics adapter with 128 MB of vRAM or greater · 500 GB hard drive or greater · Available serial ports or Portserver required · A minimum of 2 standard network adapters · Operating System – Windows Server 2016 or greater · Database Software – SQL Server 2016 Standard or greater · .Net Framework 4.7.1 or greater · Microsoft Office 2016 or greater All workstations for the central system must meet hardware requirements as those listed above, plus additional requirements related to graphics card, monitors, and video control software. Central System workstation shall run on Windows Vista or greater. Prior to the purchase or fabrication of any equipment or material for use on this project, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for review and approval by the ENGINEER, appropriate catalog cut sheets and specifications for all standard, off-the-shelf items and shall submit shop drawings and other necessary data for all non-catalog or custom-made items. 800-3.3 SYSTEM HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 800-3.3.1 TMC COMPONETS The following provides, for reference purposes only, recommended components and quantities for TMC operation and communication for use by CONTRACTOR in accordance with project PLANS to estimate a lump sum bid cost for TMC construction (Bid Item 5,6,& 10). CONTRACTOR is responsible to supply all components necessary for complete TMC operation and communication including items not specifically referenced. The table below presents a general list of equipment, model number and quantity anticipated for project completion: Description Model Number/Service Qty Furnish and Install Server Racks NEBS Seismic Zone 4 Server rack Rackmount Solutions Model # RS732436-NEBS19 42U Cabinet Rack (28.5”W x 38.5”D x 78”H) 1 Furnish and install Fiber Optic patch panel with necessary cables and connectors Corning 19 in Rack mount with FC connectors and patch cables. Provide at TMC & City Hall FC to LC patch cables. Provide cable trays as required. 1 Furnish and Install an Layer 3 Ethernet switch with necessary Etherwan EX99424-8VCR 1 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 56 cables and connectors Furnish, Install and Integrate Advanced Traffic Management System (TMS) including 3-year system maintenance, on-site training and citywide site license McCain Transparity with Omni eX Site License or equal, for 50 number of intersections 1 Furnish, Install and Integrate TMS with the following minimum specifications Rack server: Minimum 2.6GHz Quad Core Processor (AMD or Intel), RAID 5 or greater, 16GB RAM or greater, SVGA color graphics adapter with 128 MB of vRAM or greater, 500GB hard drive or greater, available serial ports or Portserver required, minimum 2 standard network adaptors, Windows Server 2016 or greater, SQL Server 2016 Standard or greater, .Net Framework 4.7.1 or greater, and Microsoft Office 2016 or greater. 1 Furnish PC based remote TMC workstation at City Hall, Engineering Dept with the following minimum specifications 2.4 GHz Dual Core processor (AMD or Intel), 32 GB RAM, HD graphics cards with minimum 2 DP or HDMI video ports, SVGA Color Graphics Adapter, 16X or faster DVD-ROM drive, 500 GB hard drive or greater, Available serial ports or Portserver required, 1200 baud or greater for each serial communications channel, 2 standard NIC network adapters. 24” minimum desktop monitor. 1 Furnish PC based TMC workstation with the following minimum specifications 2.4 GHz Dual Core processor (AMD or Intel), 32 GB RAM, HD graphics cards with minimum 2 DP or HDMI video ports, SVGA Color Graphics Adapter, 16X or faster DVD-ROM drive, 500 GB hard drive or greater, Available serial ports or Portserver required, 1200 baud or greater for each serial communications channel, 2 standard NIC network adapters. 24” minimum desktop monitor. 1 Furnish & Install TMC Video Wall Monitors Diagonal Size: 65” Type: 120Hz LED Resolution: 3840 x 2160 (16:9) Response Time: 6ms Video Input: DVI-D Displayport 1.2, HDMI 2.0 1 Furnish and Install TMC rack mount PC Video Wall processor with the following minimum specifications Meet minimum hardware requirements of TMC remote PC workstation and configuration to drive up to 16 HD displays, wall control and remote software 1 Maintenance Agreement Three year Maintenance Agreement for Traffic Management System 1 Draw and Install Intersection Graphics Display for XX intersections Install intersection graphics and system map configuration w/City to provide data 1 CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 57 TABLE OF CONTENTS CITY OF AZUSA TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION PROJECT DIVISION 1 – GENERAL Section 001 – General Specifications Section 002 – Scope and Control of Work Section 01100 – Summary Section 01400 – Quality Requirements Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION Section 02200 – Site Preparation DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation Section 079000 – Joint Sealers Section 079200 – Sealants and Caulking DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 081100 – Metal Doors and Frames Section 087100 – Finish Hardware DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 092100 – Gypsum Board Systems Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing Section 096513 – Rubber Base Section 096513.13 – Static Control Tile Flooring Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 101400 – Signage Section 107000 – Detectable Warning DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 230500 – Common Work Results for HVAC Section 230529 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 230553 – Identification for HVAC piping and Equipment Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 230700 – HVAC Insulation Section 232113 – HVAC Piping Section 238126 – Split System Air Conditioner DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 260500 – Common Work Results for Electrical Section 260503 – Equipment wiring connections CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR TMC 58 Section 260519 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 260533 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems Section 262416 – Panelboards DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 311000 – Site Clearing Section 312200 – Grading Section 312500 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 321216 – Asphalt Concrete Paving Section 321313 – Site Concrete Work Section 321700 – Pavement Markings and Bumpers END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 59 DIVISION 1 – GENERAL Section 001 – General Specifications Standard Specifications of the City of AZUSA are contained in the latest Edition of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, and supplements as written and promulgated by the Joint Cooperative Committee of the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and the Southern California District of the Associated General Contractors of California. Copies of these Standard Specifications are available from the publisher, Building News, Incorporated, 990 Park Center Drive, Suite E, Vista, California 9281-8352, telephone (760) 734-1113. The Standard Specifications set forth above will control the General Provisions, Construction Materials, and Construction Methods for this Contract, except as amended by the Plans, Special Provisions, or other contract documents. The following Special Provisions are supplementary and in addition to the provisions of the Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted and the section numbers of the Special Provisions coincide with those of the said Standard Specifications. Only those sections requiring elaborations, amendments, specifying of options, or additions are called out. In addition, the following listed documents by reference, are hereby made a part of these specifications and shall become a part of the contract documents when executed: 1. State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans and Specifications dated July 2010. 2. American Public Works Association, latest edition, including supplements. 3. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). The following City of AZUSA Standard Plans accompanies and forms a part of these Specifications. These Specifications and standards are complementary and anything shown or specified in one and not in the other shall be executed as though shown or specified in both. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 60 Section 002 – Scope and Control of Work 002.1 Plans and Specifications. 002.1.1 General. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain a control set of Plans and Specifications on the project site at all times. All final locations determined in the field, and any deviations from the Plans and Specifications, shall be marked in red on this control set to show the as-built conditions. Upon completion of all work, the CONTRACTOR shall return the control set to the ENGINEER. Final payment will not be made until this requirement is met. 002.1.2 Shop Drawings and Submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to submit Shop Drawings and Submittals for fan coil unit, condenser unit, video monitors, TMC equipment including computer, servers, and racks , and any other submittals noted in the Plans or Specifications not mentioned in Subsection 002.1.2, or as deemed necessary by the ENGINEER. 002.1.3 Examination of Contract Documents. The bidder shall examine carefully the entire site of the work, including but not restricted to the conditions and encumbrances related thereto, the Plans and Specifications, and the Proposal and Contract forms therefore. The submission of a bid shall be conclusive evidence that the bidder has investigated and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered, as to the character, quality, and scope of the work to be performed, the quantities of material to be furnished and as to the requirements of the Proposal, Plans, Specifications, and the Contract. 002.1.4 Record Drawings. All corrections on record drawings shall be done in red ink for approval by the ENGINEER. Record drawings shall be a control set of the construction plans kept on the site for daily recording of “as-built” conditions. Show dimensioned locations of all buried facilities, such as drains, sumps, pipe, valves, electrical conduits, and irrigation wire. Submit the final “as-Built” plans in 24”x36”, PDF, and CAD format. Dimensions must be taken from above ground permanent, architectural objects, not plants or irrigation heads. All dimensions, notes, etc., shall be eligible. Record drawing shall be reviewed prior to all progress payment requests, and submitted prior to final inspection. Payment for Record Drawings is included in the Contract Sum of work and no additional payment will be made for record drawings. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 61 Section 01100 – Summary PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. The Project Consists of RENOVATION for: 1. Project Location: 809 N ANGELENO AVE, AZUSA, CA 91702. 2. Project Owner: CITY OF AZUSA. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. Do not commence Work until after execution of Agreement and receipt of Notice-to- Proceed from City. B. Perform work in order to achieve Substantial Completion of all work by 90 Days after receipt of Notice-to-Proceed. C. Achieve Final Completion within seven (7) days following the date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. Work Area Access: Buildings will be occupied during work. Access to the work area will be limited to unoccupied times before 8:30 AM and after 5:00 PM every Monday thru Friday. Coordinate all other work hour schedules with City of AZUSA so as not to interfere with City’s use of the building. B. Limit use of the premises to construction activities in areas indicated; allow for City occupancy and use by the public, subject to approval by a City Safety Specialist C. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials at site. D. Parking: CONTRACTOR use existing parking areas as indicated on Drawings. E. CONTRACTOR Staging Areas: Limit staging to areas indicated on Drawings. F. Construction operations: limited to areas indicated on Drawings. 1.6 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 62 A. DRUG AND ALCOHOL POLICY 1. The possession, use, or distribution of illicit drugs and alcohol on facility premises is prohibited. Prescription medications brought to the project site shall be in the original container bearing the name of the drug, the name of the physician and the prescribed dosage. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 63 B. USE OF TOBACCO PRODUCTS A. Smoking and other use of tobacco products is prohibited on all city property. C. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 1. Safety must not be sacrificed for the sake of productivity or expedience. Safety of staff and the public is critical. Take all reasonable precautions to prevent endangerment or injury. Advise and coordinate operations with the office. 2. Safe vehicle operation rules are to be followed at all times. These include positioning vehicles to minimize the necessity of backing and providing a "spotter", someone who will make sure that people do not run into the path of a vehicle when driving on the path of travel that is occupied by visitors. 3. Tools shall never be left out when an unsecured work area is vacated. 4. Ladders and scaffolding will be taken down when an unsecured work area is vacated. 5. Open holes and other tripping hazards shall be fenced or barricaded when an unsecured work area is vacated. 6. Operations resulting in vapors, emissions or flying objects shall be conducted in such a way as to prevent exposure to any unprotected parties or property. 7. "Secured Work Area" is defined as an area having a perimeter cyclone fence at least 6 feet in height, with gates which close and lock so that no casual entrance is possible by unauthorized adults or children. 8. CONTRACTOR to follow all OR-OSHA rules for Confined Spaces, where applicable. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 64 Section 01400 – Quality Requirements PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Section specifies quality review requirements includes: 1. Inspection 2. Sampling and Testing 3. Inspection and Testing/Laboratory Service 1.3 INSPECTION A. Unless otherwise indicated, all products, materials, and equipment shall be subject to inspection by the ENGINEER at the place of manufacture. B. The presence of the ENGINEER at the place of manufacturer, however, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for furnishing products, materials, and equipment which comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is the duty of the CONTRACTOR, and said duty shall not be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the ENGINEER. 1.4 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Unless otherwise indicated, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with the methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM, ATM, and AASHTO as applicable to the class and nature of the article or material considered; however, the City reserves the right to use any generally-accepted system of sampling and testing which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER will insure the City that the quality of the work is in full accord with the Contract Documents. B. Any waiver by the City of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or not such waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective or remedial work, shall not be construed as a waiver of any requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the ENGINEER reserves the right to make independent investigations and tests, and failure of any portion of the work to meet any of the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be reasonable cause for the ENGINEER to require the removal or correction and reconstruction of any such work in accordance with the General Conditions. 1.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICE THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 65 A. Inspection and testing laboratory service shall comply with the following: 1. City will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing or will perform inspection and testing itself. 2. The ENGINEER will perform inspections as specified in individual Specification sections. 3. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the ENGINEER in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non- compliance with Contract Documents. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with the ENGINEER or independent firm and furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER 24 hours prior to the expected time for operations requiring inspection and laboratory testing services. 6. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs from such retesting at no additional cost to the City. 7. For samples and tests required for CONTRACTOR's use, the CONTRACTOR shall make arrangements with an independent firm for payment and scheduling of testing. The cost of sampling and testing for the CONTRACTOR's use shall be included in the Contract Price. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect materials or equipment upon the arrival on the job site and immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items. B. Measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall verify measurements and dimensions of the work on the field as an integral step of starting each installation. C. Manufacturer's Instructions. Where installations include manufactured products, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 66 Section 01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include but are not limited to, the following: 1. Storm drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 4. Ventilation. 5. Electric power service. 6. Lighting. 7. Telephone service. 8. [Other service] C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Project signs. 2. Field offices. 3. Storage and fabrication sheds. 4. Trash, refuse disposal. 5. Temporary roads and paving. 6. Erosion controls and site drainage. 7. Lifts and hoists. 8. [Temporary elevator usage.] 9. [Temporary stairs.] 10. [Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.] D. Security and protection facilities and measures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Site enclosure fence. 5. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 6. Pest control. 7. Security enclosure and lockup. 8. Covered walkways. 9. Temporary enclosures. 10. Temporary partitions. 11. Fire protection. 12. Temporary security measures. E. Related Sections: Refer to Table of Contents, Construction Specifications shows Division 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 11 and 32 for other temporary requirements including ventilation, humidity requirements and products in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 67 A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. B. Landfill Disposal Receipts: Demolition of existing sidewalk, driveway, landscape and asphaltic pavement will be properly disposed of daily. Submit copies of receipts issued by a landfill facility. Include receipts with CONTRACTOR Daily Progress Report. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with UBC Chapter 33, “Site Work, Demolition and Construction”, ANSI A10.6, NECA’s “Temporary Electrical Facilities”, and NFPA 241, "Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations". 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the City, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before City’s acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1.5 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION A. Protection of Property: Continually maintain adequate protection of the Work from damage and protect all property, including but not limited to buildings, equipment, furniture, grounds, and vegetation, material, utility systems located at and adjoining the job site. Repair, replace or pay the expense to repair damages resulting from CONTRACTOR’s fault or negligence. B. Before starting work to be applied to previously erected constructions, make a thorough and complete investigation of the recipient surfaces and determine their suitability to receive required additional construction and finishes. Make any repair that is required to properly prepare surfaces, and coordinate the Work to provide a suitable surface to receive following Work. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 68 C. Commencing work by any trade implies acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces as satisfactory for the application of subsequent work, and full responsibility for finished results and assumption of warranty obligations under the Contract. D. Protect existing (including interiors) work to prevent damage by vandals or the elements. Provide temporary protection. Use curtains, barricades, or other appropriate methods. Take positive measures to prevent breakage of glass and damage to plastic, aluminum and other finishes. E. Repairs and Replacements: Within 24/36 hours or less, promptly replace and repair damages to the approval of the City. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs does not justify a time extension. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by City. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Paint: Comply with requirements in Section 09900. C. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers per directive from City: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for exposures. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Connect to existing service where directed by the City. 1. Arrange with utility company, the City, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 69 B. Storm and Sewer Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If storm drains are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. 1. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers, storm drains or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Connect temporary sewers, if used as directed by sewer department officials. 3. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. 4. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Use of the user’s water service will be permitted where and when directed by the City. Otherwise, make arrangements with the utility company for temporary use of water, and pay for all expenses. However, at the option of the CONTRACTOR, a temporary tap into the facility’s existing water system is allowed, subject to the following conditions: 1. Comply with the Department of Health’s and County water provider’s requirements when tapping into the existing water system. 2. Meter the tapped line and prior to water use, notify the City to observe an initial meter reading. Take monthly meter readings. Pay the City, on a monthly basis, for water used at the current rate per 1,000 gallons. 3. Payments are to be by and mailed as directed by the City: 4. Checks shall be accompanied by the following information: i. Name of facility, Project Name and Title and Job No. ii. CONTRACTOR’s name iii. Initial meter reading for the month and final meter reading for the month. iv. Volume of water used and the amount due in payment for that water 5. Upon completion of the project and just prior to removal of the water meter, notify the City to observe a final meter reading. 6. Should the CONTRACTOR at any time fail to comply with any or all of the above conditions, the City may terminate the use of water. The CONTRACTOR shall remove the hookup within 48 hours of notification of such termination. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Use of user’s existing toilet facilities will be permitted where and when directed by the City, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to user. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 70 material handled. a. Provide safety showers, eyewash fountains, and similar facilities for convenience, safety, and sanitation of personnel, whenever required. 4. Locate toilets and drinking-water fixtures so personnel need not walk more than 2 stories vertically or 200-feet horizontally to facilities. E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. F. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristic during construction period. Include meters as applicable, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. G. Electric Power Use Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. Protect wiring, in conduits or other, measures when exposed to possible damage or traffic areas. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access or where shown on Contract Drawings or as directed by the City. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. 3. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to City. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide a reasonably level, graded, well-drained subgrade of satisfactory soil material, compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density in the top 6-inches. 2. Provide gravel paving course of subbase material not less than 3-inches thick; roller compacted to a level, smooth, dense surface. 3. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and “STOP” signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Site Drainage: THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 71 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. E. Project Sign and Temporary Sign(s): 1. Provide and install project identification sign and other signs as listed. Sign designs are attached to Part 3 of this Section: i. Project Sign ii. Warning Sign 2. Install signs where directed by the City or where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 3. Provide temporary signs to provide directional information to constructional personnel and visitors. 4. Construct signs with durable materials, properly supported or mounted, and visible. F. Trash, Refuse Disposal: 1. Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 2. Do not burn debris or waste materials on the project site. 3. Do not bury debris or waste material on the project site unless specifically allowed elsewhere in these specifications as backfill material. 4. Haul unusable debris and waste material to an appropriate off-site dump area. i. Water down debris and waste materials during loading operations or provide other measures to prevent dust or other airborne contaminants. ii. Vacuum, wet mop, or damp sweep when cleaning rubbish and fines which can become airborne from floors or other paved areas. Do not dry sweep. iii. Use enclosed chutes or containers to conveying debris from above the ground floor level. 5. Clean-up shall include the collection of all waste paper and wrapping materials, cans, bottles, construction waste materials and other objectionable materials, and removal as required. Frequency of clean-up shall coincide with rubbish producing events. G. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a weekly basis for the City’s field office, first-aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas. 3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. General: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Dust Control: THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 72 1. Prevent dust from becoming airborne at all times including non-working hours, weekends and holidays in conformance with the State Department of Health, Administrative Rules, Title 11, Chapter 60.1 - Air Pollution Control. 2. CONTRACTOR is responsible for and shall determine the method of dust control. Subject to the CONTRACTOR’s choice, the use of water or environmentally friendly chemicals may be used over surfaces that create airborne dust. 3. CONTRACTOR is responsible for all damage claims due to their negligence to control dust. C. Noise Control: 1. Keep noise within acceptable levels at all times in conformance with the State Department of Health, Administrative Rules, Title 11, Chapter 46 - Community Noise Control. Obtain and pay for the Community Noise Permit when construction equipment or other devices emit noise at levels exceeding the allowable limits. 2. Ensure mufflers and other devises are provided on equipment, internal combustion engines and compressors to reduce loud disruptive noise levels and maintain equipment to reduce noise to acceptable levels. 3. Unless specified elsewhere, do not start construction equipment that meet allowable noise limits prior to 6:45 A.M. or equipment exceeding allowable noise levels prior to 7:00 A.M. D. Erosion Control: 1. During grading operations, maintain the grade to prevent damage to adjoining property from water and eroding soil. 2. Install temporary berms, cut-off ditches and other provisions needed for construction methods and operations. Should there be a question if the temporary measures are insufficient to prevent erosion, the City shall make the final determination. 3. Construct and maintain drainage outlets and silting basins where shown on the Drawings and when required to minimize erosion and pollution of waterways during construction. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect existing landscaping and tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion due to construction activity. F. Pest Control: Before demolition and excavation work begins, retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. Violations of any of the above environmental control requirements or any other pollution control requirements; which may also be specified in the other Specifications sections, shall be resolved under the SUSPENSION and CORRECTIVE WORK Section of the GENERAL CONDITIONS. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 73 3.6 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES A. Barricades: Before construction operations begin erect temporary construction barricade(s) to prevent unauthorized persons from entering the project area and to the extent required by the City. 1. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide City with 2 sets of keys. 3. Maintain temporary construction barricade(s) throughout the duration of the Work. During the course of the project, the City may require additional barricades be provided for the safety of the public. CONTRACTOR shall erect the additional barricade(s) at its own expense. 4. Construction: i. chain-link ii. portable chain-link iii. wood iv. plastic fencing B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: 1. Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. 2. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. C. Temporary Enclosures: 1. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 2. Where cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. D. Opening Protection: 1. Vertical Openings: Close openings with plywood or similar materials. 2. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 3. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. E. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on construction side. 3.6 BARRICADES AND ENCLOSURES A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by heat temperatures and similar elements. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 74 B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, or when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of CONTRACTOR. The City reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 75 DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION Section 02200 – Site Preparation PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section. B. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Section specifies site preparation includes: selective demolition, abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.3 REFERENCES A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2000. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents. Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in flooding. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. B. Do not ever close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City. C. Do not ever close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to City. . THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 76 D. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. E. Remove unused underground piping. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. F. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain. 3.2 EXISTING BUILT ELEMENTS 1. Scope: 1. Remove other items indicated, for salvage, relocation, and recycling. 2. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241. 3. Use of explosives is not permitted. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public. 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with occupants. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from City. C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed. D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. E. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify City; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury. F. Hazardous Materials: Comply with 29 CFR 1926 and state and local regulations. G. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials. 1. Comply with requirements of governing jurisdictions. 2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials. 3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse. 3.3 DEBRIS THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 77 A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site on daily basis. CONTRACTOR shall provide a dumpster on site as coordinated with City. 3.4 WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of governing jurisdictions. B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. 3.5 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Demolition” under Bid item No. 5 and 6 and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be released upon approval and acceptance of work by the City. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 78 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section. B. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers 1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings 2. Curbs 3. Walkways 4. Gutters, 5. Driveways 6. Ramps 7. Curb Ramps 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. C. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. D. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. E. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 79 F. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. G. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. H. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. I. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. J. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. K. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. L. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. M. ASTM A 497/A 497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. N. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. O. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. P. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. Q. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. R. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. S. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. T. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. U. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. V. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. W. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. X. ASTM C 330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. Y. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 80 Z. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. AA. ASTM A706A/ 706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. AB. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. AC. ASTM C 881/C 881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. AD. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. AE. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. AF. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Nonshrink). AG. ASTM C 1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. AH. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). AI. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). AJ. ASTM D 3963/D 3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. AK. ASTM E 1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers. AL. ASTM E 1155M - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers [Metric]. AM. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. AN. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society. AO. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete. AP. COE CRD-C 513 - COE Specifications for Rubber Waterstops; Corps of Engineers. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 81 AQ. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; Corps of Engineers. AR. CRSI (DA4) - manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. AS. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. AT. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. D. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project Site C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis, indicate physical and chemical analysis. F. Mix Designs: 1. Submit proposed concrete mix designs for each class or use at least 30 days prior to required delivery. 2. Mixes shall be prepared by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the project is located. 3. Specifically indicate where each class of concrete is to be used. 4. Indicate individual and combined aggregate gradations and aggregate source and characteristics. G. Test Reports: Submit aggregate and concrete mix test reports from independent testing laboratory. PART 2 – PRODUCT THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 82 2.1 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: CONTRACTOR's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: CONTRACTOR's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface and free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1-inch in concrete surface. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where reinforcement is to be welded, use ASTM A706/A706M deformed low- alloy, steel bars, unfinished. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Coiled Rolls. 2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide galvanized components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, low alkali portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. E. Admixtures: 1. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates, or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted unless approved by the ENGINEER. 2. Air Entraining: ASTM C260. 3. Water-reducing: ASTM C494, Type A. 4. Water-reducing, Regarding: ASTM C494, Type D. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 83 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Sheet Curing Materials: ASTM C171; white opaque polyethylene film, white polyethylene coated burlap sheeting, or regular waterproof paper. B. Dissipating Resin Curing Compounds: 1. ASTM C309, Type 1, clear or translucent, Class B, free of natural or petroleum waxes. Class A not acceptable. C. Acrylic Curing/Sealing Compounds: 1. ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, free of natural or petroleum waxes. D. Water Based Acrylic Curing/Sealing Compounds: 1. ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, VOC compliant, free of natural or petroleum waxes. Dries clear with high (medium) gloss sheen. 2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, plastic extrusion, complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. Single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Stego Wrap Class A Vapor Retarder, 10 mils by Stego Industries (877) 464- 7834. b. Substitutions: See General Provisions Item 5. B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi. 2.6 JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Waterstops: Rubber, complying with COE CRD-C 513. B. Joint Filler: Non-extruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, C. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation. 2. Height: To suit slab thickness. D. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900. 2.7 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Mix Design: 1. Submit design mixes for each type and class of concrete based on laboratory trial batch method or field experience methods described in ACI-318, Chapter 5. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 84 2. If trail batch method is used, employ an independent testing agency acceptable to the ENGINEER for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. Mix designs are to be prepared by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the project is located. CONTRACTOR employed testing agency shall not be same firm as City employed testing agency. 3. The proportioning of ingredients shall provide a concrete readily worked into forms and around reinforcement under conditions of placement to be employed, without segregation or excessive bleeding. 4. Do not place concrete until design mix for that class and type of concrete is reviewed by the ENGINEER. 5. Identify each mix design with code number which will be used on batch tickets. B. Design Compressive Strengths: 1. Normal Weight Concrete: a. Compressive strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M, strength at 7 days shall be at least 60 percent of the minimum required 28 day strength unless noted otherwise on drawings. b. Maximum slump 4 inches /- 1 inch. 2. Lightweight Weight Concrete: a. Compressive strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 29/C 39M, strength at 7 days shall be at least 60 percent of the minimum required 28 day strength unless noted otherwise on drawings. b. Maximum slump 4 inches /- 1 inch. c. The air dry unit weight shall be determined by ASTM C567, except that the drying time shall be 90 days. C. Maximum Size of Coarse Aggregate: 1. 1/5 narrowest dimension between form sides. 2. 1/3 depth of slabs. 3. 3/4 of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars, wires, or bundles of bars. 4. 1-inch maximum for normal weight concrete or 3/4 inch maximum for light weight concrete. D. Concrete Lump at Point of Discharge: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Reinforced Foundations: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 3. Other Concrete: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 4. Allowable tolerances of up to 1 inch above maximum indicated provided average of 10 most recent batches tested is less than the maximum. E. Minimum Cement Content: Not less than 470 pounds of total cementitious material per cubic yard of concrete. Not more than 25 percent pozzolan cement substitute and not less than 385 pounds of cement per cubic yard of concrete. F. Water-Cement Ratios for Concrete (by weight): 1. Maximum permissible water cement ratio: 0.50 unless noted otherwise on drawings. G. Admixtures: 1. Only use admixtures which have been tested and approved in mix designs. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 85 2. Air Entraining Admixture: a. Use in concrete exposed to freezing and thawing at any time during construction or in completed structure. b. Use in concrete placed at ambient temperatures below 40 degrees F. c. Tolerance on air content as delivered: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. H. Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete at ages from 28 to 42 days contributed for all ingredients, expressed as percent by weight of cement as follows: 1. Concrete over galvanized deck: 0.06 percent. 2. Concrete exposed to chloride in service: 0.15 percent. 3. Other concrete: 1.00 percent. I. Shrinkage Tests: 1. Prior to placing any concrete for wall or horizontal surfaces, a trial batch of each mix design of structural concrete shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and admixture (if any) proposed for the project. From each trial batch at least 3 specimens for determining drying shrinkage shall be prepared. The drying shrinkage specimens shall be a 4" x 4" x 11" prisms fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in accordance with the requirements of Tentative Method of Test for Length Change of Cement Mortar and Concrete, ASTM C157. The measurements shall be made and reported separately for 7 and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. The effective gage length of the specimens shall be 10 inches, and except for the foundation concrete, the average drying shrinkage at 35 days shall not exceed .054 percent. J. Cut existing concrete using a multi-blade rotary saw. 2.8 MIXING A. On Project Site (for Non-Structural Concrete Only): Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. B. Verify forms are free of debris and water. C. Verify excavations are free of loose material and water. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 86 B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load- bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. E. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions. Saturate cold joint surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of coat of waterproofing admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush at rate recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. F. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.3 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Notify the ENGINEER not less than 48 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 87 F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. K. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. L. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. M. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. N. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. O. Place floor slabs in pattern indicated. P. Saw cut joints within 12 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. Q. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. R. Convey concrete from mixer to place of deposit by method that will prevent segregation or loss of material, and that will not require addition of water to produce desired slump at point of placement. Do not use supported reinforcing as runway base for concrete conveying equipment. S. Depositing: 1. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location. 2. Do not allow free fall of concrete to exceed 4 feet. Do not allow free fall of concrete containing high-range water reducing admixture to exceed 10 feet. 3. Drop concrete in vertical direction, not at incline. 4. Place concrete without displacing reinforcing and accessories. 3.5 DEPOSITING A. Concrete shall be continuously deposited. When continuous placement is not possible, construction joints shall be located as approved by the ENGINEER. Concrete shall be deposited as close to its final point of placement as possible. B. Concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding or forking. Work concrete around reinforcements, embedded items and into corners. Eliminate all air or rock pockets and other causes of honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness. THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 88 C. Internal vibration shall have a minimum frequency with amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively. See ACI 309, "Recommended Practice for consolidation of concrete." 1. Vibrators shall be operated by experienced and competent workmen. 2. Use of vibrators to transport concrete shall not be allowed. 3. Vibrators shall be vertically inserted every 18 inches for 5 to 15 seconds and then withdrawn. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours. 3. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork float. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. a. Chemical Hardener: After slab has cured, apply water-diluted hardener in three coats per manufacturer's instructions, allowing 24 hours between coats. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains as indicated on drawings. 3.7 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 89 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by saturated burlap. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure four concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the ENGINEER. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by CONTRACTOR when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of the ENGINEER for each individual area. 3.10 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Concrete Work” under Bid item No. 5 and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Incidentals shall include all concrete work for ramps, walks, slabs, path of travel, landings, sidewalks, footings, etc. and no THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 90 additional payment for concrete will be made. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be released upon approval and acceptance of work by the City. END OF SECTION THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00- 91 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install building insulation, including sound attenuation blankets, as indicated. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittals. 1. Material List: Provide a list of all materials to be provided under this Section and manufacturer's data as required to show compliance with Specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84. 2. Flame Spread: ASTM E136. 3. Fire Resistive Ratings: ASTM E119. B. Thermal Resistivity: ASTM C177 and C518. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site and store in a safe, dry place, with all labels intact and legible at time of installation. B. Use all means necessary to protect building insulation materials before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials from damage resulting from work of other trades. JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00 - 92 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25 and smoke density shall not exceed 50. B. Thermal Insulation: 1. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers from glass or slag with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I. 2. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers from glass or slag with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type III, Class A, with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing. C. Sound Insulation: Fiberglass batts, with or without facing, R-15 as specified for thermal insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to work of this Section, examine installed work of other trades. Verify that such work is complete to a point where insulation may be installed in accordance with original design and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Fit batt or blanket insulation snugly between framing members. 2. Maintain total insulation integrity over entire area to be insulated, including areas between closely spaced members. 3. Extend full thickness insulation over entire area to be insulated. Use manufacturer's recommended clips to tightly fit batts at joints. 4. Cut and fit batt or blanket insulation tightly around pipes, conduits and all penetrations. 5. Do not compress batt insulation in excess of 10%. 6. Restrain batt or blanket insulation from sagging. 7. Metal frames (head and jambs) which occur in sound insulated walls shall be packed with insulation. JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00 - 93 B. Wall Insulation: 1. Interior (sound control batts): As specified for thermal insulation. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07 90 00 - 94 Section 079000 – Joint Sealers PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealant and joint backing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Cast-in-Place Concrete B. Gypsum Board Systems C. Site Concrete Work 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. 4. ASTM C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 6. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute 1. SWRI - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. C. Federal Specifications 1. FS TT-S-227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. 2. FS TT-S-230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. 3. FS TT-S-1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone Type. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s specifications and other data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability and Shore hardness. B. Submit three cured samples, of each type sealant specified, in sizes to demonstrate colors for selection, minimum 6 inches long, applied to substrates similar in appearance to actual substrates. C. Submit written evidence that Manufacturer and/or applicator has reviewed the use of sealant proposed for each substrate application SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 95 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Joint Sealer Work for Weathertightness: Sealant work of this Section includes all interior and exterior caulking and sealing required to make building weathertight and includes caulking and sealing wherever expansion and contraction occurs and between materials and products which could lead to infiltration of moisture, water, light or air-blown particles into building. B. Joint Sealer Work for Acoustical Control: Work includes interior caulking and sealing required to arrest airborne sound transmission through building assemblies. C. Joint Sealer Work for Moisture Control: Work includes interior caulking and sealing to fill openings and seams to prevent moisture penetration to the interior or into building assemblies of any kind. D. Joint Sealer Work for Appearance: Work includes interior caulking and sealing to neatly trim and fill openings prior to painting. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform joint sealant work in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Perform work in accordance with SWRI requirements for materials. E. All products shall comply with requirements for allowable VOC maximums. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator: Company, or applicator within any individual Section of the Specifications, specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum one-year experience. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide a minimum of one field sample, demonstrating sealant type, color, tooled surfacing, in each differing sealant application. B. Locate where approved by the City’s Representative. Do not proceed with remainder of sealant application until approved by the City’s Representative. 1. Field Installation Tests: Before installation of any section of sealant application, test the adhesion of sealant to actual substrate. 2. Seal at least a 5-foot length of joint and cure properly. Attempt pullout of material by hand, or by method recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3. Select test joints representative of joints to be sealed by the product to be tested. 4. Perform tests for each type of sealer used on exterior of building. 5. Perform tests in presence of the City’s Representative and the product manufacturer. 6. Report results to the City’s Representative in written format, when tests prove negative. SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 96 C. Field sample, if approved, may remain as part of the Work. Field samples not approved shall be removed from the Work, and corrections made at no added time or cost to the Contract. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. Do not permit conditions unacceptable to the manufacturer. B. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. C. All products shall comply with requirements for allowable VOC maximums. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of use. Store in a covered area under conditions of temperature and humidity recommended by the manufacturer. B. Do not retain at the job site any materials, which have exceeded the manufacturer’s recommended shelf-life. C. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation and to protect work and materials of other trades. 1.11 EXTENDED WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer’s warranty, to include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air-tight, or water-tight capability, or exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not properly cure within the warranty period. B. Correction is required for all failed application, as a part of scope of work under this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide only products that are recommended and approved by the manufacturer for the specific use to which they are applied and which comply with all requirements of the work under this Section. B. For each generic product, use only materials from one manufacturer. C. Provide only materials that are compatible with each other and with the joint substrate. 2.02 SEALANT TYPES A. Type 1: FS TT-S-230; one-part polyurethane, non-sag. Approved Products: 1. Pecora DYNATROL I-XL. 2. Vulkem 116. 3. Sikaflex - 15LM. SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 97 B. Type 2: FS TT-S-1543; one-part silicone, non-sag, mildew-resistant, with movement capability of more than 25 percent but less than 50 percent in both extension and compression. Approved Products: 1. Pecora 864 Architectural Silicone Sealant. C. Type 3: ASTM C1085; one-part, butyl rubber, non-sag, solvent-release curing, polymerized, non-staining, paintable, with tack-free time of 24 hours or less. Approved Products: 1. Pecora BC-158. D. Type 4: FS TT-S-227; multi-part polyurethane, self-leveling. Approved Products: 1. Pecora UREXPAN NR-200. 2. Vulkem 245/255. E. Type 5: FS TT-S-1543, one-part silicone, non-sag, mildew-resistant, with movement capability of more than 25 percent but less than 50 percent in both extension and compression. Approved Products: 1. Pecora 864 Architectural Silicone Sealant. 2.03 SEALANT COLORS A. Colors for each sealant will be selected by the City’s Representative, from standard colors normally available from the manufacturer. Should such standard color not be available from the approved manufacturer except at additional charge, provide all such colors at no additional cost or time to the Contract. B. In concealed installations and in partially or fully exposed installations, where so approved by the City’s Representative, use standard gray or black color. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell or open cell, polyethylene foam rod; oversized 25 to 50 percent larger than joint width, as recommended and approved by the manufacturer. D. Masking Tape: Non-staining, non-absorbing, compatible with sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Apply to bottom of joints that are too shallow to receive foam backer rod. F. Tooling Agents: Approved by the sealant manufacturer, non-staining to sealant and substrate. G. All other materials not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation of sealants, shall be first quality or their respective kinds as selected by the Contractor, subject to approval of the City’s Representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 98 A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than that recommended by sealant manufacturer. Notify the City’s Representative and obtain sealant manufacturer’s recommendations for alternate procedures. E. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant, including old joint sealers, oil, grease, paint, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost. B. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. C. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel or glazed surfaces of ceramic tile or other non- porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. 1. Steel: Steel surfaces in contact with sealant shall be sandblasted, manually scraped or wire-brushed to remove mill scale, paint or other foreign substances detrimental to proper adherence of the sealant materials. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. Remove protective coatings and all residues. 2. Aluminum: Aluminum surfaces in contact with sealant shall be cleaned of temporary protective coatings, dirt, oil and grease. Remove masking tape protective cover just prior to application of sealant. Use only such solvents as recommended by the aluminum manufacturer, and which are non-staining. 3. Concrete and Ceramic Tile Surfaces: All contact surfaces shall be dry, sound, well brushed and wiped free from dust. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean rags. Treated surfaces shall have the surface treatment removed by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities. D. Prime joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or where indicated or where applicator’s past experience or tests give indication special preparation. E. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond. Do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. F. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. G. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Equipment: Apply sealants under pressure with hand or power actuated gun or other appropriate means. Guns shall have nozzle of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints as designed. SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 99 B. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve optimum sealant movement capability. D. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension as recommended by the SWRI, or as required to achieve optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. Remove absorbent joint fillers, which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. E. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, compression seals, or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. F. Install bond breaker tape where joint backing is not used. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. I. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. J. Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform concave beads or configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by the manufacturer. K. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. L. Acoustic Sealant 1. Surfaces to be clean, dry and free of dust or other foreign matter. Backs of electrical boxes, pipes or other outlets to be sealed prior to closing partition. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with solvent or cleaning agents approved by the manufacturer. B. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been tooled. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by the work of this Section. D. Promptly remove from the job site all debris, empty containers and surplus material derived from the work under this section. 3.05 DEFECTIVE WORK SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 100 A. Work will be adjudged defective by the City’s Representative if leakage results from failure of sealant to cure or bond to adjacent work, or if it hardens, cracks, shrinks or runs or stains adjacent surfaces. B. Defective work shall be removed and re-applied. Clean joints and install new sealant materials as approved by the City’s Representative. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints: 1. Metal frames and concrete, masonry or plaster: Type 2. 2. Vertical expansion and a control joints: Type 2. 3. Joints in sheet metals flashings: Type 2. 4. Perimeters of metal window frames, door frames, louvers and similar openings, and where metal or other materials abut or join masonry, concrete or each other: Type 1 or 2. 5. Cap beads on glass adjacent to metal or other silica substance surfaces: Type 5. B. Interior Joints: 1. Joints between concrete, masonry and interior impervious materials: Type 1. 2. Perimeters of metal window frames, door frames, and where metal or other materials abut or join concrete or each other: Type 1. 3. Joints in gypsum board: Type 1. 4. Perimeters of sinks and other fixtures in countertops: Type 2. 5. Intersection of metal thresholds and floor substrate, where building components are mechanically attached and require sealing: Type 3. 3.08 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Joint Sealers” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which joint sealer is needed. END OF SECTION SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 101 Section 079200 – Sealants and Caulking PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and apply sealants and calking indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittals. 1. Prior to ordering materials or their installation, submit for review by the City, manufacturer's literature and samples indicating color range available to each sealant material intended for installation in "exposed" locations. Materials installed prior to review of color will be subject to removal and replacement with reviewed material. Color of finished sealant shall match approved samples. 2. Sample Joint: When so directed, prepare a sample joint for the City's approval, for each type of calked or sealed joint indicated. Approved sample joint will be used as standard of quality for workmanship required. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification of Sealant Materials: With each delivery of materials manufacturer shall certify, in writing, that materials comply with Specification requirements. B. Sealants and Calking shall be applied by qualified installer in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Installer shall have successfully completed, with the last 3 years, at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size of this project. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Calking compounds and sealants shall be delivered to project in unopened factory labeled containers with labels intact. Each label shall contain a statement conformance to standards specified for each material. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to any installation of calking or sealants, surfaces to receive such work shall be in proper condition and location. Unsatisfactory conditions shall be reported to the Inspector. Work shall not proceed until such conditions have been corrected. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Materials and workmanship shall be warranted in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions, except that warranty shall be furnished jointly by Contractor and materials manufacturer and shall cover maintenance of calking and sealing in a watertight condition for a period of 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Manufacturers: In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 102 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based of testing and field experience. C. Staining of adjacent surfaces by sealant is cause for rejection of material submitted or as installed, and shall be repaired and replaced. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Calking Compound: ASTM C834, Latex Calk, for interior use only. B. Sealants: 1. Sealant 1: Acrylic latex, one-part, non-sag, mildew resistant acrylic emulsion compound complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Grade NS, formulated to be paintable. a. Tremco Inc., Acrylic Latex Caulk. b. Bostik Construction Products Division, Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation, AC-20. 2. Sealant 2: butyl sealant, one-part, non-sag solvent-release-curing sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657 for Type 1 and formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. a. Tremco Inc., Tremco Bitul Sealant. b. Bostik Construction Products Division, Chem-Calk 300. c. Pecora Corp., BC-158. 3. Sealant 3: Silicone sealant, one-part non-acid-curing silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 790, 791, 795. b. General Electric Co., Silproof. c. Tremco, Inc., Spectrum 1. d. Pecora Corp., 864. 4. Sealant 4: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 786. b. General Electric Co., Sanitary 1700. c. Tremco, Inc., Proglaze White. d. Pecora Corp. 863 White. SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 103 5. Sealant 5: Multi-part pourable urethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. a. Tremco, Inc., HPL. b. Mameco International, Inc., Vulkem 255. c. Sika Corporation, Sikaflex 2C NS/SL. d. W.R. Meadows, Pourthane. C. Penetrations Through Fire Barriers: 1. 3M Brand Fire Barrier Calk CP-25. 2. 3M Brand Fire Barrier Putty 303. D. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. E. Primer: Non-Staining Type. Use primer as required and shall be product of manufacturer of sealant used. F. Lacquer sealer shall be clear, as recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Sealants shall have normal curing schedules, shall be nonstaining, color fast and shall resist deterioration due to ultra-violet radiation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on Drawings and recommended by manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Joints and spaces to be calked or sealed shall be completely cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar, oil, and other foreign materials which might adversely affect calking work. Where necessary, degrease with an approved solvent or commercial degreasing agent. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before application of calking compounds. B. If recommended by manufacturer, remove paint and other protective coatings from surfaces to be calked prior to priming and calking application. C. Preparation of surfaces to receive sealant shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's specifications. Use air pressure or other approved methods to achieve required results. Use masking tape to keep sealants off surfaces that will be exposed in finished work. SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00 - 104 D. Etch concrete or masonry surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless sealant manufacturer's printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation. E. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, and ASTM C962 for elastomeric sealants. F. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.03 SEALANT APPLICATION SCHEDULE Location Type Color A. Exterior & Interior joints in Sealant 5 To match adjacent material horizontal surfaces of concrete; between metal & concrete masonry and mortar. B. Exterior door, entrance & window Sealant 3 To match adjacent material frames. Exterior & interior vertical joints in concrete & masonry metal flashing. C. Interior joints in ceramic tile Sealant 4 Translucent or White and at plumbing fixtures. D. Under thresholds. Sealant 2 Black E. All interior joints Sealant 1 To Match Adjacent Surfaces not otherwise scheduled 3.04 APPLICATION A. Seal around all openings in exterior walls, and any other locations indicated or required for weatherproofing and waterproofing building. B. Sealants shall be applied by experienced mechanics using specified materials and proper tools. Preparatory work (cleaning, etc.) and application of sealant shall be as specified herein and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. C. Concrete, masonry, and other porous surfaces, and any other surfaces if recommended by manufacturer, shall be primed before applying sealants. Primer shall be applied with a brush that will reach all parts of joints to be filled with sealant. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 105 D. Sealants shall be stored and installed at temperatures as recommended by manufacturer. Sealants shall not be used when they become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from gun. Modification of sealants by addition to liquids, solvents, or powders will not be permitted. E. Sealants shall be applied with guns having proper size nozzles. Sufficient pressure shall be used to fill all voids and joints solid. In sealing around openings, include entire perimeter of each opening, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Where use of gun is impracticable, suitable hand tools shall be used. F. Sealed joints shall be neatly pointed on flush surfaces with beading tool, and internal corners with eaving tool. Excess material shall be cleanly removed. Sealant, where exposed, shall be free of wrinkles and uniformly smooth. Sealing shall be complete before final coats of paint are applied. G. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are indicated on Drawings or specified herein. H. Partially fill joints with joint backing material, using only compatible materials, until joint depth does not exceed 1/2" joint width. Minimum joint width for metal to metal joints shall be 1/4". Joint depth, shall be not less than 1/4" and not greater than 1/2". I. Apply sealant under sufficient pressure to completely fill voids. Finish exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces or recessed as indicated. Apply non-tracking sealant to concrete expansion joints subject to foot or vehicular traffic. J. Where joint depth prevents use of standard bond breaker backing rod, use non-adhering tape covering to prevent bonding of sealant to back of joint. Under no circumstances shall sealant depth exceed 1/2" maximum, unless specifically indicated on Drawings. K. Conventional Calking: Prime porous surfaces after cleaning. Pack joints deeper than 3/4" with sponge material to within 3/4" of surface. Completely fill joints and spaces with gun applied calking compound, forming a neat, smooth bead. Protect joints until fully set and seal with lacquer sealer where exposed or to receive paint finish. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS CALKING AND SEALING WORK A. Extent of sealant work is not necessarily fully described herein. Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage. Refer to Drawings for condition and related parts of work. B. Install sealants to depths as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within following general limitations: 1. For joints in concrete walks, slab and paving subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width, but not more than 3/4" deep or less than 3/8" deep, depending on joint width. 2. For building joints, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not more than 1/2" deep or less than 1/4" deep. 3.06 CLEANING A. Excess materials shall be removed from other finished surfaces as soon as calking or sealing in area is completed. Thin films of cured compound may be removed with stripping compound; no abrasives shall be used. Whenever excess cured compounds are removed, exercise care not to damage finished surfaces. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 106 3.07 CURING A. Calking and sealants shall cure in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Exercise care not to disturb seal until completely cured. Damaged calking and sealants shall be repaired as recommended by product manufacturer. 3.08 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Sealants and Caulking” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which sealers and caulking is needed. END OF SECTION . METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 107 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 081100 – Metal Doors and Frames PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow Metal Frames. 2. Hollow Metal Doors and Panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware. 2. Section 09 90 00 - Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. ASTM E152, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. ASTM A525, specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/SDI 100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. ANSI/SDI 119, Performance test Procedures for Steel Door Frames and Anchors. E. California Building Code. F. ANSI A151.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance, Steel Doors and Frames. G. ANSI A224.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. H. SDI 107, Hardware on Steel Doors, Reinforcement Application. I. California Title 24. J. UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. K. UBC 7-4, Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS & SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings: Submit six copies. Indicate door and frame elevations, sections, materials, gauges, finish, fabrication/erection details, locations of hardware and vision lites and louvers. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 108 B. Certification of Compliance: Provide letter of certification that all materials comply with these Specifications. C. Samples: Submit as requested by Architect. Samples will be returned after review. D. Substitutions: Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Architect reserves the right to access an hourly fee to review and evaluate substitutions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Steel Door and Frame Supplier: direct factory supplier who employs a Certified Door Consultant (CDC) or person with equivalent experience, available at reasonable times during course of Work, for consultation to City, Architect and Contractor. B. Label Construction: Affix a physical label or approved marking to the fire door or fire door frame at an authorized facility as evidence of compliance with procedures of the labeling agency. C. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent seals: UL10C / UBC-7-2 compliant. If intumescent seals are required for the fire-labeled assembly, furnish flush-with-door-edge type seals or kerfed-in-frame type seals. Adhesive applied intumescent strips are not acceptable. Coordinate frame fabrication to allow use of kerfed-in-frame type seals option. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C / UBC-7-2. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation. B. Storage of Doors: store in an upright position under cover. Place the units on at least 4" (101.6 mm) wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. If the corrugated wrapper on the door becomes wet, or moisture appears, remove the wrapper immediately. Provide a 1/4" (6.35 mm) space between the doors to promote air circulation. C. Storage of Frames: store under cover on 4" (101.6 mm) wood sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a humidity chamber and promote rusting. Store assembled frames in a vertical position, five units maximum in a stack. Provide a 1/4" (6.35 mm) space between frames to promote air circulation. D. Inspect delivered items for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided repaired items are equal to new Work and accepted by the Architect. Provide new items when directed. Comply with VOC regulations when repairing damage. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Deliver doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner so not to delay progress of other trades. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 109 B. Issue purchase orders to suppliers so as not to interfere with normal quoted delivery times. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Steel doors and frames supplied with a one (1) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Packaging and Disposal: package in biodegradable packs, paper or cardboard boxes. Dispose of non-biodegradable packs, plastic, styrofoam, polystyrene, and polyurethane to a licensed or authorized collector for proper disposal. Comply with the applicable standards and laws for VOC. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering hollow metal doors and frames that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co., Cincinnati, Ohio 2. Curries Co., Mason City, Iowa 3. Ceco Corp., Oakbrook, Illinois 2.02 MATERIALS: A. Steel requirements: doors and frames manufactured of commercial quality, stretcher leveled flatness, cold rolled steel per ASTM A366 and A568 general requirements. Galvanized doors and frames to A60 minimum coating weight. Stainless steel doors manufactured with Type 304, dull finish. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM A569. B. Coating Materials: 1. Primer: Factory-applied. Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting primer to ANSI A224.1. Wipe-Coat Galvanizing not acceptable C. Core Materials 1. Doors: non-toxic honeycomb or vertical steel stiffened internal reinforcing manufactured of hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel per ASTM A569. 2. Fire labeled doors with temperature rise rating: mineral fiber core, temperature rating per code. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 110 2.03 FABRICATION A. Doors 1. Classification: SDI. Furnish Grade III Model 2 for interior and exterior openings, and Grade I Model 2 and Grade III Model 3 where noted. GRADE MODEL GAUGE DESCRIPTION CYCLES I 2 18 Standard Duty, Seamless 250,000 III 2 16 Extra Heavy Duty, Seamless 1,000,000 III 3 18 Stile and Rail, Flush Panel 1,000,000 2. Hinge and lock stiles: (a) Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. (b) Exterior, seamless construction by tack welding and fill. (c) Interior, manufacturers standard interlocking and glued edge. 3. Top and bottom channels: (a) Not less than 16 gauge, flush or inverted. (b) Welded to the face sheets. (c) Exterior doors: flush steel top channel. 3. Astragals: flat security type or Z type per details. 4. Openings: Openings for lights, louvers and grilles shall be performed by the manufacturer with manufacturer’s details, and in compliance with testing agency requirements. B. Frames 1. Construction: (a) 14 gauge cold rolled steel at interior locations; 14 gauge galvanized at exterior locations. (b) 12 gauge, full width, face and head reinforcement for non-labeled openings over 48" in width. 2. Corner Construction: face weld, grind smooth and re-prime. 3. Provide temporary shipping spreaders to help protect frames from damage during transit and handling. Remove spreaders prior to setting frame. C. Frame Anchors METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 111 1. Attachment to Masonry Construction: (a) Galvanized (b) Adjustable, flat, corrugated or perforated T shaped with leg not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long, or wire type, not less than 3/16 inches in diameter. 2. Attachment to Drywall Construction: (a) Manufacturers standard compression type for Drywall type frame. (b) Steel or Wood Stud type to accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension on welded or standard knock-down type frame. 3. Provide one anchor for every 30 inches of jamb or fraction thereof. 4. Floor Anchor: angle clip type. (a) 16 Gauge. (b) Two fasteners per jamb. (c) Weld to bottom of each jamb. 5. Existing Masonry or Concrete (a) 3/8 inch countersunk flat head bolt and expansion shields. (b) Locate 6 inches from top and bottom and maximum 24 inches on center. (c) Weld pipe spacers or other type of spacers, per manufacturers standard design, in back of frame soffit. 6. Head Struts: per details. D. Preparation for Hardware 1. Reinforce per SDI 107. 2. Lock and Closer reinforcement: box type. 3. Door Hinge reinforcement: 7 gauge or equivalent, manufacturer's standard. 4. Punch strike jambs to receive three silencers; double leaf frames to receive manufacturer's standard preparation. 5. Hardware locations per "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". 6. Provide welded in place guards for all hardware cutouts in frame. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 00- 112 7. Electrical preps: provide welded-in-place boxes, special designed anchors, raceways and access panels as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SETTING FRAMES A. Set frames in accordance with these standards: 1. Squareness: +/- 0.0625" measured on a line from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Plumbness: +/- 0.0625" measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from the head to the floor. 3. Alignment: +/- 0.0625" measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the face. 4. Twist: +/- 0.0625" measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, perpendicular to the plane of the door rabbet. B. Set welded frames in place prior to construction of adjacent partition work. Properly brace frame until permanent anchors are set. C. Place wood or styrofoam blocking at surface-mounted hardware locations prior to setting frames scheduled to be filled with concrete or grout. D. Leave only hairline seam at corner joints. E. Install fire rated frames in accordance with their listings (CBC Section 713.4). 3.02 DOOR INSTALLATION A. Clearances: 1. 1/8 inch between door and frame at head and jambs. 2. 1/8 inch at meeting edges of pairs. 3. 1/8 inch at transom panels, without transom bar. 4. 3/4 inch above finish floor at sills without threshold. 5. 1/4 inch at sill with threshold. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealants, mortar, or glazing compounds from exposed surfaces. B. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Use shims as required. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 113 C. Fill dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Paint filler and bare metal with rust-resistant primer and finish paint to match adjacent surface. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 114 Section 087100 – Door Hardware PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door hardware B. Related Divisions: 1. Division 08 – metal doors and frames, interior aluminum frames, wood doors, integrated security systems, specialty doors, storefront and glazed curtainwall systems. C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere. 1. Windows. 2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks. 3. Signs, except where scheduled. 4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars. 5. Installation. 6. Rough hardware. 7. Conduit, junction boxes & wiring. 8. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed. 9. Sliding aluminum doors, except cylinders where detailed. 10. Access doors and panels, except cylinders where detailed. 11. Corner Guards. 12. Welded steel gates and supports. 1.2 REFERENCES: A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date. 1. American National Standards Institute a) ANSI 156.18 – Materials and Finishes. 2. BHMA – Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 3. 2016 California Building Code a) Chapter 11B – Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing 4. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute 5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association a) NFPA 80 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. b) NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies c) NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 6. UL – Underwriters Laboratories GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 115 a) UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. b) UL 305 – Panic Hardware 7. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code 8. Local applicable codes 9. SDI – Steel Door Institute 10. WI – Woodwork Institute 11. AWI – Architectural Woodwork Institute 12. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers B. Abbreviations 1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section 2. Finishes: see 2.7 of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per D. Only submittals printed one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18. 3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item. 4. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule. 6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7. Mounting locations for hardware. 8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. 9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number. 10. Catalog cuts. 11. Point-to-point wiring diagrams. 12. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware. B. Bid and submit manufacturer’s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued. C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from “Schedule of Finish Hardware” on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this section. D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from Architect for resolution. E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on request. F. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier’s final inspection report. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 116 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor. a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings. B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer. C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete. E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers’ instructions and code requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field). 1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner’s representative. B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers. C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect’s approval. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 117 B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information: 1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete. 2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops. 3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware. 4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the installer’s bits. 5. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at outswinging exteriors, and throughout where adhesive-mounted seals occur. 6. Manufacturers’ templates to door and frame fabricators. C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation. D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Part of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers’ written warranties. B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents to validate warranty information, required for Owner in making future warranty claims: C. Minimum warranties: 1. Locksets: Three years 2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock: Seven Years 3. Exit Devices: Three years mechanical One year electrical 4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical Two years electrical 5. Hinges: One year 6. Other Hardware Two years 1.8 COMMISSIONING: A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion: GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 118 1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation. 2. With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present, test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation. 3. With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release. 1.9 ARTICLE I. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule or approved equal: IVE H. B. Ives LCN LCN Closers SCH Schlage Lock Company ZER Zero International 2.2 HINGING METHODS: A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180- degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient. B. Conform to manufacturer’s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer’s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware. C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. 1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security studs. 2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions. 2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS: A. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled. 1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through-bolted. 2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 119 3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated steel, or stainless steel. 4. Latchbolt: solid steel. 5. Backset: 2.75 inches typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame, door or other hardware. 6. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2.00 inches clearance from lever mid-point to door face. 7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1.00 inch deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 8. Lock Series and Design: Schlage ND series, “Rhodes” design. 9. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 1. b) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4 feet x 8 feet. 10. Accessibility: Require not more than 5 lb to retract the latchbolt or deadbolt, or both, per CBC 2016 11B-404.2.7 and 11B-309.4 2.4 CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: [4040] 1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring. 1. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code. 2. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles. 3. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms. 4. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 5. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.9, local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds. Door closers shall be adjusted so that from the open position of 90 degrees, the time required to move the door to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum per 2016 California Building Code Section 11B-404.2.8.1. 6. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 7. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 8. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on request. 9. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request. 10. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 11. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 120 2.7 OTHER HARDWARE A. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type. 2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal. B. Seals: Four-fingered type at head & jambs. Inelastic, rigid back, not subject to stretching. Self-compensating for warp, thermal bow, door settling, and out-of- plumb. Adhesive warranted for life of installation. 1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval. 2. Three-fingered type at hinge jambs of doors fitted with continuous hinges where jamb leaf of hinge is fastened to the frame reveal. C. Sound-reducing adjustable seals: coordinate lockset backsets, rim exit device strikes, and parallel arm closers. Fabricate 7ga “Z”-brackets as bridging pieces to facilitate installation. Brackets: mild carbon steel, or stainless steel. D. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms plus head and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open when closer is disconnected. 1. Include automatic type door bottoms, as opposed to fixed sweeps, at stairs and elevator lobbies to allow fine-tuning of pressurization systems. E. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC 2016 11B-404.2.5. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material’s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval. 2. Saddle thresholds: 0.125 inches minimum thickness. 3. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. Zero International’s #226, National Guard Products’ “COMBO” or Pemko Manufacturing’s “FHSL”. 4. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and request direction from Architect. a) City of Los Angeles: regardless of critical radiant flux values of organic-material floor coverings, furnish metal, concrete, or stone thresholds at fire-rated openings. 5. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth. 6. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed, leave no air space between threshold and substrate. 7. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 121 8. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression. F. Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of proper blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers. Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper reinforcement to support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers. 1. Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays. G. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. Intent: door bears against silencers, seals make minimal contact with minimal compression – only enough to effect a seal. H. Key Control Software: Same manufacturer as key cylinders, supply to Owner. I. . 2.8 FINISH: A. Generally: BHMA 626 Satin Chromium 1. Areas using BHMA 626: furnish push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled. B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. 2.9 KEYING REQUIREMENTS: A. Key System: Schlage Primus high-security utility-patented keyway, interchangeable core throughoutKey blanks available only from factory-direct sources, not available from after-market keyblank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner and Allegion Security Technologies representatives to determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure, stamping, degree of physical security and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner’s written approval of the system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual requirements from the Owner. 1. New master key system. 2. Primus Level 9 3. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores. Remove at substantial completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in Owner’s presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates. 4. Temporary cylinders/cores remain supplier’s property. 5. Furnish 10 construction keys. 6. Furnish 2 construction control keys. 7. Key Cylinders: furnish 6-pin solid brass construction. B. Cylinders/cores: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are maintained. Locksets and cylinders same manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 122 C. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner. 1. For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand-master keys, 3 control keys. 2. For estimate: VKC stamping plus “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. D. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner at completion. E. Key Control software: Include one Sitemaster 200 key control system with new key system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: A. Can read and understand manufacturers’ templates, suppliers’ hardware schedule and printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers’ furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers’ representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of wall/frame condition. A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes. 1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material. 1. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per California Building Code, Section 1010.1.9.2 and 11B- 404.2.7. 2. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware. B. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action. 3. Provide wrap-around repair plates at doors where required to cover the original preparation and allow installation of new hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Architect. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 123 1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps. 2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws. 3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for Substitution with Architect. 4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools. B. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction. C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout. D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable degree of swing. E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. F. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse. 3.4. ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to Owner’s satisfaction. 2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure. a) Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom – do not force. Turn valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process from that point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns counterclockwise. 3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully- opened position in no more than 10 seconds. 4. Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section. B. Doors: 1. Wood doors: adjust to 0.125 inches clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles. 2. Steel doors: adjust to 0.063 inches minimum to 0.188 inches maximum clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles. 3. Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance (undercut) above threshold or finish floor material under door. C. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following: GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 124 1. Has re-adjusted hardware. 2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instructed Owner’s personnel. 3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed. 4. Has submitted written report identifying problems. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION: A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures. 3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING: A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation process. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments. B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by Architect’s door hardware consultant. SpeXtra: 407957 HW SET: 01 Door #: 001 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50PD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 429AA-S AA ZER 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER MOUNT HEAD SEAL BEFORE CLOSER. HW SET: 02 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 125 Door #: 002 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 3CB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50PD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS439 630 IVE 1 EA THRESHOLD 102A-NH-223 A ZER 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 126 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 092100 – Gypsum Board Systems PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install Gypsum Board Systems as follows: 1. Fire-resistant, water-resistant gypsum backing board attached to framing for all other gypsum board assemblies. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 22 16: Non-Structural Metal Framing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating complete suspension system including all connections, anchorage and trim features. 2. Submit 18" x 18" samples of the texture coat of gypsum board panels with all edges taped. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to compliance with applicable legal requirements comply with following: 1. Underwriters Laboratories for fire-rated materials and products classification. 2. NFPA for fire-rated assemblies. 3. ASTM C36, C840, C841, C1002 and C1047. 4. ASTM Standard E90 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, factory sealed packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and name of manufacturer. B. Materials shall be kept dry. Gypsum wallboard shall be neatly stacked flat; avoid sagging and damage to edges, ends and surfaces. C. Fire-rated materials shall have fire classifications numbers attached and legible. D. Use all means necessary to protect gypsum board systems before, during and after installation. In event of damage immediately make all necessary repairs or replacements as required at no additional cost to the City. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 127 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: 1. Type X (fire retardant) and water resistant, WR, 5/8" thick, 48" wide, up to 16'- 0" long with long edges tapered. Composition: Gypsum core with additives to enhance the fire resistance of the core; surfaced with water repellent paper on front, back, and long edges; and complying with ASTM C630, Type X. C. Metal Framing: 1. Metal Studs and Joists: Section 09 22 16: Non-Structural Metal Framing. E. Fastenings: 1. Screws: ASTM C1002 self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head drywall screws; No. 6 Type S or Type S-12, 1" long for metal framing (follow substrate manufacturer's recommendations). Screws shall be given a corrosion-resistant treatment. 2. Nails: 5d, 1-5/8" long, flat-headed, cement coated, and conforming to ASTM C514. F. Wire: Galvanized and annealed carbon steel wire: 1. Tie Wire: No. 16 SWG 2. Hanger Wire: No. 8 SWG, annealed and galvanized. G. Metal Trim: ASTM C1047, fabricated from minimum #26 gage galvanized, treated for adhesion of joint compound and paint, and with slotted, drilled or punched perforations in flanges. Trim units shall be of size and type to fit gypsum board construction and shall include corner beads, casings, edge trim and all other shapes indicated and required. H. Finishing Materials: 1. Reinforcing tape and joint compound as manufactured or recommended by cementitous backer unit or wallboard manufacturer. 2. Tile setting material shall be latex portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4. 3. Wallboard texture coat finish material shall be manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum, Hamilton, or Highland Stucco and Lime Products, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Metal Trim: 1. Provide corner beads at all outside corners and angles, metal casing where gypsum board terminates at uncased openings, metal edge trim where board edges abut horizontal and vertical surfaces of other construction. 2. Install trim in accordance with manufacturer's directions and secure to framing with proper fasteners through flange perforations. Apply trim in longest practical pieces. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 128 B. Gypsum Board, including Exterior Soffit Board: 1. Install gypsum board in conformance with ASTM C840. 2. Gypsum board shall be cut by scoring and breaking or by sawing, working from face side. Where board meets projecting surfaces it shall be scribed and neatly cut. Unless conditions require otherwise, board shall be applied first to ceilings, then to walls. All end joints shall occur over a support. Use panels of maximum practical length so that a minimum number of end joints occur. 3. End joints shall be staggered and joints on opposite sides of a partition shall be arranged to occur on different studs. Joint layout at openings shall be made so that no end joints will align with edges of openings. 4. Except where specified otherwise, fasteners shall be spaced not less than 3/8" from edges and ends of gypsum board. Do not stagger fasteners at adjoining edges and ends. 5. Install gypsum board vertically at all walls. Attach board with drywall screws or nails spaced not to exceed 8" on centers around perimeter of boards and 12" on centers on intermediate studs. Space screws or nails at 8" on centers along top and bottom runners. Screws shall be driven to provide screwhead penetration just below gypsum board surface without breaking surface paper. Where electrical outlet and switch boxes are indicated, provide adjustable attachment brackets between studs. 6. Install exterior soffit board to ceiling framing with long dimension at right angles to furring channels, or wood framing members, and attach with specified drywall screws or nails spaced 6" to 7" on centers across board. Screws or nails shall be not less than 1/2" from side joints and 3/8" from butt end joints. Abutting end joints shall occur over furring channels and end joints of boards shall be staggered. Support cutouts or openings in ceilings with furring channels. 7. Install access doors, furnished under another section, in correct location, plumb or level, flush with adjacent construction, and securely attached to framing. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Install exterior soffit board and gypsum board flat within 1/8" in 10'-0". 3.03 JOINT TREATMENT A. Exposed Surfaces (Exterior Soffit Board and Gypsum Board): All internal and external corners and angles and joints between panels shall be reinforced with perforated tape and joint compound and finished as follows: 1. Taping: Fill all corners and recesses between gypsum board panels with sufficient thickness of joint compound to completely hide board at all joints. Center tape on joint and press tightly to 2 panels using suitable tool. Lay excess compound squeezed from beneath tape smoothly on top of tape. 2. Second Coat: When first coat is dry, spread a second coat application of joint compound evenly over entire joint to beyond shoulder of recess or tape. 3. Third Coat: When second coat is dry, apply sufficient joint compound to even up all surfaces of joint. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 21 00 - 129 4. Screw Depressions: Apply at least 2 coats of joint compound to fill depressions even and flush with surface of panel. 5. At trim flanges apply joint compound in 3 coats, full thickness at bead nose and feather out at least 10". 6. Sanding: Between applications of compound, rough spots or areas shall be sanded smooth where necessary. When dry, finish coat shall be sanded as required to leave joints and screw spots flat, flush and smooth, and ready for painting or finishing. 3.04 TEXTURE COAT A. Spray apply texture coat to all interior gypsum board surfaces which are scheduled to receive a painted finish. B. Texture coat shall create a uniform splatter pattern finish with an 80% minimum coverage of surface. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 130 C. Interior surfaces of electrical boxes and wiring therein shall be protected from spray. 3.05 ALTERATIONS--ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Remove existing furring, suspension systems, and gypsum board where required for alterations and new mechanical or electrical work. B. For extending existing work, use materials and methods specified in this section for new work. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion, remove debris, surplus materials and tools of work from site. Leave installation clean and ready for finishing. 3.07 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Gypsum Board Systems” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which gypsum board is needed END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 131 Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Supply and install metal stud framing system, including top and bottom runners, studs, internal bracing, and blocking. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09 21 00: Gypsum Board Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittals: 1. Indicate by plan and elevation, stud framing, openings, bracing and blocking, and reinforcement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to compliance with applicable legal requirements comply with following: 1. ASTM C645 - Non-Loadbearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring Channels. 2. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board. 3. Gypsum Association (GA) 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing System Components: ASTM C645. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Erection: 1. Secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. Align to configuration required. 2. Install studs vertically at 16 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches from abutting construction, on each side of openings, and at corners. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 132 3. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. 4. Brace stud framing system and make rigid. 5. Coordinate erection of studs with installation of service utilities. Align stud web openings. 6. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical, and mechanical work to be placed in or behind stud framing. 7. Coordinate erection of stud system with requirements of door and window frame supports or attachments. 8. Stud splicing is not permissible. 9. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to non-load bearing studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. 10. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs. Secure steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of fixtures, partitions, wall cabinets, accessories, and hardware. B. Tolerances: 1. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/8 inch for 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 133 Section 096513 – Rubber Base PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient Wall Base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C). 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Johnsonite, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 134 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation. D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C). PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE Manufacturer: 1. Johnsonite, Inc. Phone (800) 899-8916 16910 Munn Road (440) 543-8916 Chagrin Falls, Ohio 44023 Tech: Ext 9297 Web: www.tarkettna.com Samples: Ext 9299 E-mail: info@johnsonite.com Fax: (440) 543-8920 2. Armstrong Flooring 3. Other A. TRADITIONAL WALL BASE i. Traditional Rubber Wall Base 1. Manufactured from a proprietary thermoplastic rubber formulation. 2. Meets performance requirements for ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TP, Group 1. 3. ASTM E 648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater, Class I. 4. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Class A, Smoke <450. 5. Flexibility: Does not crack, break, or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1 1/4" diameter cylinder when tested according to ASTM F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials protocols. 6. Color Stability: Meets or exceeds ASTM F 1861 requirements for color stability when tested to ASTM F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring protocols. 7. Phthalate-free. 8. Possible LEED contributions include MR:2, MR:4, MR:5, and EQ: 4.3. 9. Contains at least 14% pre consumer recycled content. 10. 100% Recyclable. 11. SCS FloorScore® Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350 · For Traditional Rubber Wall Base 1/8" thick o DC___ o Color: To be selected by Archtect o 4” · For Traditional Rubber Wall Base Preformed Corners 1/8" thick with 4" returns (Preformed Corners not available in 8" or 10" heights) o DC TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 135 o Color: To be selected by Architect o 4” ii. Traditional Vinyl Wall Base 1. Manufactured from a homogeneous composition of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 2. Meets performance requirements for ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base, Type TV, Group 1. 3. ASTM E 648, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts/cm2 or greater, Class I. 4. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials, Class B, Smoke <450. 5. Flexibility: Does not crack, break, or show any signs of fatigue when bent around a 1 1/4" diameter cylinder when tested according to ASTM F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials protocols. 6. Color Stability: Meets or exceeds ASTM F 1861 requirements for color stability when tested to ASTM F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring protocols. 7. Contains at least 14% pre consumer recycled content. 8. Phthalate free except for recycled materials. 9. 100% Recyclable. 10. SCS FloorScore® Certified and meets California Specifications Section 01350. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS a. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based formulation manufactured and warranted by a reputable manufacturer. b. Adhesives: as recommended to meet site conditions. i. Johnsonite 960 Cove Base Adhesive ii. Johnsonite 946 Premium Contact Bond Adhesive PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION a. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work. b. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. c. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION a. Prepare substrates according to written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient wall base. b. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 136 c. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. d. Vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION a. Comply with written instructions for installing resilient base. b. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. c. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. d. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. e. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. f. Preformed corners: Install preformed corners if available before installing straight pieces. g. Job-formed corners: i. Outside corners: Form by bending without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. ii. Inside corners: Butt one piece to corner then scribe next piece to fit. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION a. Comply with written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. b. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: i. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. ii. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. c. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 3.05 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Wall Base” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which wall base is needed. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 137 Section 096513.13 – Static Control Tile Flooring PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Pop-up: A pop-up is defined as any surface deviation or looseness of substrate that is equal to or greater than 1/64 (0.015625) inch above the concrete floor level, regardless of the size. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s published technical data describing materials, construction and recommended installation procedures. Submit technical data and installation instructions for each adhesive material. Submit list and Product Data of recommended finish materials. B. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s recommendations for maintenance, care and cleaning. C. Samples: Submit Samples of each type of static control flooring in each available color and pattern. Following color selections, submit 12-inch square Samples of each selected color and pattern. Submit pint cans of each type of adhesive. D. Installer's Experience Qualifications: Submit list of not less than 5 projects, extending over period of not less than 5 years, indicating installer’s experience record. Submit letter from manufacturer indicating manufacturer's approval for installer of the products 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in successfully installing the specified products or similar flooring materials. B. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: 1. All materials shall be ADA compliant. 2. ASTM F 1344, Rubber Tile – Class I, Type B 3. ASTM F 150, Electrical Resistance – 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 4. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux – Class I 5. ASTM E 662 (NFPA 258), Smoke Density – Passes 6. ASTM F 925, Resistance to Chemicals – Passes, List of chemicals available 7. ASTM D 2047, Slip Resistance - > 0.70; dry, flat using neolite sensors TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 138 8. ASTM F 970, Static Load – 250 PSI; Modified 1100 PSI 9. ASTM F 1515, Light Stability – Passes 10. ASTM E 595, Outgassing – Excellent 11. FMVSS 302, Title 49, Part 571, Flammability of Interior Materials – Passes 12. ASTM G 21, Fungi Resistance – Excellent Resistance 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be delivered to the Project site in original unopened manufacturer’s packaging clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name. Materials shall be stored between 65 degrees – 85 degrees F for not less than 48 hours before installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas that are to receive new flooring are ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas are within temperature range recommended by the various material manufactures for Project site installation conditions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide 10-year commercial warranty. B. Manufacturer shall provide 10-year wear warranty. C. Manufacturer shall provide 10-year conductivity warranty. D. Installer shall provide a 2-year labor warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Flexco Corporation, 1401 East 6th Street, Tuscumbia, AL, USA 35674. (256) 383- 7474; (800) 633-3151 2. Armstrong Flooring Inc., 2500 Columbia Avenue, Lancaster, PA 17604 3. Or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. ASTM F 1344, Class I, Type B Virgin rubber formulation with recycled rubber chips for SpexTones look designed to meet or exceed the above-mentioned standard specification for rubber tile. B. Crack Filler and Leveling Compound: elastomeric caulk type, such as Ardex Ardiseal Rapid Plus, Mapei P1SL or equivalent. C. Adhesives: Use manufacturer recommended adhesive. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 139 a. Smooth substrates, 1/32” x 1/16” x 1/32” U Notch; Coverage is approximately 150 – 175 Square Feet/gallon. b. Rough substrates, 1/16” x 1/16” x 1/16” Flat V; Coverage is approximately 125 – 150 Square Feet/gallon. c. VOC Information; i. Part A; 9 g/L ii. Part B; 20 g/L iii. Mixed; 14.3 g/L d. Green Label Plus Certification e. CHPS Compliant f. Leed Compliant g. Moisture Requirements; i. ASTM F 1869, Calcium Chloride: 5.0 Lbs ii. ASTM F 2170, Relative Humidity: 75% iii. pH: 9 or less PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with related Work to assure level, smooth, and clean finish surfaces to receive floor tile. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Field verify all dimensions and other conditions affecting the Work of this section before commencing the Work of this section. B. Before the Work of this section is started, examine surfaces to receive static control tile flooring and correct deficiencies before starting the Work of this section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Concrete Slabs: 1. All concrete must have a minimum comprehensive strength of 3500 PSI and be prepared in accordance with ASTM F 710. When flooring is being installed directly over concrete, concrete surfaces that have an ICRI Concrete Surface Profile (CSP) over 4 should be smoothed with a self- leveling underlayment (such as the Excelsior SU-310) or a cementitious patch (such as Excelsior CP-300) to prevent imperfections from telegraphing through flooring materials. On or below grade concrete must have a permanent, effective moisture vapor retarder installed below the slab. 2. New or existing concrete substrates on all grade levels must be tested in accordance with ASTM F2170, using in situ Probes, to quantitatively determine the amount of relative humidity no more than one week prior to the installation. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 140 3. In addition to ASTM F2170 Relative Humidity Testing, existing concrete that has previously had floor covering installed on all grade levels must be tested in accordance with ASTM F1869, using Calcium Chloride test kits, to quantitatively determine the Moisture Vapor Emissions Rate (MVER) of the concrete. 4. If ASTM F2170 or ASTM F1869 test results exceed the prescribed limits, a moisture mitigation product, such as Excelsior MM-100 Moisture Mitigation, must be installed prior to proceeding with installation. Do not install flooring until moisture testing has been conducted per the appropriate standard and/or moisture mitigation has been installed and is dry to the touch. Do not install flooring in below grade areas when hydrostatic pressure is visible or suspected. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF STATIC CONTROL TILE FLOORING A. Ensure substrate is suitably prepared prior to installation, as manufacturer is not responsible for substrates that have not been properly prepared and tested for moisture. Ensure adhesive is approved for use with flooring material and that proper trowel type and size is used, as manufacturer is not responsible for any and all adhesion issues related to improper adhesive selection or usage. B. Prior to installation, confirm material installation pattern and direction per design specifications or work order. Inspect all tiles before installing or during installation to verify that there are no visible defects, damages or excessive shading variations. Some flooring products, colors and textures have latent and acceptable color and shade variations. If there are concerns regarding shade or color variation, do not install material and consult a sales representative and manufacturer’s technical staff. C. Ensure the substrate is clean, dry, flat and sound prior to installation. Ensure the room is square using the 3-4-5 squaring rule or similar method to ensure acceptable installation. Dry-lay several pieces of material in order to determine ideal room layout. Cut borders and other specialty pieces to fit snugly against or around walls, thresholds, transition strips, fixtures and other protrusions or accessories. Ensure material around perimeter is 1/8” from wall or less, depending on depth of wall base or trim. Use a nail-down guide or equivalent along starting row to expedite wet-set installation. Apply adhesive according to instructions for specific product in use and observe adhesive flash times, if applicable. Ensure all adhesive working times are observed and followed. Be sure to follow instructions based on substrate porosity (porous or non-porous). Use chart below for reference. D. Install material into adhesive and observe directional arrows on back of tile to ensure arrows are installed in the same direction. Use a pyramid layout when installing tiles to eliminate run-off. E. When installing into adhesive using a wet-set method, avoid walking or working on material until adhesive has cured for light foot traffic. Working on material that is installed into wet adhesive could cause adhesive to displace. When working off of material is not possible, use a kneeling board or equivalent to disperse weight TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 141 evenly and prevent adhesive displacement. Pay close attention to working time to avoid adhesion issues. This may require installing material in smaller sections. Replace trowels at recommended intervals to maintain proper trowel ridge and spread rate. F. Periodically lift material to ensure proper adhesive transfer and ensure adhesive has not surpassed the open time – adhesive should cover 90% of tile. Roll material with a 3 section, 100 lb. roller within 15 minutes after installation of the tile section, crossing in a perpendicular direction after initial roll. Use a hand roller in areas that cannot be reached with larger roller. Do not wait until completing the entire installation before rolling as the adhesive may have surpassed the open time and cured. Roll and cross roll a second time approximately 30 minutes after the initial rolling. G. Visually inspect installation to ensure that material has not shifted and that adhesive has not been squeezed out of joints or compressed onto surface. Clean excessive adhesive or adhesive residue from the surface of the material per adhesive recommendations. Do not apply abrasive or solvent based cleaners directly to flooring material. H. Consult all associated technical data sheets, safety data sheets, maintenance documents, warranty information prior to installation. 3.05 COPPER STRAP INSTALLATION A. In order to properly dissipate static electricity, the flooring system must be grounded with a copper grounding strap. Prior to installation, consult project electrician or electrical engineer regarding the placement of copper straps in order to synchronize copper strip placement with electrical grounding system location. Copper grounding straps must be placed every 2000 sq. ft., and/or at least one per room. Prior to installing flooring materials, install copper straps directly into fresh adhesive and trowel adhesive over strap to fully embed strap in adhesive. Copper strap must be at least 18” in length, with at least 9” embedded into adhesive. The remaining copper material can be run up the wall for installation into electrical grounding system following flooring installation. B. All cracks, joints and voids must be bridged with a copper strap. Center copper strap over crack, joint or void and embed copper strap inside adhesive to anchor into place. Ensure copper strap will make contact with one tile on each side of the crack, joint and void, at least one strap per room. All electrical grounding systems should be connected and tested by a licensed and qualified electrician or electrical engineer. Ensure grounding strap installation is consistent with specifications and electrical grounding guidelines or diagrams. Install in accordance with manufacturer diagrams and details. 3.06 HEAT WELD INSTALLATION OF STATIC CONTROL TILE FLOORING A. Ensure that adhesive has cured for recommended period of time prior to beginning heat-welding. 1. ASD-800 Acrylic ESD: 24 Hours 2. USD-810 Urethane ESD: 24 Hours TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 142 B. Prior to cutting heat-welding groove, ensure gap between seams is free of adhesive, dust, dirt, debris and contaminates. When using electric grooving machine blade to cut groove depth at 66% of the total thickness of the tile (~1/16” deep for 2.5mm material). When using a hand grooving or electric grooving machine, test groove depth on scrap material to ensure proper depth is achieved. While grooving, ensure removal is split between each side of the roll, 50% per side. Hand-grooving may be required near walls, protrusion and other obstacles. Remove any and all loose pieces of flooring as well as any other debris from groove prior to welding. Using a hot air welding gun, insert the Flexco Vinyl Welding Rod through the 4mm welding tip and into the center of the routed groove or seam. Prior to welding, test weld on scrap material to ensure temperature settings and welding speeds are correct and achieve a successful bond. C. Do not allow foot traffic or trim welding bead until welding bead has completely cooled. To trim seam, use a clean, sharp quarter-moon spatula knife and a clean trim plate or a Crain Mozart trimmer. After one hour, trim seam again with a quarter moon spatula knife to create a smooth, level seam surface. If seam imperfections are observed, use a hot air gun to smooth out imperfections. 3.07 CLEANING A. Keep all flooring surfaces clean as installation progresses. B. Clean flooring when sufficiently seated and remove foreign substances. D. Clean adjacent surfaces of adhesive or other materials. Replace all damaged or defective Work. 3.08 CLEAN UP A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste material and legally dispose off the Project site. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion. 3.010 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Static Control Tile Flooring” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which static control flooring is needed. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 143 Section 099000 – Paints and Coatings PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, systems indicated herein. C. Paint Systems in Part 2 of this Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 00 – Metal Doors and Frames B. Section 09 21 00 – Gypsum Board Systems C. Section 32 17 00 – Pavement Markings and Bumpers 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 1998b. B. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 1997). C. NACE (IMP) - Industrial Maintenance Painting; NACE International; Edition date unknown. D. SSPC (PM1) - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 1, Good Painting Practice; Society for Protective Coatings; 1993, Third Edition. E. SSPC (PM2) - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications; Society for Protective Coatings; 1995, Seventh Edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products and special coatings. B. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 8-1/2 x 11 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 144 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. B. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Interior Paints: 1. Dunn Edwards. 2. Behr Premuim. 3. Or equal. B. Exterior Paints: 1. a. Ennis Traffic Safety Solutions. Inc. (Parking Lot Striping & Exterior Seating ISA) b. Ameron Amerloc 400 (Warning Striping) 2. PPG Industries. 3. Or equal. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. No paint or coating shall contain hazardous components. Submit material safety data sheets confirming lack of hazardous components. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS – EXTERIOR A. Plaster, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat flexible primer. 2. Flat: Two coats of acrylic. B. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Acrylic, 3 Coat: TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 145 1. One coat of metal primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. C. Concrete/Asphaltic Concrete, Pavement Marking Paint, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Two coats of MPI #32, alkyd traffic-marking paint. D. Galvanized Metals, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Concrete/Masonry, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of block filler. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. B. Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of acrylic primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. C. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. Touch-up with acrylic primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. D. Galvanized Metals, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel. E. Plaster, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. Pigmented Latex Sealer. 2. Flat: Two coats of acrylic. F. Gypsum Board (Low Sheen): 1. One coat flexible primer. 2. Acrylic Low Sheen Enamel: Two coats. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Acrylic filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Acrylic filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 146 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. Fill all bug holes and voids with filler/surfacer acceptable to paint manufacturer. B. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. C. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. D. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. E. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. F. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.05 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. B. Paint the surfaces as indicated in drawings. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 147 3.06 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Paint and Coatings” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be under other items of work for which painting/coating is needed. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 148 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 101400 - Signage PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Exit / Exit Route Signs. B. International Symbol of Accessibility. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. This scoping shall comply with the most stringent requirements of the most recent edition of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design (2010 Standards) and California Building Code (2016 CBC) Title 24 as well as Title 19. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings’ showing mounting heights, sizes of signs and lettering, colors, typestyles, construction details of signs and anchoring details. Show layout of each sign and indicate position of raised text in relationship to Braille and any other raised elements on sign, such as borders or frames. Indicate location of pictograms and symbols on tactile identification signs and geometric door signs by providing scaled shop drawings of each sign type. C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required. D. Submit samples of Braille and raised character signage. Identify proposed tactile letter spacing, font ratios (width to height and stroke to height), text contrast on background, and Braille inter-cell and between cell spacing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tactile Signs: Manufacturers shall have been regularly engaged manufacturing Braille and raised character identifying devices for minimum of 5 years. B. Non-tactile Signs: Manufacturers shall have been regularly engaged in manufacturing signs for minimum of 5 years. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Procedure: In accord with Division 1. 1. Sign Schedule: Submit a comprehensive sign schedule for all signs required at each door and all other sign locations. Schedules for interiors shall be identified with door schedule numbers. Schedules for exterior shall be identified to area as indicated on drawings. Include the following: a. Index of Sign Types. b. Headings. c. Door Number (where applicable). TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 149 d. Proposed Sign text. e. Quantity Required. f. Mounting Method. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings’ showing sizes of signs and lettering, colors, typestyles, construction details of signs and anchoring details. Show layout of each sign and indicate position of raised text in relationship to Braille and any other raised elements on sign, such as borders or frames. Indicate location of pictograms and symbols on tactile identification signs and geometric door signs by providing scaled shop drawings of each sign type. 3. Submit color and texture samples of all materials to be used for signs. 4. Submit samples of Braille and raised character signage. Identify proposed tactile letter spacing, font ratios (width to height and stroke to height), text contrast on background, and Braille inter-cell and between cell spacing. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect signs before, during and after installation. In event of damage, immediately make necessary repairs and replacements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. B. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: C. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 1. APCO Graphics, Inc. 2. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 3. Best Sign Systems, Best Manufacturing Co. 4. Emed, Co. 5. Grimco, Inc. 6. Mohawk Sign Systems. D. Non-glare (non-reflective) materials shall be used for all signs that identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use. E. Characters shall have a minimum of 70 percent contrast with their backgrounds on all signs that identify, direct to, or give information about facilities and their use. F. Pictograms and Symbols of Accessibility shall comply with the standards in ANSI A117.1-1998. (703.6 and/or 703.7) G. All signage shall conform to CCR, Title 24, California Building Code, Sections 11B-703. 2.02 MATERIALS TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 150 A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). 2.03 EXIT SIGNS A. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. Material: 1/8 inch thick Melamine Plastic, non-glare surface fire retardant, scratch resistant with background painted a contrasting color. 2. Color: As selected by City’s Representative from manufacturer's full range. 3. Tactile Characters: Characters and Contracted Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. 3. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. 2.07 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Interior Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 151 2. Anchor to wall using 4 tamperproof round head screws, one at each corner of sign. Use plastic anchors. 3. When concealed installation is specified, install backplate to wall as above. Anchor sign to backplate using very high bond double faced tape. 4. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl covered surfaces. 5. Signs Mounted on Glass: Anchor sign to glass using very high bond double faced tape. On opposite side of glass, anchor matching opaque backplate to glass using very high bond double faced tape to conceal mounting materials. C. Exterior Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Anchor to wall using 4 tamperproof round head screws, one at each corner of sign. Use plastic anchors. 2. When concealed installation is specified, install backplate to wall as above. Anchor sign to backplate using very high bond double faced tape. 3.02 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. See door schedule. 3.03 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Signage” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be included under other items of work for which signage is needed. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 152 Section 107000 – Tactile/Detectable Warning Surface Tiles PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes Specifications for furnishing and installing Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP)with an in-line truncated dome pattern, embedded in all curb ramps and walking surfaces at the locations and to the dimensions shown on the Drawings, in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the City Representative. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this Section. B. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Title 49 CFR Transportation, Part 37.9 Standards for Accessible Transportation Facilities, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 Detectable Warnings on Walking Surfaces. FHA Memo (5-06-02) titled Truncated Domes. Federal Register Volume 71, No. 209, 49 CFR Part 37 (10-30-06), ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities (11-29-06, DOT): Sections 406, 705, and 810. ADA Standards for Accessible Design –2010 (9/05/11, DOJ), ADAAG: Sections 705 and 810. Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian, 2016 CBC Section 11B-705. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Test Methods B117, C501, C1028, D543, D570, D638, D695, D790, G155, and E84. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature describing products, installation procedures and maintenance instructions 2. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit two (2) Tactile Warning Surface samples minimum 8” x 8” of the kind proposed for use. Samples shall be properly labeled and shall contain the following information: Name of Project, Submitted by, Date of Submittal, Manufacturer’s Name, and Catalog Number. 3. Shop Drawings: Submit Standard Manufacturer Shop Drawings showing all pertinent characteristics of the composite Cast In Place ReplaceableTactile Warning Surface Tile (REP), including profile, sound on cane contact amplification feature and installation methods. 4. Material Test Reports: Submit current test reports from qualified, accredited independent testing laboratory in accordance with ASTM guidelines and indicating that materials proposed for use are in compliance with specification requirements and meet the properties indicated. All test reports submitted shall be representative of the Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile Warning Surface Tile (REP) delivered to the Project. 5. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of manufacturer’s specified maintenance practices for each type of Tactile Warning Surface Tile and accessory. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide composite Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP) as produced by a single manufacturer with a minimum of five years experience in manufacturing Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP). TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 153 B. Installer’s Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer certified in writing by the Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer, who has successfully completed Tactile Warning Surface installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the Contract. C. Cast In Place ReplaceableTactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP) must be compliant with ADAAG, PROWAG, and CA Title 24 requirements. D. Cast In Place ReplaceableTactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP) shall meet or exceed the following test criteria using the most current test methods: 1. Compressive Strength: 28,900 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D695. 2. Flexural Strength: 29,300 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D790. 3. Water Absorption: Not to exceed 0.10%, when tested in accordance with ASTM-D570. 4. Slip Resistance: 1.05minimum wet and 1.18 dry static coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C1028. 5. Flame Spread: 25 maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 6. Salt and Spray Performance of Tactile Warning Surface: No deterioration or other defects after 200 hours of exposure, when tested in accordance with ASTM-B117. 7. Chemical Stain Resistance: No reaction to 1% hydrochloric acid, motor oil, calcium chloride, gum, soap solution, bleach, and antifreeze, when tested in accordance with ASTM D543. 8. Abrasion Resistance: 500 minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C501. 9. Accelerated Weathering of Tactile Warning Surface when tested by ASTM-G155 or ASTM G151 shall exhibit the following result: ∆E<5.0 at 2,000 hours minimum exposure. 10. a. At (REP): Tensile Strength: 11,000 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638. b. At (SA): Tensile Strength: 11,600 psi minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D638. 11. AASHTO-H20 Load Bearing Test: No Damage at 16,000# loading. 12. Freeze/Thaw/Heat: No deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1026. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Tactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP) shall be suitably packaged or crated to prevent damage in shipment or handling. Finished surfaces shall be protected by sturdy wrappings. B. Storage Facility. 1. Store REP Tiles in an area that is within an acceptable temperature range (40-90 degrees).In particular, protect sealants from freezing. 2. Maintain Storage Facility in a clean dry condition to prevent contamination or damage to REP & SA Tiles and incidentals. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. REP Tiles shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of five (5) years from date of Contract’s final completion. The guarantee includes manufacturing defects, breakage, and deformation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 154 A. Composition: REP Tiles shall be manufactured using a matte finish exterior grade homogeneous (uniform color throughout thickness of product) glass and carbon reinforced polyester based Sheet Molding Compound (SMC) composite material. Truncated domes must contain fiberglass reinforcement within the truncated dome for superior structural integrity and impact resistance. A matte finish will be required on the Tactile Warning Surface for superior slip resistance performance superior to that offered by a gloss finish. Use of Tactile Warning Surface Products employing coatings or featuring layers of material with differing composition, performance, or color properties is expressly prohibited under this Section. B. Color: Color shall be homogenous throughout The REP Tiles. 1. Federal Yellow – Federal Color No.33538. Detectable warning surface shall provide a 70 percent minimum visual contrast with adjacent surfaces in accordance with 2016 CBC Section 11B-705.1.1.3.2. C. Domes: Square grid pattern of raised truncated domes of 0.2” nominal height, base diameter of 0.9” and top diameter of 0.45”. Truncated dome spacing shall have a center-to-center (horizontally and vertically) spacing of 2.35”, measured between the most adjacent domes on square grid. D. Cleaning materials used on site shall have code acceptable low VOC solvent content and low flammability. E. The Specifications of the concrete, sealants and related materials shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents and the guidelines set by their respective manufacturers. F. Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile Warning Surface Tiles (REP) 1. Configuration: REP Tile sizes shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The REP Tiles shall feature a minimum of eight (8) embedded corrosion resistant1 ½” corrosion resistant concrete inserts with ½” x 1 ½” heavy duty steel bolts and washers. Bolts must be covered with a structural water tight cap. Bolts must be located BETWEEN the truncated domes (in the field) for maximum protection of the Bolt integrity. Bolts are NOT to be located in the truncated dome. a. The field area shall consist of a non-slip textured surface with a minimum static coefficient of friction of 0.80, wet and dry. b. At a minimum, REP Tile thickness shall measure¼” nominal exclusive of the perimeter Minimum 3/8” thick (nominal) by 1” wide flange. The body of the Tactile Warning Surface Tile must consist of a SOLID body for maximum strength and to eliminate the possibility of air entrapment and cracking. 2. Truncated Dome Surface of REP Tile shall be protected with factory installed plastic sheeting for cleanliness during the installation process. Basic Installation Guidelines shall be printed on the plastic sheeting in both English and Spanish for customer convenience. 3. Dimensions: REP Tiles shall be held within the following dimensions and tolerances: a. Length and Width: i. 2.35” Dome Spacing: 36”x per plan. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers, subject to compliance with these Specifications include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADA Solutions Inc. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 155 2. Armor Tile. 3. Or equal. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall provide all tools, equipment and services required for satisfactory installation per manufacturer’s instruction as Incidental Work. B. Equipment, which may be required include typical mason’s tools, a 2-foot long level with electronic slope Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile readout, (2) 25-pound weights, and a rubber mallet with a piece of wood for tamping down the Tactile Warning Unit(s). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Transmit submittals and deliverables required by this Section. B. Furnish products as indicated. C. At (REP) 1. During all concrete pouring and REP Tile Installation procedures, ensure adequate safety guidelines are in place and that they are in accordance with the applicable industry and government standards. 2. The physical characteristics of the concrete shall be consistent with the Contract Specifications while maintaining a slump range of 4 -7 to permit solid placement of the REP Tile. An overly wet mix will cause the REP Tile to float. Under these conditions suitable weights such as 2 concrete blocks or sandbags (25 pounds) shall be placed on each REP Tile. 3. The concrete shall be poured and finished, true and smooth to the required dimensions and slope prior to REP Tile placement. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Contractor will not be allowed to install Tactile Warning Surface Tiles until all submittals have been reviewed and approved by the City Representative. B. Tactile Tiles shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. C. Tactile Tiles shall be oriented such that the rows of in-line truncated domes are parallel with the direction of the walkway/curb ramp. When multiple REP Tiles regardless of size are used, the truncated domes shall be aligned between the tactile warning surface tiles and throughout the entire tactile warning surface installation. D. At (REP) 1. The REP Tiles shall be tamped or vibrated into the fresh concrete to ensure that there are no voids or air pockets, and the field level of the Tactile Warning Surface Tile is flush to the adjacent concrete surface or as the Drawings indicate to permit proper water drainage and eliminate tripping hazards between adjacent finishes. 2. On Continuous Runs: The Installer shall leave a 1/8” nominal gap between successive Tactile Warning Surface Tiles. As part of the concrete finishing operation, the Installer shall apply ¼” edge treatment around the perimeter of the Tactile Warning Surface Tiles Cast In Place Replaceable Tactile to facilitate future replacement of the Tactile Warning Surface Tile. A Urethane Sealant such as Sikaflex 1a or BASF NP1 shall be applied to the edge treatment for a watertight Tactile Warning Surface Tile installation. E. At (SA) TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 156 1. Cutting of SA Tiles may be required to accommodate specific site conditions. All possible attempts shall be made to minimize cutting of the SA Tiles. Minimum acceptable width of the cut SA Tile shall be 9”. 2. Environmental Conditions: Air and substrate temperatures must exceed 40 degrees for at least 8 daytime hours for a sound and proper installation. A “weed torch” may be used to boost the substrate temperature to expedite cure of adhesives and sealants. 3. Immediately prior to installing the SA Tiles, the concrete surfaces must be inspected to ensure that they are clean, dry, free of voids, curing compounds, projections, loose material, dust, oil, grease, sealers and determined to be structurally sound with a minimum four (4) day concrete cure period (unless otherwise directed by the SA Tile manufacturer) and that the surface is flat. As necessary, substrate may be mechanically cleaned with a diamond cup grinder or shot blaster to remove any dirt or foreign material although a broom or leaf blower is usually adequate for cleaning of the substrate. 4. Apply adhesive on the backside of the SA Tiles following the perimeter border and internal cross pattern established by SA Tile manufacturer. Sufficient adhesive must be placed on the prescribed areas to have full coverage across the 2 inch width of the adhesive locator. a. For certain applications, generally encountered in the retail environment, the Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer may direct that full coverage adhesive be applied so as to optimize the tactile warning surface Tile’s performance and load bearing capacity. 5. Set the SA Tile(s) true and square to the curb ramp areas as detailed in the Drawings. Allow 1/8” separation between successive SA Tiles for expansion/contraction. 6. Drill holes true and straight to a depth of 2” by ¼” using the recommended bit. As necessary, additional countersunk holes may be added to the SA Tile by using 5 point ½” (82 degree) countersunk to create the necessary holes. 7. Mechanically fasten SA Tile to the concrete substrate using a 32 oz. to 48 oz. hammer to set the composite sleeve anchors. Ensure that the fastener has been set to full depth, straight and true. Care should be taken when setting the fastener to avoid any advertent blows with the hammer to the SA Tile. 8. Following the installation of the SA Tile, the sealant system should be applied to the perimeter edge. Follow the Tactile Warning Surface manufacturer’s recommendations when applying the sealant in a cove type profile to blend and seal the SA Tile edge to the adjoining surfaces. 9. Do not allow foot traffic on installed SA Tile until the perimeter edge sealant has cured sufficiently to avoid tracking. If the SA Tile must be placed into immediate pedestrian service, apply baby powder to the sealant to minimize the possibility of tracking while the sealant cures. 10. A urethane Sealant such as Sikaflex 1a or BASF NP1 shall be applied to the edge treatment for a watertight Tactile Warning Surface Tile installation. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Protect Tactile Tiles against damage during construction period to comply with manufacturer’s Specifications. B. During and after the REP Tile installation and the concrete curing stage, it is imperative that there are no walking, leaning or external forces placed on the REP Tile to rock the REP Tile, causing a void between the underside of the REP Tile and the concrete substrate. C. Remove Protective Plastic Sheeting from REP Tile within 24 hours of installation of the REP Tile. Particularly under hot weather conditions (80 degrees or higher), plastic sheeting will adhere TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 157 strongly (resulting in difficult removal of same) to Tactile Warning Surface Tile when not removed quickly. D. As necessary, while the Project remains under construction, protect Tiles against damage from rolling loads following installation by covering with plywood or hardwood. E. If requested by the Project Manager, clean REP Tiles not more than four (4) days prior to date scheduled for inspection intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Clean REP Tile by method specified by Tactile Warning Surface Products Manufacturer. 3.04 PAYMENT A. Payment for work covered under this section of the Specifications will be at the lump sum price bid for “Base Bid Amount” and which shall constitute full compensation for labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work specified herein. Payment for work covered in this Section shall be released upon approval and acceptance of work by the City. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 158 DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) Section 230500 - Common Work Results for HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section supplements all Sections of this Division and shall apply to all phases of Work specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide for complete installation of mechanical systems for this Project. The Work required under this Division is not limited to the "mechanical" Drawings. Refer to site, architectural, structural, and electrical Drawings which may also designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of this Specification is to provide a complete and operating mechanical system which includes all documents which are a part of the Contract. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to all Sections in Division 00, REFERENCE, and Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others: 1. Where the Drawings indicate points of connections to piping which are to be furnished and installed by others, the final connection are deem as part of this contract. Locations shall be determined from the drawings and/or from the site conditions. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General Requirements. 1. All electrical Work performed under this Division shall be installed by competent craftsmen, skilled in the trade involved, and shall be installed in conformance with the National Electrical Code and applicable local codes. 2. Installation of all items shall be performed in strict accordance with all codes and regulations set forth by State, Local, and Federal authorities. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Codes and Ordinances. a. All Work shall meet the requirements of local codes, ordinances, and utility companies except adhere to the Contract Documents when more strict requirements are specified. b. Codes which govern mechanical Work in this Project are as follows: 1) American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 2) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 3) American Water Works Association (AWWA) 4) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 6) Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) 7) Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 159 8) Compressed Gas Association (CGA) 9) American Gas Association (AGA) 10) California Building Code (CBC), 2010 11) California State Fire Marshal Regulations 12) California Mechanical Code (CMC), 2010 13) California Plumbing Code (CPC), 2010 14) California Electrical Code (CEC), 2010 C. Source Quality Control: 1. Manufacturer's Tests. All materials shall, so far as possible, be subjected to standard tests by the manufacturer before shipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Requirements for all shop drawings are specified in Division 01 GENERAL, REQUIREMENTS and Division 01, PRODUCT AND SUBSTITUTIONS. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Maintenance Manuals. a. Furnish two sets of maintenance manuals, each containing items specified below. Furnish manuals to the Architect for review prior to giving them to the Owner during the time of the Contract and before final acceptance of the mechanical Work. b. Definitions Applicable to the Maintenance Manuals. 1. Literature. Any page (either whole or in part), sheet, drawing, or booklet describing the maintenance, operation, and parts of mechanical equipment, which is furnished either in the shipping carton, attached to the equipment, or otherwise prepared and distributed by the manufacturer for the user, not limited to papers submitted as shop drawings. 2. Mechanical Equipment. All major items shown in the Mechanical Division Drawings and Work for which shop drawings are requested except the following: thermometers, expansion tanks, air separating tanks, insulation materials, vibration isolation equipment, plumbing drains and fixture carriers, boiler stack, and Work in Section 233100, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS. 3. Instructions. An outline written by the Contractor with information necessary to help the Owner apply the maintenance manual and simplify verbal instructions. c. Collection of "Literature." Collect "literature" in like new condition, of all pieces of "mechanical equipment" until two copies of each are obtained. Copies soiled during construction will not be accepted. d. Assembly of "Literature." 1. Assemble "literature" in separate, multiples of two, 3-ring loose leaf binders, 2 inches (50 mm) size, with chrome-plated piano hinges and black hard coated covers. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 160 2. Small or large "literature" not easily inserted in binders shall each be put in heavy manila envelopes. 3. Furnish each binder with plastic enclosed tabs on reinforced paper neatly arranged. Type each of the following on a separate tab. 1. Instructions 2. Valve Charts 3. Accessories 4. Lubrication 5. Testing and Balancing Reports 6. Each Specification and Title in the Project Specification for which "Literature" has been collected. 4. File "instructions" envelopes and "literature" under correct tabs. Clearly identify each piece of "literature" and envelope with equipment name and numbers. e. Valve Charts. 1. Format. Arrange format of valve charts by rooms and sequence all valve numbers starting with mechanical equipment rooms and finishing with "occupied spaces." 2. Information. Furnish the following information typed on valve charts for each valve furnished throughout the Project in the Mechanical Division, except check valves and automatic valves. 1. Room numbers and name where valve is located, i.e. "ZG boiler room." 2. Valve number assigned by Contractor and stamped on brass plate, i.e. "l47." 3. Service medium using designation assigned to Drawings on mechanical symbols, i.e. "heating hot water supply" or "plumbing cold water." 4. Valve types as specified in Section 230523, GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING, i.e. ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVE or GATE VALVE. 5. Function valve serves, i.e. "strainer shut-off" or "balancing valve." 6. Zone identification, i.e. "AHU-2" or "auxiliary heating." 3. Insert Charts in Manuals. f. Lubrication Charts. Furnish a chart listing each lubricated piece of equipment, the proper type of oil or grease required, and recommended frequency of lubrication. Insert charts in manuals. g. Accessories. 1. Furnish the Owner with a complete equipment accessory schedule listing each piece of equipment and the related size, type, number required, and manufacturer of the following items. 1. Filters 2. Fan Belts 3. Refrigerant Dryers 2. Insert Schedules in Manuals. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 161 h. Insert 2 copies each of correct testing and balancing reports in manuals. 2. Instructions in Operation. i. After all tests and adjustments have been made and the maintenance manual has been completed and given to the Owner, furnish one or more full-time qualified personnel as necessary to put the mechanical Work in continuous operation for a period of not less than 4 days, during which time the designated personnel's only purpose shall be to give complete operating and maintenance instructions to the operating personnel selected by the Owner, and furnish all service necessary for the proper operation and protection of the mechanical Work. Fuel, power, and other supplies required during this period will be furnished by the Owner. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Existing Pipe Lines. a. If any existing water, gas, or other pipes and appurtenances are encountered which interfere with the proper installation of new Work and which will not be used in connection with new Work, or existing systems, close such pipe in a proper manner, and if necessary, move or remove the pipes as directed by the Architect. b. Where existing Work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with the Specifications. Materials used shall be same as existing unless otherwise specified. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: 1. Coordination of Work. a. Plan all Work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform the general Contractor of all openings required in the building construction for the installation of mechanical Work. Provisions shall be made for all special frames, openings, and pipe sleeves as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Electrical. 1. All motors, starters, or any other electrical components furnished or installed under the mechanical Division shall be in complete compliance with Division 26, ELECTRICAL. 2. Unless otherwise specified, all electric motors, provided under this Division shall be 60 hertz. All motors shall be single phase or 3-phase as indicated on the Drawings. Motor starters shall be as scheduled on the Drawings or specified herein. If motors appliances or apparatus are furnished varying in horsepower TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 162 and/or characteristics from those specified, accommodate the change at no additional cost to the Owner. a. All fan and pump motors (except smoke exhaust fans and two-speed motors) ( ) HP and larger shall be of the high efficiency type. Provide Reliance Electric "Duty Master," General Electric "Energy Saver," Westinghouse "Tee 11," U.S. Motors "XB," or Baldor "Super-E" motors. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiencies shall be certified in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 Test Method B, NEMA MG-1-12.53a and shall meet or exceed the following minimum criteria: GUARANTEED MINIMUM FULL LOAD EFFICIENCY Rated HP Nominal 1180 RPM Nominal 1770 RPM 5 86.5 86.5 7.5 86.5 88.5 10 88.5 88.5 15 88.5 90.2 20 89.5 90.2 25 91.7 90.2 30 90.2 91.7 40 91.7 91.7 50 91.7 93.0 60 91.7 93.0 75 93.0 93.0 100 93.0 93.6 3. Wiring Diagrams. Furnish a composite control and interlock wiring diagram of Work not in the mechanical Division but necessary to put equipment shown in the mechanical Division in operation as specified and shown. Submit wiring diagram for review as a shop drawing. B. Equipment Identification. 1. Provide for each motor driven piece of equipment and all two-speed starters an anodized aluminum identification label, manufactured by the Seton Name Plate Corp. Background color and wording shall be as selected by the Architect. C. Access to Equipment. 1. All motors, valves, control devices, equipment, specialties, etc. shall be located for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance. If items are concealed, provide access doors of size required for easy access to the items. Provide access doors of the types specified in Division 08, DOORS AND WINDOWS. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 163 D. List of Materials and Equipment 1. All items of material and equipment required by this section shall bear the approval of the Architect prior to the start of any work. The Contractor shall submit all items requiring such approval, allowing ample time for checking and processing, and shall assume all responsibility for delays incurred due to rejected items. Neatly bind together submittal information covering all items into one or several packages; separate submittal of individual items not allowed. The procedure for submitting material shall be as specified in Divisions 00 and 01. Within thirty (30) days after award of Contract, submit for approval, product information with at least the following minimum data for all materials, appurtenances, and equipment required under this section, including where applicable: a. Job name. b. Job location. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 164 c. Governing specification paragraph or subparagraphs, and governing drawing number. d. Dimensional information. e. Performance ratings, including at least the following, where applicable: 1. Capacity in Btu per Hour. 2. Water quantity. 3. Entering and leaving water temperatures. 4. Water pressure drop. 5. Fouling factor. f. Pump size, RPM. g. Design working pressures. h. Motor horsepower and/or current rating; equipment current rating; voltage characteristics. i. Wiring diagrams for all equipment and control systems under this section requiring electrical connections. j. Cuts of all equipment, controls, thermometers, gauges and temperature indicators. E. Substitutions and equal products 1. For substitution procedures follow the requirements of Division 00 and Division 01. 2. Named Manufacturers a. All design has been done with the first named equipment in each specification section of this Division. b. The first named manufacturer is the standard of quality, performance, space requirements, and coordination with other Divisions on the project. c. Any names beyond the first named is an acceptable manufacturer. However, being listed as an acceptable manufacturer does not imply that the manufacturer has a product that meets or exceeds the project requirements. Contractor shall verify if these manufacturers provide items that meet or exceed the specifications. d. All submittals of any manufacturer beyond the first named manufacturer shall be considered substitutions, shall be made in the form of substitutions, and will be reviewed as substitutions. e. If an item is provided from a manufacturer that is not the first named, or a model number that is different from the Contract Documents, it is the Contractor=s responsibility to determine that the item can be installed in the available location. 1. Any redesign and change in installation methodology, and connections involved shall be the Contractor=s responsibility, including coordination with all other trades. 2. All costs for the changes of all trades involved shall be borne by the Contractor. 3. Contractor shall pay for any redesign required. 4. Contractor shall pay for and obtain any additional plan checks as a result of the substitution. 5. Contractor shall provide dimensioned drawings of the revised installation with the submittal of the item. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 165 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. Installation: 1. General. f. Cooperate with all other Contractors in furnishing material and information for correct location, in proper sequence, of all sleeves, bucks, inserts, foundations, wiring, etc. g. All piping connections to equipment shall be made with unions or flanges to permit dismantling. Flanges and unions shall also be installed in the piping systems to permit disassembly consistent with good installation practice and as required for removal of connected equipment from place of installation. 2. All belt drives, flexible couplings, and other exposed rotating or reciprocating parts shall be covered with OSHA approved safety covers. Covers shall be permanent type and easily removable. 3. All motors and bearings shall be covered with watertight and dust-proof covers during construction period. 4. Sleeves, frames, and wall pipes shall be furnished and installed for all pipes and ducts, passing through concrete floors and walls and shall be coordinated with other trades. Special sleeves through floors and walls shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions and as detailed. h. All sleeves and frames through exterior floors and walls above ground and all interior floors and walls shall be black iron pipe unless otherwise noted. Sleeves and frames shall be of a size to accommodate the pipe or duct and insulation. Sleeves and frames shall be grouted in place with installation left smooth and finished to match surrounding surfaces. i. Pipes passing through exterior floors and walls below ground, 3 inch (75 mm) and larger, shall utilize cast iron wall pipes unless noted or detailed otherwise. The wall pipe shall be used to convey the liquid or gas through the floor or wall without the use of sleeves. Wall pipes shall be furnished complete with end connections and adapters required to connect to the piping material. Size of wall pipe shall equal or exceed the maximum pipe size connected thereto. Wall pipes shall be integrally cast into floor or wall construction and provide the best possible seal at the exterior exposure. Wall pipes shall be manufactured by Clow. j. Pipes passing through exterior floors and walls below ground, 2-1/2 inch (63 mm) and smaller, shall utilize black iron pipe sleeves as specified for aboveground in conjunction with a modular mechanical type seal as hereinafter specified. 1. The modular mechanical type seal shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall sleeve. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. Tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand providing a watertight seal between the pipe and wall sleeve. 2. The required inside diameter of the sleeve and the installation of the seal shall be coordinated with the seal manufacturer to provide a TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 166 watertight joint. Seals shall be "Link Seal" manufactured by Thunderline Corporation. A seal consisting of a combination of a sleeve and a pressure clamping system manufactured by O. Z. Manufacturing is acceptable. k. Cutting of openings and installation of sleeves and frames through exterior floors and walls above grade, and interior floors and walls shall be done in a neat, workmanlike manner. Openings shall be cut only as large as required for the installation. 1. At fire-rated floor and wall penetrations, provide penetration sealant as specified in Division 07, THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION. l. Sleeves and frames at floors and walls in concealed locations and in unfinished spaces such as mechanical rooms, etc. shall extend 1 inch (25 mm) from the finished surface. All other sleeves at floors shall extend 1/4 inch (6 mm) from finished floor surface, but shall allow placement of escutcheons. All other sleeves at walls shall be installed flush with finished surface. m. Escutcheons for exposed pipe through floors and walls where exposed to view shall be provided and shall be chromium plated except where special escutcheons are required under plumbing fixtures. Escutcheons shall be sized sufficiently to conceal the floor or wall opening and sleeve. 5. Interference. n. Wherever piping runs on ceilings, arrange the run of the piping in such a manner that it does not interfere with grilles, light outlets or light fixtures. 6. Valves. o. Valves shall be provided on all piping wherever shown or specified using adapters where required. All removable or replaceable equipment shall be valved. All valves shall have a securely fastened stamped brass metal plate each bearing a different number identified in the maintenance manual. 7. Openings in Pipes. p. All openings in pipes shall be kept closed during the progress of the Work. 8. Lubrication. q. Provide all lubrication for the operation of all equipment until substantial completion of the Project. Run in all bearings, and after they are run in, drain and flush bearings and refill with a new oil change. Refer to maintenance manual specification for lubrication chart. 9. Freeze Protection. r. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor during the warranty period to perform, in cooperation with the Owner's personnel, all operations necessary to protect the cooling system for winter protection, including but not limited to, draining water coils and cooling tower. 3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Safety Devices. Thoroughly check all safety devices to assure proper operation and protection. B. Service. 1. Perform service on all mechanical Work until the date of substantial completion including oiling and greasing, adjustments, cleaning, packing of seals, and other TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 167 items as recommended by equipment manufacturer in the maintenance manual hereinbefore specified. 2. Air filters. s. Do not operate air moving equipment having air filters unless temporary filters are in place to protect the mechanical Work. t. Clean or replace these temporary filters before final test and balance Work is begun as necessary for accurate readings. After completing the testing and balancing Work, replace temporary filters with new filter media as specified. 3. Strainers. u. Remove, clean and reinstall each strainer screen as specified below after systems have been flushed as specified in other sections of Division 23. 1. Clean each strainer after all adjustments have been made and system has operated a minimum of 24 hours, but before final test and balancing operation is started. 2. Clean each strainer again, after final test and balancing operation and before substantial completion of the Project. v. Certain screens may remain out of the strainer body after removal during the final cleaning only as directed by the Architect. 4. Purge all air from water systems after each servicing. w. Protect all furnishings and finishes during each servicing operation, and repair or replace to original condition, those damaged as a result of servicing. 5. Replace insulation removed or damaged after each operation. Leave insulation as specified in Section 230700, HVAC INSULATION. 6. Contractor may coordinate servicing operations with Owner's operating personnel so as to coincide with time interval specified for instruction in operation. 7. Put system in full operating condition before substantial completion of the Project. C. Alarms. Test and adjust alarms for satisfactory operation. D. Tests and Adjustments. Upon completion of the installation and before substantial completion of the Project, the Contractor shall make all necessary tests and adjustments to place the system in a working condition. Systems shall be balanced as specified in Section 230593, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC. The general operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 12 hours after completion of final testing and balancing, and shall demonstrate that the entire equipment is functioning in accordance with the Specifications. Furnish all instruments, test equipment, and competent personnel that are required for the tests. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 168 Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment PART 1 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping supports complete. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to Sections in Division 00, REFERENCE and Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTs, and HVAC General 230500. 2. Refer to Piping 232113, Insulation 230700, Identification 230553, Split System Equipment 238126. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All hangers, supports, anchors, inserts and guides shall be in accordance with the American Standard Code for Pressure Piping ANSI B-31. B. Dielectric Protection. Furnish acceptable protection or copper plated hangers between ferrous and nonferrous metal pipe and hangers on all piping. C. Supplementary Framing 1. Where piping or equipment is to be supported and no structural support member is available to fasten to, the Contractor shall provide supplementary structural framing to accommodate supports. All supplementary framing shall be approved by the Architect before installation. Contractor shall provide information to the primary structural framing. D. Pipe Sleeves 1. Floors a. Concrete over metal decking: AHilti Corporation@ CP-600 series or pro set systems. 2. Walls, Interior: b. For pipe penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, partitions, etc., provide fire stop devices and packing in compliance with the requirements of the DSA Fire Marshal. These devices and packing shall comply with the UL AFire Resistance Directory@ for AThrough Penetration Fire Stop Systems (XHEZ),@ systems no WL1001, WL1002, WL1003, WL5002, WL5039, CAJ1001, CAJ7001, FA1010, or other UL systems approved by the DSA Fire Marshal, as applicable. c. Non-Fire Rated: Adjus-To-Crete@ No. 100 for exposed locations and No. 11 for concealed locations. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 169 3. Walls, Exterior: d. Concrete: ALinked Seal@ Model WS wall sleeve with model FD or FS seals, as application, or Flexicraft APipe Seal.@ e. Concrete with waterproof membrane: J.R. Smith #1720 wall sleeve with flashing flange and clamo, underdeck clamp, and ALink Seal@ model FD or FS seal, as applicable or Flexicraft A Pipe Seal.@ 4. Foundations f. Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe below wall footings. E. Escutcheons 1. For copper tube: Pasco, prime coated or chrome plated. 2. For steel or cast iron: Pasco, prime coated or chrome plated. 3. At plumbing fixtures: Polished chrome plated brass polished stainless steel as specified with fixtures. F. Pipe Isolation 1. Horizontal Pipe: g. Bare Pipe: Stonman Series 100 or 500 (as applicable) ATrisolator@ Laminate strip is not acceptable. 2. Vertical Pipe h. 2" x 2" Mason Industries Type WMW isolation pad between riser clamp arms and structure. i. For intermediate interval supports, Anvil International Figure 103 or equivalent, with bare pipe insulator. 3. Branch Pipe Within Partitions: j. All branch water, gas and vacuum pipe, Superstrut A Cush-A-Clamp@ #A716 with B-1400 framing channels. G. Seismic Restraints 1. Seismic restraints may be Apre-approved@ type equivalent to international seismic application technology (ISAT) or Mason Industries seismic bracing or as designed by a structural engineer. All calculations required by State of California agencies having jurisdiction shall be submitted by the Contractor. All cost borne by the Contractor. 2. Seismic restraints shall be designed to prevent vibration transmission from the item to be restrained into the structure. H. Fire Resistant Packing (in pipe sleeves or holes) 1. 3M Brand AFire Barrier Caulk CP 25N/S or CP 25S/L@ as applicable, subject to approval by governing authorities. 2.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. Provide hangers to support the required loads. Where necessary, supports shall be designed to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Where Drawings show details of supports and anchors, conform to details shown. Where details are not shown, conform to requirements of this Section. B. Support piping with hangers in direct contact with the pipe for insulated piping not requiring a vapor barrier except on pipes where pipe saddles are specified. Size TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 170 hangers to fit on the outside of insulation requiring a vapor barrier and on pipes having pipe saddles. C. Hang pipe from substantial building structure. Piping shall not be hung from other piping. All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. Do not suspend pipe from metal roof deck. D. "C" clamps shall not be used to support piping. E. Where non-insulated pipes, in which vibration may occur, pass through walls, floors, partitions, encase pipe within acoustical wall sleeves. 2.3 HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. General. Threaded rod sizes and support spacing shall be in accordance with applicable codes. In case of difference between the applicable codes and the threaded rod and spacing schedule below, use the more stringent of the two requirements (larger rod size, shorter spacing). If the applicable codes do not provide this information, Contractor shall follow guidelines provided in Seismic Restraint Manual Guideline for Mechanical Systems by SMACNA, latest edition including all addenda. B. Support horizontal piping on threaded hot rolled steel rod. Threaded rod shall not be reduced to sizes smaller than provided for in support thread sizes. C. Copper Tubing. Maximum Spacing Between Single Pipe Supports Nominal Tubing Size, Inches 2 : Maximum Span, Feet 5 6 Maximum Span, Metres 1.5 1.8 Furnish minimum rod size as specified for steel pipe. D. The spacing specified herein is included to limit deflection in the pipe to an acceptable minimum. Shorten intervals as necessary so the support manufacturer's maximum recommended safe load values in accordance with ANSI B 31 are not exceeded. E. Supporting rods over 18 inches (460 mm) long shall be braced at every fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to the structure. 2.4 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORT TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 171 A. Support vertical piping with wrought steel riser clamps. Make adequate provision for expansion, contraction, and lateral stability. B. Support steel pipe at a minimum of every other floor as required to relieve joint stresses. C. Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below, support clamp-end extension from inserts. 2.5 ATTACHMENTS TO BUILDING STRUCTURE A. Metal Deck with Concrete Slab: 1. Holes through metal deck for steel deck insert shall be drilled per manufacturer=s recommendations. 2. Punched holes through metal deck will not be permitted. 3. Contractor to take all necessary precautions to assure that inserts are vertical when concrete is poured. 2.6 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipe sleeves shall be provided for all pipes passing through walls, floors, foundations, partitions, and ceiling, except for framed openings and core drilled holes. For concrete construction, set sleeves in forms before concrete is poured. B. Size sleeve to provide 1" maximum clearance between pipe and sleeve. Sleeve shall be sized to pass pipe with insulation applied. C. Sleeves or holes through fire rated floors, walls, etc. shall have the annular spacing between sleeve and pipe packed with resilient packing approved by the Fire Marshal, to meet the fire rating of the separation. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide escutcheons at all exposed pipes passing through walls, floors ceilings and partitions. Escutcheon shall fit outside of pipe insulation. 2.8 PIPE ISOLATION A. Piping shall not contact structure at any time: B. Makeshift methods of supporting pipe within partitions are not acceptable. This includes wrapping of pipe with felt or other material and wiring to strips of metal or other material. C. Other methods of support and isolation equivalent to the specified item and proven to be accepted by the local authorities having jurisdiction and the State Fire Marshall. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 172 2.9 SUPPORT SHIELDS FOR INSULTED PIPING AND TUBING A. Provide a support shield at each hanger and support for all insulated pipe and tubing. Pro-Shield inserts for insulated piping/tubing. 2.10 WORK OF OTHER TRADES A. The work of section 230500 shall not be supported from supports or hangers provided for the work of other trades. B. The work of trades other than that covered under section 230500 shall both be supported from supports or hangers provided for work specified under section 230500. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 173 Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the installing of nameplates, tags, stencils, pipe markers, ceiling tacks, labels and lockout devices. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 2. Refer to Section 230500 and all sections in Division 00 and Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 3. Hangers and Supports Section 230529, Insulation 230700, Piping 232113, Split System Equipment 238126. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Shop Drawing, Product Data and Samples: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Samples: Submit two tags, pipe markers, and name plates, size used on project. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Closeout Procedure: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 174 B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS for refrigerant liquid, suction, discharge; and condensate drain and pumped. 2.1 NAMEPLATES and nameplates for equipment. A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Seton Identification Products. 3. Kolbi. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product and Substitutions. B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.2 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton Identification Products. c. Kolbi. d. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product and Substitutions. 2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter. B. Metal Tags: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton Identification Products. c. Kolbi. d. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product Requirements. 2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter with finished edges. C. Information Tags: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton Identification Products. c. Kolbi. d. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product and Substitutions. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 175 2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3- 1/4 x 5-5/8 inches (83 x 143 mm) with grommet and self-locking nylon ties. D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame. 2.3 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton Identification Products. c. Kolbi. d. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product and Substitutions. 2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener. C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Brady. b. Seton Identification Products. c. Kolbi. d. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01 - Product and Substitutions. 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive for identification materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings. B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. C. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location. D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 176 F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. H. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags. I. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic. J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Piping Identification. 1. Pipe coding shall consist of pipe markers, upon coded color bands on long straight runs. Apply the marker at 20 foot (6 m) intervals. On short runs and complicated piping, apply as often as necessary for proper identification but not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) apart. Coding shall be applied to all piping in mechanical rooms, accessible chases and other accessible areas. They need not be coded in spaces that are not accessible. 2. Pipe marker legend shall be placed on the bottom half of the pipe, facing about 30 degrees downward toward either side. Where the view from this angle on the floor is obscured by other pipe or objects, place the marker in the most visible position. All lettering shall be with black paint. 3. Size of Marker for Various Pipe Sizes. OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF PIPE OR COVERING HEIGHT OF MARKER LETTER IN INCHES 3/4 (20 mm) to 2 inches (50 mm) incl. 1/2 inch (l3 mm) 4. Pipe Coding Schedule. a. Air Conditioning. See table 23 05 53-4 PIPING MARKER LEGEND AIR CONDITIONING Refrigeration Suction RS Refrigeration Liquid RL TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 177 Refrigeration Discharge RD CD PCD END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 178 Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Procure the services of an independent air balance and testing agency, which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment and air distribution systems, water systems and steam systems as herein specified. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to Section 230500 and all sections in Division 00, CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS and Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 238126 Split System Equipment. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: 1. Qualifications. a. Total System Balance shall be performed by an independent, non- affiliated agency certified by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) which specializes in and whose business is dedicated to testing, adjusting and verification of the HVAC system performance. The submittal of unbiased reports shall be timely upon completion of work. This work shall conform to AABC specifications referred to in Chapters 17 through 26 of the AABC National Standard and other criteria as set forth in this specification. b. The independent air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and scope and shall comply with all standards as set forth by, and be a member of the AABC. 2. Personnel c. All Work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating Engineer (TBE) employed by them. All instruments used by this agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect, Owner, or their representative. d. AABC Certified Technicians shall perform all work. Submit copies of certification for all technicians. B. Reference Standards: 1. Comply with applicable procedures and standard of ANational Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total System Balance@ by the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC). TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 179 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. First: 1. Submit 3 copies of documentation to confirm compliance with quality assurance provisions: e. Organization, supervisor and personnel training, and qualifications. f. Specimen copy of each of the report forms proposed for use. B. Second: At least 60 days prior to starting field Work, submit 3 copies of: 1. A set of report forms filled out as to the design flow values and the installed equipment pressure drops, and the required CFM for air terminals. 2. A complete list of instruments proposed to be used, organized in appropriate categories, with data sheets for each. Show: g. Manufacturer and model number. h. Description and use when needed to further identify the instrument. i. Size or capacity range. j. Latest calibration date. 3. Architect will review submittals for compliance with Contract documents, and will return one set marked to indicate: k. Discrepancies noted between data shown and Contract documents. l. Additional, or more accurate, instruments required. m. Requests for re-calibration of specific instruments. C. Third: The Testing Agency shall perform the tests hereinafter described, compile the test data, and submit 7 copies of the complete test data to the Contractor for forwarding to the Architect, for review. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing, verify that required AJob Conditions@ are met: 1. Systems installation is complete and in full operation. 2. Outside conditions are within a reasonable range relative to design conditions. 3. Lights are turned Aon@ when lighting is included in the cooling load. 4. Special equipment such as computers, laboratory equipment, and electronic equipment are in full operation. B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate services with the Work of the various trades to ensure rapid completion of the services. 2. Promptly report to Contractor and Architect any deficiencies noted during performance of services to allow immediate corrective action. 1.5 GUARANTEE TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 180 A. Testing Agency shall include an extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of test and balance Work, during which time the Architect at his discretion may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, return/exhaust fan or pump as listed in test report. The Testing Agency shall provide technicians to assist the Architect in making any tests he may require during this period of time. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 INSPECTION A. Ongoing Inspection. The Test and Balance Agency shall visit the job site on a monthly basis during the early stages of fabrication to inspect duct Installation. A report shall be submitted to the Architect listing any deficiencies found and making recommendations for work to be performed or devices to be added to allow for proper balancing. B. Preparation of Water Systems for Balancing: 1. The Testing Agency shall prepare the water systems for balancing in the following manner after completion of the air balance described hereinbefore. n. Open all valves to full open position. Set mixing valve to full system flow. o. Examine water in system and determine if waster has been treated and cleaned. p. Have Contractor remove and clean all strainers. q. Check pump rotation – verify pressure available at building. r. Check expansion tanks to determine they are not air bound and the system is completely full of water with no air pockets blocking water flow. s. Set all temperature controls so all cooling coils are calling for full cooling. Use same procedure when balancing heating coils. Set on full heating. t. Check operation of all automatic valves. u. Check and set operating temperature of chilled and hot water to design requirements. 1.2 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. Total System Balance 1. Each piece of equipment and the entire system shall be adjusted to insure proper function of all controls, proper distribution of air, maintenance or temperatures, elimination of drafts and vibration and left in first class operating condition. 2. The air system shall be adjusted to obtain the air volumes specified in the Contract Documents, but readjusted if required to obtain design temperature in each room. The Contractor shall make drive changes, install additional dampers, vanes, grille baffles, etc., as may be required on the job. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 181 3. Wherever the use of multi-louvers (in supply, exhaust, or return air grilles) creates objectionable noise, two (2) inch thick, six (6) lb. fiberglass board shall be installed in the grille opening, slotted for the proper air quantity. This shall be accomplished by the Contractor. 4. Balance the supply and return air systems (with the chillers operating) by first arriving at the fan total air quantity, reading air velocities at cooling coils at the specified leaving air temperature, return air and outside air openings; and a duct traverse. The fan RPM shall be adjusted for the specified air quantities allowing for the maximum of 1% for duct leakage. The quantity of air to each outlet shall not be less than that shown on the drawings and not greater than 10% of that amount. If so instructed by the mechanical engineer, further balancing of temperatures shall be made and indicated by a thermometer or by temperature recorder. 5. Perform Pitot Tube Traverse of all supply, return and exhaust systems. v. Except as specifically indicated herein, Pitot Tube Traverse shall be taken in branch ducts to assure specified flow to all zones. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traversing and testing techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. w. Pitot Tube Traverse may be omitted: 1. Where the duct serves only a single room or the space and its design volume is less than 2000 CFM. 2. Where duct=s design velocity and air quantity may be determined by measurements of terminals served. x. Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from the elbows, bends, take-offs and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements. B. Testing Procedure for Air Systems. 1. The Testing Agency shall perform the following tests, and balance system in accordance with the following requirements. y. Check and adjust (fan rpm) (inlet guide vanes) (fan outlet damper) (maximum motor operating speed) to design requirements and record fan motor amperes. z. Test and record fan motor amperes at design rpm. aa. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts and (adjust) (inlet guide vane dampers) (fan discharge damper) (maximum motor operating speed) (fan rpm) to obtain design cfm (cubic metres per second.) bb. Test, adjust and record system static pressures, suction and discharge ducts. cc. Test and adjust system for design re-circulated air, cfm (cubic metres per second.) dd. Test and adjust system for design cfm (cubic metres per second) outside air (minimum and maximum). ee. Test and record entering air temperatures. (D.B. Heating and Cooling.) ff. Test and record entering air temperatures. (W.B. Cooling.) gg. Test and record leaving air temperatures. (D.B. Heating and Cooling). TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 182 hh. Test and record leaving air temperatures. (W.B. Cooling.) ii. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design cfm (cubic metres per second.) jj. Adjust all zones to proper design cfm (cubic metres per second), supply and return. kk. Test and adjust each diffuser, and register to within -5 (five) percent and +10 (ten) percent of design requirements. ll. Each diffuser, and register shall be identified as to location and area. mm. Size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, registers, and all tested equipment shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer’s ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations. nn. Readings and tests of diffusers and registers shall include required fpm (metres per second) velocity and test resultant velocity, required cfm (cubic metres per second) and test resultant cfm (cubic metres per second) after adjustments. oo. In cooperation with the temperature control manufacturer’s representative, the setting adjustments of automatically operated dampers shall be set to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. The air balance and testing agency shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. pp. All diffusers and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas. qq. Verify leakage tests of all high velocity ductwork in accordance with paragraph titled, ALeakage Test@ in Section 233100, HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS. rr. All fans that are connected to headers only for future use shall be set to deliver the design cfm (cubic meters per second) at the design conditions as shown in the schedule. ss. All fans shall be tested and adjusted to meet the design requirements and final ampere readings shall be taken. tt. As a part of the Work of this Contract, the Contractor shall make any adjustments to the pulleys, belts, and dampers (or the addition of dampers required for correct balance) as recommended by the Testing Agency, at no additional cost to Owner. uu. Perform air pattern tests with smoke bombs in areas requested by the Architect. C. Testing Procedure for Sound Levels. 1. Using recently calibrated instruments, conduct sound level tests in selected areas of the building. Measure sound level readings in decibels on the AA@ and AC@ scales of the General Radio Company sound level meter, or sound level meter that meets the current American Standard (Z24 3) based on the acoustic reference power of DB/ -RE 10. 13W. Readings shall set forth the total random sound level of the selected rooms or areas with the system in operation, as compared to total background sound level with the system not in operation. The system increase over the background level shall be recorded in decibels on the AA@ and AC@ scales. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 183 vv. Identify each outlet by room name, room number, and air outlet number. ww. Measure sound levels in decibels at each diffuser, grille or register in listed areas. Measure sound levels approximately five feet above the floor on a line directly below the center of the diffuser, etc., on the AA@ and AC@ scales of a General Radio Company sound level meter. xx. Tabulate data for all rooms: D. Test and Balance Reports 1. The Test and Balance agency shall prepare and submit six (6) copies of the Test and Balance Analysis report to the owner within five (5) working days of completion. This report shall contain, at a minimum: yy. Project cover sheet zz. AABC Certification credential(s) for the responsible TBE and all technicians involved in the project. aaa. Project summary/general comments bbb. Definitions, Abbreviations, Terminology and Symbols ccc. Calibration certificates for all test equipment used on project including model and serial number. ddd. Table of contents and test forms for all systems. eee. Drawings. The Air Balance Agency shall prepare a complete set of full-scale single line schematic drawings showing actual duct runs and outlet/inlet locations. Drawings shall be keyed to and furnished with the Air Balance Report. The mechanical plans are not acceptable for this purpose. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD version 14 or later format. fff. AABC National performance guaranty 2. Furnish typewritten data for all supply fans tabulating: ggg. Quantity of air in CFM at each air outlet or inlet. hhh. Dry and wet bulb temperatures at each thermostat to the nearest 1/10 of 1 degree. iii. Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperatures, wind direction and velocity, and barometric pressure at the time tests are conducted. jjj. RPM of fan or blower. kkk. RPM of motor. lll. Ampere input of each motor (one reading on each leg if three (3) phase). mmm. No load Amperage and brake horsepower calculations on all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger. nnn. Static pressure in inches water gauge at inlet of fan or blower. ooo. Duct Traverse data. 3. Furnish typewritten data for the Coils tabulating: ppp. Entering and leaving water temperature. qqq. Quantity of air in CFM. rrr. Face velocity in FPM. sss. Dry and wet bulb air temperature entering and leaving coil. ttt. Capacity of coil in BTUH. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 184 Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation PART 1 - GENERAL 1.3 SUMMARY A. This section includes the installing of material and type of material required for the insulation of all mechanical pipes, ducts and equipment. B. Section Includes: 1. Piping system insulation. 2. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders, jackets, and accessories. C. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 230500 and all sections in Division 00, References and Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Division 07 - Penetration Firestop Systems. 3. Division 09 - Paints and Coatings. 4. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 5. Section 230553 – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 6. Section 232113 HVAC Piping. 7. Section 238126 Split System Equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 5. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 6. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 9. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 10. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 185 11. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 12. ASTM C 585, "Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)" 13. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation. 14. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation 15. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 16. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 17. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel. 18. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 19. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). 20. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation. 21. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 22. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 23. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 24. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 25. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 26. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 27. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 186 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum ten years experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Handling: Requirements for transporting, handling, storaging, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. D. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equivalent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. 1.9 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Insulation materials furnished should meet the minimum thickness requirements of National Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (1999), "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings," of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). However, if other factors such as condensation control or personnel protection are to be considered, the selection of the thickness of insulation should satisfy the controlling factor. B. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire hazard requirements of applicable building codes when tested in composite form per one of the following nominally equivalent test methods: 1. American Society for Testing of Materials ASTM E 84 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 723 3. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding the following TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 187 1. Flame spread 25 2. Smoke Developed 50 B. All insulation in areas other than air handling (e.g. inside air ducts, or plenums) or where restricted by local authorities, shall have composite ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding the following 1. Flame spread 25 2. Smoke Developed 150 C. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and asbestos cloth for fittings shall have the same component rating as listed above. D. Insulation shall comply with Federal Specifications HH-I-552, HH-I-562, ASTM C 547-67 and MIL-I-22344B. E. All insulation properties and thicknesses shall comply with applicable codes. In case of conflicts with this specification and the codes, the more stringent of the two shall apply. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Owens Corning, CertainTeed, Johns Manville or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Tape. Wherever tape is used for sealing purposes, it shall be of type and applied as recommended by the nonconductive covering manufacturer. Where recommendation is lacking, the tape used shall be sealed with 3M adhesive EC-1329. B. Insulating Cement. Insulating cement shall be Owens-Corning 110 mineral wool, all purpose cement. Where insulating cement is applied to pipe fittings in concealed locations, it shall be "one coat" cement. C. Pipe Insulation 1. Owens Corning Fiberglas Pipe Insulation with factory applied all-service jacket (ASJ) and two-component adhesive closure system. 2. Pipe insulation shall be multi service type suitable for all lines operating from -0 to 850 degrees F. (-18 to 454 degrees C.). Insulation shall be one piece consisting of glass fibers bonded with phenolic resin and molded into a hollow cylinder covered with a factory applied vapor barrier jacket. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system. It shall be of a type suitable for installation on piping systems. Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547. 3. Thermal conductivity (Btu/hr square foot degrees F./IN) (Watt/Meter-Kelvin) shall not exceed the following: x. At 75 degrees F. (25 degrees C.) mean temperature 0.23 (0.033) TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 188 y. At 100 degrees F. (40 degrees C.) mean temperature 0.25 (0.036) z. At 200 degrees F. (90 degrees C.) mean temperature 0.30 (0.039) 4. Pipe Insulation with factory applied all-service jacket (ASJ) and two-component adhesive closure system, rated for a maximum service temperature of 850 degrees F (454 degrees C). For large pipe sizes where SSL-II is not available, the single adhesive SSL closure may be substituted. Circumferential joints shall be sealed by butt strips having a two-component sealing system. Stapling is not required to complete the closure. When self sealing lap systems are used, sufficient thickness of insulation shall be used to maintain the outer surface temperature of the operating system below +150 degrees F (65 degrees C). Manufacturer's data regarding thickness constraints in relation to operating temperature shall be followed. 5. When multiple layers are required, all inner layer(s) shall be No Wrap. 6. All penetrations of the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. If humidities in excess of 90% are expected, the ASJ shall be protected with either a mastic coating or a suitable vapor retarding outer jacket. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion. 7. Vapor barrier jacket shall be heavy duty all service jacket (ASJ) consisting of laminated aluminum foil, glass reinforcing and kraft paper. Perm rating shall be 0.01. 8. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-formed fiberglass fittings, fabricated sections of Owens Corning Fiberglas Pipe Insulation, Owens Corning Pipe and Tank Insulation, Owens Corning blanket insulation, or insulating cement. Thickness shall be equal to adjacent pipe insulation. Finish shall be with pre-formed PVC fitting covers. aa. Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main pipe section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between the two insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough cut ends shall be coated with suitable weather or vapor resistant mastic as dictated by the system location and service. On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends should be beveled away from bolts for easy access. bb. On cold systems, particular care must be given to vapor sealing the fitting cover or finish to the pipe insulation vapor barrier. All valve stems shall be sealed with caulking to allow free movement of the stem but provide a seal against moisture incursion. 9. Piping located outdoors and exposed to the weather shall be insulated as indicated above except the thickness shall be determined according to the worst weather extremes expected. The insulation shall then be protected with one of the following weatherproof finishes: cc. Metal jacketing shall be 0.016" (0.4 mm) minimum aluminum or stainless steel with moisture barrier, secured in accordance with the jacket manufacturer's recommendations. Joints shall be applied so they will shed water and shall be sealed completely. dd. UV resistant PVC jacketing may be applied in lieu of metal jacketing provided jacketing manufacturer's limitations with regard to pipe size, surface temperature, and thermal expansion and contraction are followed. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 189 ee. Fittings shall be insulated as prescribed above, jacketed with preformed fitting covers matching outer jacketing used on straight pipe sections, with all joints weather sealed. ff. On outdoor chilled water and refrigerant lines, the insulation system shall be completely vapor sealed before the weather-resistant jacket is applied. The outer jacket shall not compromise the vapor barrier by penetration of fasteners, etc. Vapor stops at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion. D. Exterior Pipe Insulation Jackets. 1. Aluminum. Aluminum jacket shall be 0.016 inches (0.406 mm) thick, Type 3003 or 5005 alloys, with 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) longitudinal or circumferential corrugations. Jacket shall have an acceptable factory-applied vapor barrier on the inside and shall be applied using aluminum straps over transverse joints. Corrugations shall match from one section of cover to the other. On vertical runs the upper cover shall lap over the lower cover and the seams shall be toward walls, horizontal seams shall be on the bottom of the run. Fitting and valve jackets shall be factory fabricated and of the same material as the pipe jacket. 2. Plastic. Provide plastic jacketing and fitting covers by Ceel-Co. Jacket thickness shall be 0.028 inches (0.71 mm) and shall be suitable for temperatures from minus 40 to 180 degrees F (40 to 83 degrees C.). Jacketing shall be provided with a minimum 1 inch overlap. All longitudinal and circumferential seams shall be welded together as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide Ceel-Co. Series 330 UVR (Ultraviolet Ray Resistant) PVC plastic jacketing. E. Equipment Exteriors Requiring Vapor Barrier. 1. Glass fiber semi-rigid board insulation. Use 3 pounds per cubic foot (48 kilogram/cubic meter) material of long fiberglass with resin binder. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed. 4 Btu/hr square foot degrees F./IN (0.035 Watt/Meter-Kelvin) at 100 degrees F. (40 degrees C.) mean temperature. Impale grooved and shaped boards on pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm) on center and securely fasten with self-locking metal caps swabbed with vapor barrier mastic, Owens Corning, Type C. 2. All insulation edges and butt joints are to be sealed with Owens Corning Type C pressure sealing tape. Insulation shall be faced with a vapor barrier jacket consisting of laminate of 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) aluminum foil and pre-sized glass cloth. F. Refrigerant Pipe Insulation. 1. All refrigerant suction piping along with all attached fittings and valves shall be insulated with flexible plastic cellular type insulation, intended by the manufacturer for refrigerant service. The insulation shall be factory molded to fit the pipe snugly. The insulation shall be applied and sealed vapor tight in accordance with the manufacturer's Specifications. The wall thickness of the insulation shall be 3/4 inch (20 mm) for low temperature piping and 2 inch (13 mm) for all other temperature systems. The insulation shall meet the requirements of the MIL-P-15280 and MIL-P-24. G. Pre-molded Pipe Fitting Covers. 1. Covers shall be factory-premolded one-piece polyvinyl chloride (PVC.). Covers shall have a snow-white finish and shall withstand surface operating TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 190 temperatures from 35 to 150 degrees F. (2 to 65 degrees C.) continuous usage. All covers shall conform to Federal Specification L-P-535, Composition A, Type II, and shall be Ceel-Co Series 100, Certainteed "snap-form" or Zeston. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. The insulation and materials shall be applied only by mechanics skilled at such Work. The appearance of the finished Work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical correctness and efficiency. Insulation for heating surfaces and piping shall not be applied until such times as those surfaces are sufficiently heated to properly dry out the insulation. Insulation shall not be applied until the system is tested as required. B. Installation: 1. Wherever vapor barriers are specified, all portions of the covering at joints and fittings shall be vapor sealed. 2. Insulation shall be continuous through all walls, floors, and ceilings unless otherwise specified, or shown. 3. Insulate unions, flanges, and valve bodies but not operating hand wheels or levers. 4. Insulation in crawl spaces having dirt floors shall have a vapor barrier jacket. 5. Application of all materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 6. The insulation shall be handled in a manner that will not adversely affect its structural or insulating properties. 7. Support shall be provided for the insulation on vertical lines to prevent the insulation from slipping downward. 8. Care shall be taken so as not to place insulation over vent and drain inlets and outlets. 9. Self sealing laps shall have an additional field applied coat of adhesive applied to the opposite mating surface. gg. Both hot and cold pipe self sealing jacket laps on longitudinal and butt joints shall be stapled at 6 inches (150 mm) maximum spacing (both exposed and concealed). On cold pipe insulation, the staples and the longitudinal and butt edges shall be sealed with mastic. hh. Cold pipelines (-30 to +60 degrees F.) (-34 to 15 degrees C.). Flanges, couplings, unions, valves, anchors and fittings unless otherwise shown shall be insulated with factory premolded, prefabricated or field fabricated sections of insulation of the same material and thickness as the adjoining pipe insulation. (Insulation on valve packages in room-fan-coil units may be omitted where the units are provided with auxiliary drain or drip pans). Anchors, when secured directly to the pipe shall be insulated for a distance to prevent condensation, but not less than 6 inches (l50 mm) from the surface of the pipe insulation. Insulation and vapor barrier shall be extended to cover glands and stem completely. When segments of insulation are used, elbows shall be provided with not less than three segments. When nesting size sections of insulation are used. All voids shall be filled with insulating cement or mineral fiber. Sections of insulation shall be secured in place with wire or by joining the sections with TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 191 adhesive. Vapor barrier coating shall be applied over the insulation in two coats with glass tape or cloth embedded between coats. Cloth or tape shall overlap itself l inch (25 mm) and adjoining insulation jacket 2 inches (50 mm). The coating shall be applied to a total dry film thickness of not less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). In lieu of the above vapor barrier coating, factory-premolded one piece polyvinyl chloride fitting covers may be used, where specified hereinafter. Polyvinyl chloride fitting covers shall be secured by stapling, tack fastening, banding, or taping with vapor barrier tape. Staples or tacks and fitting cover edges shall be sealed with vapor barrier coating, in accordance with the fitting cover manufacturer's recommendations. When polyvinyl chloride fitting covers are used, factory precut blanket inserts provided by the fitting cover manufacturer may be used. Inserts shall be installed in accordance with the fitting cover manufacturer's recommendations. (When required, insulated flanges, couplings, unions, valves, anchors, and fittings shall be covered with preformed or field-fabricated sections of aluminum jacket applied over the vapor barrier and secured with bands). Where unions are shown to be not insulated, the pipe insulation and jacket shall terminate neatly at the ends of the unions. Ends of pipe insulation shall be seated to the pipe with a brush coat of vapor barrier coating at termination points, valves, flanges, and fittings. 10. Pipe Insulation. ii. Pipe insulation shall be as required by applicable codes or as scheduled in Table 23 07 00-1, whichever is more stringent. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be used unless noted otherwise. Where piping is concealed, the jacket can be Kraft paper laminate type in lieu of that specified. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 192 TABLE 23 07 00 - 1 INSULATION THICKNESS FOR NOMINAL PIPE SIZES (INCHES) SYSTEM TEMP RANGE Runout s up to 2 1 AND LESS Chilled 40 - 60 E F (4.5 - 16 E C) 0.5 0.5 <40E F(4.5E C) 1.0 1.0 TABLE 23 07 00 - 2 VALVE AND FITTING JACKETS SYSTEM LOCATION JACKET Chilled Piping All Concealed Glass Cloth and Vapor Barrier or Premolded Cover Chilled Piping All Exposed Premolded Cover Air Handling Unit, and Fan-coil Unit Condensate Drain Piping All Premolded Cover END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 193 Section 232113 - HVAC Piping PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping for refrigeration and condensate.. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Refer to Section 230500 and all sections in Division 00 and Division 01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 2. Refer to Hangers and Supports 230529, Insulation 230700, Identification 230553, Split System Equipment 238126. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Type K Copper ACR refrigeration grade (nitrogen purged and capped) soft annealed or Type K or L hard drawn (as required for pressure rating) on 3/8 and 5/8 inch tubing. Solder joints to be silver brazed (Silfos) with wrought copper solder fittings. Provide flared joints as required. Follow all recommendations by the equipment manufacturer for piping the system. Reflok mechanical joint piping system is also acceptable. B. Condensate drain: Type M hard drawn copper with wrought copper solder fittings & 95/5 tin – antimony (no lead) solder. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION/APPLICATION/PERFORMANCE/ERECTION A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. General. Install refrigerant lines as recommended by the equipment manufacturer properly pitched with oil traps properly sized, located and installed run straight and true. Any oil in any part of the system shall be able to find its way back to the compressor with the system operating on minimum capacity. 2. Field Erected, Evacuated and Charged Piping: a. The Contractor shall utilize the services of a qualified refrigeration mechanic for the installation and testing of refrigerant piping and refrigeration equipment. 1. All refrigeration piping, installation and testing shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI Specification B9.1. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 194 2. All pipe shall be cut with an acceptable type of pipe cutter, and reamed before brazing. Pipe shall pitch sharply toward the reamer during reaming and all cuttings shall be carefully removed after reaming. All moisture and dirt shall be removed from piping before joining as follows. .T 6 A clean, lint-less cloth shall be drawn through the tubing by means of wire or an electrician's tape, to remove all coarse particles of dirt and dust. 3. A clean, lint less cloth saturated with trichloroethylene shall be pulled through pipe, until the saturated cloth is not discolored by dirt. 4. A clean cloth saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, shall be drawn through the tubing. A visual inspection shall be made to see that tubing is perfectly clean. 5. The cleaning shall be completed by pulling through a clean, dry, lintless cloth. 6. All joints shall be brazed. Valves and accessories shall be protected against excessive temperature during brazing. 3. Pre-charged Piping. Install with short radius bends as required for neat and workmanlike installation. When making short radius bends, strip insulation from area and use only a lever type hand bender properly sized for each tube size. Replace all piping that collapses or buckles during installation. Replace insulation and fasten to tubing. B. Condensate drain shall be pitched 1/8 inch per foot straight and true to approved receptor. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping System Leak Tests: 1. Make pressure tests of all piping. 2. Refrigerant Piping: b. Open all isolating valves except those isolating equipment shipped from the factory with refrigerant holding or operating charge. Fill the system with dry nitrogen or "bone dry CO2" to the test pressures specified in ANSI B9.1 and make soap bubble tests at all joints. Carefully repair all leaks. c. Exhaust system to rough vacuum and refill to not less than 50 psig (345 kPa) of refrigerant gas at an ambient temperature of not less than 60 degrees F. (16 degrees C.). Test entire system with a halide leak detector and carefully repair all leaks. d. Evacuate system with a two-stage vacuum pump in first class condition to an absolute pressure not higher than 0.02 mm of mercury valve off pump, and hold for 12 hours minimum. If there is any loss of vacuum readable on a vacuum gage, repeat step 2 above. e. Alternatively, a single stage vacuum pump in first class condition may be used evacuating to 0.10 mm of mercury maximum. Hold vacuum one hour, break vacuum with refrigerant gas to 1-5 psig (7-34 kPa) positive pressure, and re-evacuate to 0.10 minimum. Hold one hour, break, and evacuate a third time to 0.10 mm. f. Open valves to isolate Pre-charged equipment and charge the system. Make final check of all piping and equipment with a halide leak detector. g. Operate the system for the equivalent of eight hours at full load, with refrigerant passing through the driers. Check oil levels frequently and add TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 195 oil whenever required. Use only refrigerant oil in sealed cans furnished by the compressor manufacturer. h. By-pass the refrigerant driers. The system is then ready for normal use. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING. A. Condensate drain piping shall be cleaned by flushing. B. Refrigeration follow equipment manufacturer’s instructions and refrigeration best practices. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 196 Section 238126 – Split System Air Conditioners PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Indoor fan coil air handling unit. 2. Outdoor condensing unit. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Section 232113 - Piping: Execution requirements for connection to refrigeration and drain piping specified by this section. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 4. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 197 D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 – General Closeout Procedures: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Meet minimum Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) of Title 24. B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI Standards. C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Division 01 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. D. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location. 1.8 COORDINATION A. See Division 01. B. Coordinate installation of condensing units with roof structure. C. Coordinate installation of air handling units with building structure and other trades. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Division 01 – General Closeout Procedures: Requirements for warranties. B. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for compressors. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Division 01 – General Closeout Procedures: Requirements for maintenance service. B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. Furnish capability of response time within 4 hours. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 198 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 01 – General Closeout Procedures: Requirements for maintenance materials. B. Furnish one set filters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Mitsubishi, Fugitsu, or approved equal. B. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit accessories, condensate pump, and refrigeration specialties. 1.2 AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. B. Cabinet: 1. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets. 2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet. One inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with adjustable speed high efficiency motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC construction, double-sloped drain pan with piping connections on both sides. E. Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal expansion valve or equal. F. Air Filters: 1 or 2 inch thick glass fiber disposable media. 25 to 30 percent efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1. G. Air Handling Unit Accessories: 1. Discharge Plenum: with construction and finish matching unit casing. Integral grille of aluminum construction and adjustable louvers. 2. Return Air Grille: mounted in return air opening of aluminum construction and fixed louvers. 3. Vibration Isolators: Neoprene-in-shear type. 4. Condensate pump for Mitsubishi: Blue Diamond x87-711/721, 115/230v. 5. Disconnect switch. 1.3 CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 199 B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with rotary, scroll, or hermetic reciprocating type variable speed compressors, resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection. D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins, factory leak and pressure tested. E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts, and control transformer as required, short cycle, oil return, low ambient 24/7, etc. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1. Controls to provide low ambient cooling to 20 degrees F. 2. Time delay relay. 3. Anti-short cycle timer. 4. Disconnect switch. 5. Vibration isolators. 6. Hot gas bypass if required for low ambient 24/7 operation. 7. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety guards. 8. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: 1. Charge of compressor oil. 2. Holding charge of refrigerant. 3. Replaceable core type filter drier. 4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping. 6. Liquid line solenoid valve. 7. Charging valve. 8. Oil level sight glass. 9. Crankcase heater. 10. Hot gas muffler. 11. Pressure relief device. 1.4 CONTROLS A. Provide simple wired controller, for Mitsubishi: PAC YT53CRAU. B. EMS (if applicable) provide supply air temperature sensor and on-off status with fan current sensor to Owner’s system. 1.5 CAPACITY A. See schedule on drawings. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 200 1.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. See schedule on drawings. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted, non-fused type, interlocked with access door, accessible from outside unit, with power lockout capability. PART 3 EXECUTION 1.1 EXAMINATION A. See Division 01. B. Verify pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation. 1.2 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Install condensate pump approved plastic tubing (approximately 3/8 inch) to 1 inch condensate drain header above ceiling. Condensate will flow from there by gravity and spill to mop sink. B. Install and adequately support components furnished loose for field mounting. Install remote wired controller in wall conduit and j-box. C. Provide approved supplemental high wall framing and/or anchor plate and drywall repair to mount indoor unit with approved anchor system. D. Protect the Data Room computer equipment and adjacent room work areas from construction dust and debris. E. Relocate thermostat of existing air conditioning unit to adjacent office room with wiring to match existing. See electrical drawing for conduit and j-box. Verify existing AC is operating properly. F. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. 1.3 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install unit level with approved Hilti Kwik Bolt II expansion anchors to concrete pad. B. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit. C. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. D. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. E. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. F. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 201 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical ****************************************** This Section includes basic materials and methods for grounding and bonding, fastening and supporting, identifying, and demolishing and repair of electrical Work. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This section relies extensively on SpecText II Section 01 00 00. When Project requires more detailed specification statements, use SpecText Section 26 05 26, Section 26 05 29, Section 26 05 53, and Section 02 41 26. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 1 GENERAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A. This division supplements the applicable requirements of other divisions. DEFINITIONS ****************************************** Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** B. For the purpose of Division 26, the following definitions apply: 1. Provide: Furnish and install. 2. Indicated: As shown on the drawings or specified herein. 3. Circuit Designation: Panel designation and circuit number, i.e., LA-13. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 202 SCOPE OF WORK C. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this division, complete, as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all divisions for related work required to be included as work under this division. D. Related Documents: The drawings and specifications are complementary; that is, electrical work indicated on any drawing or in any section of specifications shall be provided as though specified herein and drawn in detail on the E-series drawings. In case of ambiguity or conflict among the documents and rules, regulations or requirements, the most stringent provision or the largest quantity of the highest quality shall apply. 1. General provisions for electrical work. E. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Motors and installation. 2. Control wiring and conduit for heating, ventilating and air conditioning. F. Work Not In Contract (N.I.C.): 1. Telephone instruments. REFERENCE STANDARDS G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). H. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC). I. California State Fire Marshal (CSFM). J. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). K. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). L. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). M. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). N. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). O. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). P. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Q. California Code of Regulations (CCR). TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 203 QUALITY ASSURANCE R. Regulations: All the electrical equipmenet and materials shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) on equipment where such listing exists. Their installations shall also conform to those listings and the following applicable listings and latest codes and standards: 1. National Electric Code, NEC Latest Adopted Edition with California Amendments. 2. Local and State Fire Marshal. 3. Occupational Safety and Healthy Act (OSHA). 4. Requirements of the Serving Utility Company. 5. Local Codes and Ordinances. 6. Requirements of the State of California Division of the State Architect (DSA). 7. California Code of Regulations, Title 24. 8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). S. Variances: In instances where two or more codes are at variance, the most restrictive requirement shall apply. T. Contractor’s Expense: Obtain and pay for all required bonds, insurance, licenses, permits, and pay for all taxes, fees and utility charges required for the electrical work. U. Testing and Adjustment: 1. Perform all necessary tests required to ascertain that the electrical system has been properly installed, that the power supply to each item of equipment is correct, and that the system is free of grounds, ground faults, and open circuits, that all motors are rotating in the proper directions, and such other tests and adjustments as may be required for the proper completion and operation of the electrical system. Insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground shall not be less than 250,000 ohms. 2. Test the input and output voltage of each transformer prior to operation under load, and adjust the output voltage by resetting taps, to achieve the specified values. After the system has been placed under load, test transformers under normal operation. Record the measurement of primary and secondary voltages. Reset taps to within 1/2% if necessary to adjust secondary voltage. Submit a report indicating the final result of such tests, and reporting specific current and voltage measurements. SUBMITTALS V. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01. 1. Detailed shop drawings for: a. Panelboards. b. Switchboards. c. Inverters. d. Fire Alarm System. 2. Detailed manufacturer’s product data for: a. Lighting Fixtures and Associated Equipment. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 204 b. Transformers. c. Disconnect Switches. d. Individually Mounted Circuit Breakers. e. Cabinets. f. Concrete Pull Boxes. g. Isolated Power Panel. h. Occupancy Sensors. 3. Submit calculations for: a. Power System Studies. 4. Submit seismic calculations and anchorage details by a California licensed Professional Structural Engineer for: a. Inverters. b. Floor Standing Distribution Panelboards. c. Transformers - 400 pounds and greater. d. Floor Mounted Switchboards. 5. Submit test result for: a. Transformers. b. Ground Fault System Coordination. c. Inverters. d. Fire Alarm System. e. Isolated Power Panel. 6. Submit operating, maintenance and instructional data for: a. Switchboards. b. Inverters. c. Transfer Switch. d. Fire Alarm System. e. Master TV Antenna System. f. Intercommunication System. g. Music and Public Address System. h. Isolated Power Panel. i. Substations. j. Medium Voltage Switchgear. k. Electronic Circuit Monitors. l. Power Distribution Units (P.D.U.). 7. Instructions Materials: a. Provide at the time the personnel instruction period, instruction manuals for the systems as listed under operating, maintenance, and instructional data. b. Include the following (minimum) information in each copy of the instruction manual: 1) Manufacturer’s names and addresses. 2) Serial numbers of items furnished. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 205 3) Catalog cuts, exploded views and brochures, complete with technical and performance data for all equipment, marked to indicate actual items furnished and the intended use. 4) Recommended maintenance procedures. c. Software documentation for all user programmable products. OWNER’S PERSONNEL INSTRUCTIONS W. Prior to completion of the contract, and at the Owner’s convenience, instruct verbally and demonstrate to the Owner’s personnel, the operation of the systems as listed under operating, maintenance, and instructional data. CLEANING X. Clean exterior surfaces of equipment and remove all dirt, cement, plaster and other debris. Protect interior of equipment from dirt during construction and clean thoroughly before energizing. Y. Clean out cracks, corners and surfaces on equipment to be painted. Remove grease and oil sports so that paint may be applied without further preparation. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Z. Mark Project Record Documents daily to indicate all changes made in the field. 1. In addition to general requirements of Project Record Drawings, indicate on drawings, changes of equipment locations and ratings, trip sizes, and settings on circuit breakers, alterations in raceway runs and sizes, changes in wire sizes, circuit designations, installation details, on-line diagrams, control diagrams and schedules. AA. Use green to indicate deletions and red to indicate additions. BB. At project completion, obtain electronic files of electrical drawings or BIM Model and revise per mark-up. Drawings are to be identified as “Record Drawings”, signed by the contractor and submitted to the Architect/Owner along with project mark-up. 1. Use the same symbols and follow, as much as possible, the same drafting procedures used on the Contract Drawings/Model. CC. Locate underground conduits stubbed-out for future use, and feeder pull box locations using Global Positioning System (GPS) Coordinates and indicating on the Project Record Drawings. DD. Locate changes in directions of underground conduits using GPS coordinates and by indicating on Project Record Drawings. SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS AND UTILITY EE. Coordinate with the Owner the interruption of services necessary to accomplish the work. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 206 FF. Coordinate with the utility company [Owner] all work associated with power and communications distribution systems and service entrance equipment. MINIMUM SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS (ALL WORK DIVISION 26) GG. As a minimum specification requirements, all materials and methods shall comply with applicable governing codes. PENETRATING SEALING HH. Seal penetrations through exterior walls and fire rated walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs per 07 84 00. II. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. Only UL tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Penetrations for the passage of cables, conduit, and other electrical equipment through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. JJ. A manufacturer’s representative shall be on-site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer’s written recommendations published in their literature, drawing details and in accordance with the product listings. KK. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems listed in the UL Fire Resistance Director, unless otherwise noted, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings. 3. 3M Fire Protection Products. PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE LL. Do not energize or place electrical equipment in service until all interested parties have been duly notified and are present or have waived their rights to be present. Where equipment to be placed in service involves service or connection from another contractor of the Owner, notify the Owner in writing when the equipment will be ready. Notify the Owner two weeks in advance of the date the various items of equipment will be complete. OWNER-FURNISHED ITEMS MM. Pick up Owner-furnished items and handle, deliver, install, and make all final connections. 1. Assume responsibility for the items when consigned at the storage facility in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 207 ELECTRIC ITEM LOCATION NN. Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic. Verify equipment sizes with shop drawings and manufacturers’ data and coordinate location layout with other trades. Notify the Owner of any changes of location requirements prior to installation. DEMOLITION ****************************************** Use this article primarily for performance specifying of systems; to identify performance relationship between components and other systems, to specify design criteria, and system performance. Edit the following list to meet Project requirements. Generally two separate electrodes are required. ****************************************** OO. Scope: Provide and perform demolition, preparatory and miscellaneous work as indicated and specified, complete. PP. Principle Items of Work: ****************************************** Review methods specified in following paragraph to assure compatibility with architectural and structural design requirements. ****************************************** 1. Demolition and removal of existing electrical conduit, wiring, and equipment required to complete the project. Demolished materials shall be handled and disposed of in accordance with generally accepted safety procedures and the law. 2. Preparation of the existing building to receive or connect the new work. 3. Miscellaneous demolition, cutting, alteration, and repair work in the existing building necessary for the completion of the entire project. 4. Disconnecting and reconnecting of electrical equipment as required by the construction modifications. 5. Service Continuity: Uninterrupted services, including life safety systems where applicable, shall be maintained to all parts of the building other than work areas. Schedules shutdowns with the Owner to make alterations and/or additions. QQ. Existing Conditions: Make a detailed survey of the existing conditions pertaining to the work. Check the locations of all existing structures, equipment and wiring (branch circuiting and controls). ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 208 Typically, keep the first paragraph below and delete remainder of this article if working with an Architect. Coordinate with Architect before editing this article. If there is no Architect involved in the project or if directed to do so by the Architect, delete the first paragraph below, and select from the remaining paragraphs in this article as suits the project requirements. ****************************************** RR. Salvage and Disposal: All removed material other than items to be reused, shall be returned to the Owner or disposed of in accordance with instructions from the Owner’s representative. ****************************************** Use below only where applicable authorities have special approval requirements. ****************************************** PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 209 Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections ****************************************** This Section includes wiring connections to equipment specified in other sections. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 4 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. REFERENCES ****************************************** List reference standards included within text of this section. Edit the following for Project conditions. ****************************************** C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. SUBMITTALS ****************************************** Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 210 ****************************************** D. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. E. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. F. Manufacturer's installation instructions. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS G. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. COORDINATION I. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. J. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. K. Determine connection locations and requirements. L. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. M. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART 5 PRODUCTS CORD AND PLUGS ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** A. Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** B. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 211 C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment. ****************************************** Specify Type SJO (hard usage), Type SO (extra hard usage), or other special cord type to meet Project conditions. ****************************************** D. Cord Construction: Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. E. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 6 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. INSTALLATION C. Make electrical connections. D. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. E. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. F. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. G. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug. H. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. I. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. K. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 212 Include the following paragraph when applicable. Add similar requirements for other equipment included in Project. ****************************************** ADJUSTING L. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. M. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 213 Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ****************************************** This Section includes building wire and cable with insulation rated 600 volts and less. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 7 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes building wire and cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire identification. 2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Execution requirements for trenching required by this section. 3. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Requirements for backfill to be placed by this section. REFERENCES ****************************************** List reference standards included within text of this section. Edit the following for Project conditions. ****************************************** C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. D. National Fire Protection Association: TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 214 1. 2013 California Electrical Code with 2013 Amendments. 2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 3. California Code of Regulations. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1277 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ****************************************** Use this article carefully; restrict statements to describe components used to assemble system. Do not repeat statements made in SUMMARY Article, ”Section Includes” paragraph. Use this article when necessary to restrict wiring methods in addition to specified Regulatory Requirements. Select insulation types when not specified in PART 2. ****************************************** F. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. 5. Increase wire size in branch circuits to limit voltage drop to a maximum of 2 (two) percent. G. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Use only building wire , Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 215 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ****************************************** Use this article carefully; restrict statements to identify system design requirements only. Use the following paragraph when both aluminum and copper conductors are to be included in Project. ****************************************** H. Conductor sizes are based on copper. ****************************************** Use the following paragraph when specification allows substitution of aluminum for copper conductors. ****************************************** SUBMITTALS ****************************************** Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements. ****************************************** I. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. J. Product Data: Submit for building wire. ****************************************** Use this paragraph to require samples of cable assemblies taken from product delivered to project. ****************************************** CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS K. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. L. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. QUALITY ASSURANCE M. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when tested in accordance with NFPA 262. N. Perform Work in accordance with CUSD Chaffey Unified School District standard. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 216 ****************************************** Include the following paragraph only when cost of acquiring specified standards is justified. ****************************************** O. Maintain one copy of document on site. QUALIFICATIONS P. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. FIELD MEASUREMENTS Q. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. COORDINATION R. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination. S. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required. ****************************************** Include and edit last sentence of the following Paragraph to ensure change in routing (before rough-in) of wire and cable is included in the Work; select reasonable tolerance. Including this statement may provide basis for claim for extra compensation when wire or cable length exceeds specified tolerance. ****************************************** T. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. PART 8 PRODUCTS BUILDING WIRE ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire. 2. Essex. 3. General Cable. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 217 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. ****************************************** B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire. ****************************************** Use second paragraph below when aluminum wiring is acceptable. ****************************************** C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. E. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C. F. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. METAL CLAD CABLE ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** G. Manufacturers: 1. AFC. 2. Southwire. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. Use second paragraph below when aluminum wiring is acceptable. ****************************************** H. Conductor: Copper. I. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 218 J. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C. K. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. L. Armor Material: Steel. M. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape. ****************************************** Specify locations required in Part 3 when third option in the following paragraph is selected. ****************************************** N. Jacket: None. TERMINATIONS O. Terminal Lugs for Wires 6 AWG and Smaller: Solderless, compression type copper. P. Lugs for Wires 4 AWG and Larger: Color keyed, compression type copper, with insulating sealing collars. PART 9 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather. C. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported. PREPARATION ****************************************** Use the following paragraph when building wire for installation in conduit is included. ****************************************** E. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. INSTALLATION F. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions. G. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 219 ****************************************** Specify color code requirements by system and phase in Section 26 05 53. ****************************************** H. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. I. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment. J. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. K. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. ****************************************** Use the following two subparagraphs when aluminum conductors are to be included in Project. ****************************************** L. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. Install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws. M. Install terminal lugs on ends of 600 volt wires unless lugs are furnished on connected device, such as circuit breakers. N. Size lugs in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations terminating wire sizes. Install 2-hole type lugs to connect wires 4 AWG and larger to copper bus bars. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 220 O. For terminal lugs fastened together such as on motors, transformers, and other apparatus, or when space between studs is small enough that lugs can turn and touch each other, insulate for dielectric strength of 2-1/2 times normal potential of circuit. WIRE COLOR P. General: 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows: a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase. Q. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number. R. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded. S. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase. T. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL U. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. ****************************************** NETA ATS refers to specific ANSI standards and includes procedures and acceptable values for acceptance testing electrical equipment in accordance with those standards. Section 4 of NETA ATS stipulates division of responsibility conflicting with conditions of the contract or general requirements. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 221 V. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. W. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 222 Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ****************************************** This Section includes basic materials and methods for fastening and supporting electrical products and equipment. Also included is firestopping of electrical Work. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 10 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. ****************************************** Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** 6. Equipment bases and supports. REFERENCES ****************************************** List reference standards included within text of this section. Edit the following for Project conditions. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 223 B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. C. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation. D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. 2013 California Electrical Code with 2013 Amendments. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory. F. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ****************************************** Use this article carefully; restrict statements to describe components used to assemble system. Do not repeat statements made in SUMMARY Article; “Section includes” paragraph. Select the following primary performance criteria specifically required for Project. Edit subject text to suit particular material being utilized. Typically, keep the first paragraph below and delete remainder of this article if working with an Architect. Coordinate with Architect before editing this article. If there is no Architect involved in the project or if directed to do so by the Architect, delete the first paragraph below, and select from the remaining paragraphs in this article as suits the project requirements. ****************************************** ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 224 In the following paragraph, referenced FM, UL, or WH Design Number can be indicated in paragraph below, in schedule at end of this section, or noted on Drawings. ****************************************** G. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components. QUALIFICATIONS H. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. I. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience approved by manufacturer. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS J. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING K. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification. L. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging. ****************************************** Application temperature for multi-component foams is critical; consult product data. Inert stuffing insulation can usually be applied at any temperature; delete this article accordingly. Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** PART 11 PRODUCTS CONDUIT SUPPORTS ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this project. ****************************************** ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 225 Most anchors, fasteners, and supporting devices used for electrical work are commodity type items not requiring further specification for most projects. When further product specifications are needed, edit the following and add additional paragraphs. ****************************************** A. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut. 2. Caddy. 3. O-Z Gedney. 4. Substitutions: Per Division 01 requirements. B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads. C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel. D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten. E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits. F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F Self locking. FORMED STEEL CHANNEL ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** G. Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut. 2. Globe Strut. 3. Power Strut. 4. Substitutions: Per Division 01 requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** H. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 226 SPRING STEEL CLIPS ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** I. Manufacturers: 1. Caddy. 2. Substitutions: Per Division 01 requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. ****************************************** J. Product Description: Mounting hole and screw closure. SLEEVES K. Sleeves for Conduit Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. L. Sleeves for Conduit Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed. M. Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible. MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS N. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. FIRESTOPPING ****************************************** Typically, keep the first paragraph below and delete remainder of this article if working with an Architect. Coordinate with Architect before editing this article. If there is no Architect involved in the project or if directed to do so by the Architect, delete the first paragraph below, and select from the remaining paragraphs in this article as suits the project requirements. ****************************************** O. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 07 84 00. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 227 ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers products specified above. ****************************************** ****************************************** Include this paragraph only where visible color is of concern. Final cured color of firestopping material can also be indicator as to correct mix formulation and expected performance of material. ****************************************** PART 12 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves. ****************************************** Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ****************************************** Review methods specified in following paragraph to assure compatibility with architectural and structural design requirements. ****************************************** C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 228 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. D. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC. E. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. F. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers. G. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from galvanized structural steel or galvanized formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor. INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING ****************************************** Typically, keep the first paragraph below and delete remainder of this article if working with an Architect. Coordinate with Architect before editing this article. If there is no Architect involved in the project or if directed to do so by the Architect, delete the first paragraph below, and select from the remaining paragraphs in this article as suits the project requirements. ****************************************** H. Firestopping Materials: Comply with requirements of Division 07. ****************************************** Select and edit paragraphs of this article to suit type of firestopping material specified. ****************************************** ****************************************** Select and edit one or more of the following paragraphs for Project requirements. ****************************************** INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS I. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 229 J. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. K. Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. INSTALLATION - SLEEVES L. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links. M. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam. N. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. O. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. P. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. Q. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. R. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL S. Division 01 - Quality Requirements. ****************************************** Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** CLEANING T. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning. ****************************************** Delete firestopping requirements if firestopping is to be specified in Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK U. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. V. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 230 END OF SECTION Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems ****************************************** This Section includes raceway and boxes for electrical power and control wiring. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 13 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections. 2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 34 - Floor Boxes for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems. 6. Section 26 05 39 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems. 7. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. 8. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures. 9. Section 26 27 23 - Indoor Service Poles. 10. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 11. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems. 12. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems. 13. Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic Safety and Security. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 231 14. Section 28 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electronic Safety and Security. ****************************************** This section’s title implies the following products are included. Use this article to clarify correct section where for those products are specified. ****************************************** 15. Section 33 71 19 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes. REFERENCES ****************************************** List reference standards included within text of this section. Edit the following for Project conditions. ****************************************** C. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC). D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ****************************************** Use this article carefully; restrict statements to describe where products are installed or used, and to complement information indicated on Drawings. Do not repeat statements made in SUMMARY article; “Section Includes” paragraph. ****************************************** E. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 232 requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. F. Underground More than 5 feetoutside Foundation Wall: Provide , thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Pre-cast concrete boxes nonmetallic handhole. G. Underground Within 5 feetfrom Foundation Wall: Provide , thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide pre-cast concrete boxes. H. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide , thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes. I. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal conduit and electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal, pull, and junction boxes. J. In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit , intermediate metal conduit , electrical metallic tubing and thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast boxes. K. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal conduit , electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. L. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal conduit , electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. M. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit , intermediate metal conduit , electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ****************************************** Use this article carefully; restrict statements to identify system design requirements only. ****************************************** N. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inchunless otherwise specified. O. 1/2" conduits is acceptable for final connections to lighting fixtures. SUBMITTALS ****************************************** Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements. ****************************************** P. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 233 Q. Product Data: Submit for the following: ****************************************** Edit the following list to match Project needs for product data submittals. ****************************************** 1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Nonmetallic conduit. 4. Raceway fittings. 5. Conduit bodies. 6. Surface raceway. 7. Wireway. 8. Pull and junction boxes. 9. Handholes. R. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS S. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. T. Project Record Documents: ****************************************** Insert appropriate size requirement in blank below. ****************************************** 1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING U. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. V. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. W. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. COORDINATION X. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 234 Y. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 26 05 03. Z. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. PART 14 PRODUCTS METAL CONDUIT ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit. 2. Wheatland Tube Company. 3. Thomas and Betts Corporation. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** F. Manufacturers: 1. Rob Roy Industries. 2. Thomas and Betts Corporation. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 235 ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** G. Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating,40 milthick. H. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** I. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire Company. 2. AFC Cable Systems. 3. Appleton Electric. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** J. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction. K. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** L. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Southwire Company. 3. Appleton Electric. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 236 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** M. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. N. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** O. Manufacturers: 1. Wostorn Tube and Conduit. 2. Wheatland Tube Company. 3. Carlon. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** P. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. Q. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel, compression type. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** R. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon. 2. Appleton Electric. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 237 ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** S. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. T. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. SURFACE METAL RACEWAY ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** U. Manufacturers: 1. Schneidor Electric. 2. Wiremold. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** V. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover, suitable for use as surface metal raceway. ****************************************** Delete the following paragraph when size is indicated on Drawings or is to be determined by Contractor. ****************************************** W. Size: 2x4 inch ****************************************** Edit to select enameled steel, stainless steel, or special material and finish; edit and fill in appropriate requirements. Verify manufacturers are capable of furnishing special finishes. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 238 X. Finish: Stainless steel. Y. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's standard accessories; match finish on raceway. WIREWAY ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** Z. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric. 2. Hoffman. 3. Wiremold. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** AA. Product Description: [General purpose] [Oiltight and dust-tight] [Raintight] type wireway. BB. Knockouts: None. ****************************************** Delete the following paragraph when size is indicated on Drawings or is to be determined by Contractor. ****************************************** CC. Size: 4 x 4 inchor 6 x 6 inch length as indicated on Drawings. DD. Cover: Screw cover. EE. Connector: Flanged. FF. Fittings: Lay-in type. GG. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. OUTLET BOXES ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 239 In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** HH. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Emerson Electric. 3. Thomas and Betts Corporation. 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** II. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inchmale fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. ****************************************** Consult box manufacturer for limitations of aluminum fittings with steel raceway. Specify accordingly. Specify threaded hubs to eliminate drilling and tapping in field. ****************************************** JJ. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs. KK. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. LL. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** MM. Manufacturers: 1. Raco. 2. Hoffman. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 240 Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** NN. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. OO. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16. ****************************************** Type 4 enclosure is suitable for indoor and outdoor locations to provide protection against wind blown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose directed water. Type 4X enclosure is corrosion resistant. Type 6 enclosure is suitable for indoor and outdoor use to protect against entry of water during occasional temporary submersion at limited depth. Choose galvanized iron or cast aluminum in consideration of corrosive atmospheres and raceway system materials. ****************************************** PP. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. ****************************************** Select outside or inside flange to meet installation requirements. ****************************************** PART 15 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough- in. INSTALLATION ****************************************** Use the following paragraph when state or municipal standard applies, and edit remaining article to avoid conflict with standard’s requirements. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 241 ****************************************** C. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26. D. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. F. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. INSTALLATION - RACEWAY G. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. H. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. I. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. J. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. K. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports L. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. M. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29. N. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. O. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. P. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. Q. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch Do not cross conduits in slab larger than 1/2 inch R. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. S. Maintain 12 inchclearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F T. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. U. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 242 V. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes. W. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. X. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inchsize. Y. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. Z. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic and expansion joints. AA. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. BB. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. CC. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level. Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. DD. Close ends and unused openings in wireway. INSTALLATION - BOXES EE. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings. ****************************************** Include and edit last sentence of this subparagraph to assure change in location (before rough-in) of an outlet is included in the Work; select reasonable distance. Including this statement may also provide basis for claim for extra compensation when outlet location is more than specified distance from location shown. ****************************************** FF. Adjust box location up to 10 feetprior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose. GG. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. HH. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. II. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 12inchesfrom ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 243 Edit each of remaining subparagraphs of this article to establish appropriate level of quality and to delete provisions not applicable. ****************************************** JJ. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. KK. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inchesseparation. Install with minimum 24 inchesseparation in acoustic rated walls. LL. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. MM. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. NN. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. OO. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. PP. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. QQ. Support boxes independently of conduit. RR. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. SS. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS ****************************************** Include or verify appropriate fire stopping materials and methods are specified. ****************************************** TT. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07 84 00. ****************************************** Insert appropriate section number based on type of roof. ****************************************** UU. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified in Section. VV. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 244 WW. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. XX. For roof mounted HVAC equipment stub conduits up within curb of units to avoid unnecessary roof penetrations. ADJUSTING YY. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:Testing, adjusting, and balancing. ZZ. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. AAA. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. CLEANING BBB. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. CCC. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. DDD. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 245 Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems ****************************************** This Section includes identification methods for electrical equipment and components. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicts among requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 16 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 2. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems. 3. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and Security. SUBMITTALS ****************************************** Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements. ****************************************** C. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 246 D. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function. ****************************************** Include the following paragraph for submission of physical samples for selection of finish, color, texture, and other properties. ****************************************** E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS F. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers. QUALITY ASSURANCE H. Perform Work in accordance with CUSD Chaffey Unified School District standard. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. J. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage. K. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. L. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS M. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. N. Install labels only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer. PART 17 PRODUCTS NAMEPLATES ****************************************** TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 247 In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** A. Main Switchboard 1. Example: a. Line #1 HV 1/2" high characters. b. Line #2 277/480V, 3Ph, 4W 3/8” high characters. B. Panels 1. Example: a. Line #1 HA 1/4" high characters b. Line #2 277/480V, 3Ph, 4W 3/16” high characters c. Line #3 HV-6 3/16” high characters C. Mechanical Equipment 1. Example: a. Line #1 AHU-1 1/4" high characters b. Line #2 480V, 3Ph, 3W3/16” high characters Voltage. c. Line #3 HV-13 3/16” high characters D. Control Cabinets 1. Example: a. Line #1 CONTROL CABINET 1/2" high characters b. Line #2 ICA 3/8” high characters. E. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch. F. Furnish materials in accordance with of CUSD Chaffey Unified School District standards. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. ****************************************** G. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on black contrasting background color. H. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inchhigh letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. 1/4 inchhigh letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. ****************************************** Specify requirements for letter sizes for other applications. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 248 ****************************************** I. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch WIRE MARKERS ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** J. Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Seton. 3. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. ****************************************** K. Description: Cloth tape , split sleeve , or tubing type wire markers. L. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on [schematic and interconnection diagrams.] [shop drawings.] [Drawings.] ****************************************** Describe legends required for other wire and cable applications. ****************************************** CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS ****************************************** In this article, list manufacturers acceptable for this Project. ****************************************** ****************************************** Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers’ products specified above. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 249 ****************************************** M. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 2. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. ****************************************** Describe requirements for color of markers for other systems. ****************************************** 3. Emergency System: White lettering on red background. PART 18 EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00. INSTALLATION C. Install identifying devices after completion of painting. D. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. 5. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. Transformers. d. Disconnects. E. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations, and <____________________>. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. F. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters , pull boxes , outlet and junction boxes , and each load connection. TMC CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS 250 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run. 3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on Drawings. G. Conduit Marker Installation: 1. Install conduit marker for each conduit longer than 6 feet 2. Conduit Marker Spacing: 20 feeton center. 3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet b. Paint bands 20 feeton center. c. Color: 1) 480 Volt System: Blue. 2) 208 Volt System: Yellow. ****************************************** Describe requirements for paint color for other systems. ****************************************** 3) Fire Alarm System: Red. 4) Telephone System: Green. 5) Emergency System: Orange. H. Stencil Installation: 1. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00. I. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inchesbelow finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable. END OF SECTION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards ****************************************** This Section includes enclosed fusible switch and circuit breaker panelboards for feeders, and circuit breaker type lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. Manufacturers found in SpecAgent for this Section were identified as representative and not as an endorsement for meeting the requirements of this specification. This Section includes performance, proprietary, and descriptive type specifications. Edit to avoid conflicting requirements. This Section includes the term Architect/Engineer. "Architect" is used in AIA contract documents; "Engineer" is used in EJCDC contract documents. Retain appropriate term. See the Drawing Coordination Considerations for information needed to coordinate this specification Section with the Drawings. ****************************************** PART 19 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards. 2. Load centers. B. Related Requirements: ****************************************** List other sections directly affecting work of this section. Include sections specifying information expected to be found in this section and sections required to describe complete system or assembly requirements. ****************************************** 1. 2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems. ****************************************** List other sections directly affecting work of this section. Include sections specifying information expected to be found in this section and sections required to describe complete system or assembly requirements. ****************************************** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) REFERENCE STANDARDS ****************************************** List reference standards included within text of this section. Edit the following for Project conditions. ****************************************** C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. E. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes 2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit- Breaker Enclosures. 4. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 5. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 6. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters. SUBMITTALS ****************************************** Only request submittals needed to verify compliance with Project requirements. ****************************************** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) H. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. I. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products. J. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. K. Source Quality control submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections. L. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor furnished tests and inspections. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS M. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. N. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements. O. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS P. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Q. Extra Stock Materials: 1. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner’s current keying system. QUALITY ASSURANCE R. Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. S. Enclosures shall be manufactured by same manufacturer as circuit breakers. PART 20 PRODUCTS BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Schneider Electric - Square D. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. ****************************************** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) Edit the following descriptive specifications to identify Project requirements and to eliminate conflicts with manufacturers specified above. ****************************************** B. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. C. Materials: 1. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard; furnish insulated ground bus as indicated on Drawings. 2. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated copper, solid neutral. 3. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on Drawings. 4. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Provide UL class 760 arc- fault interrupter circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. ****************************************** Include the following paragraph when current limiting circuit breakers are part of Project. ****************************************** 5. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 6. Cabinet Box: 6 inchesdeep, 20 incheswide. D. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface as indicated. Cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finishes: 1. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 21 EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Install panelboards plumb. C. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. D. Height: 6 feetto top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feetwith bottom no more than 4 inchesabove floor. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. Identify each circuit as to its clear, evident and specific purpose of use. G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53. H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 1 empty 1 inch for each 3 spare ciruit breakers or spaces Identify each as SPARE. I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL J. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. K. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. ****************************************** NETA ATS refers to specific ANSI standards and includes procedures and acceptable values for acceptance testing electrical equipment in accordance with those standards. Section 4 of NETA ATS stipulates division of responsibility possibly conflicting with conditions of the contract or general requirements. ****************************************** L. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. M. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6. N. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. O. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1. ADJUSTING P. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. Q. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. CLEANING R. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) END OF SECTION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Section 311000 – Site Clearing PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Clearing of site. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Division 31 Section "Grading". B. Division 32 Section “Asphalt Concrete Paving”. C. Division 32 Section “Site Concrete Work”. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Clearing: Removal of trees, shrubs, bushes, and other organic matter found at or above original ground level. B. Grubbing: Removal of stumps, roots, boards, logs, and other organic matter found at or below original ground level. C. Topping: Removal of those portions of trees, bushes, and shrubs projecting above an elevation or plane shown or indicated on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide all materials, equipment, and appurtenances required for completion of clearing work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work of this Section. B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) 3.2 PROTECTION A. Public and Adjacent Properties: Protect in accord with applicable laws and ordinances. B. Existing on-site features, including flora scheduled to remain: Protect from damage at all times. 1. Do not allow earth-moving equipment within the branch spread perimeter (drip line) of existing trees which are to remain. 2. Do not impact, trespass upon, or otherwise violate areas designated on Drawings as easements, buffer zones, wetlands, or similar environmentally-sensitive areas. 3. Protect existing piezometers and monitoring wells located on-site which have been identified and flagged by Owner. C. Utilities: 1. Protect all active utility lines on-site. 2. Remove from site abandoned lines encountered during clearing and grubbing operations. 3. Capping and/or rerouting of active utility lines encountered during clearing and grubbing operations shall be performed as part of the work of other Sections. 4. Expeditiously repair damaged utilities at no cost to Owner. D. Dust control: 1. Throughout entire construction period, effectively dust-palliate working area, unpaved roads, and involved portions of the site. 2. Palliation: Intermittently water and sprinkle with such frequency as will satisfactorily allay dust at all times. Chemical treatment of any type is not permitted. 3. Use of reclaimed water shall conform to requirements and guidelines of governing health authorities and be specifically approved by Owner. E. Soil redistribution: Do not redistribute existing soils beyond immediate area of origin. 3.3 CLEARING A. Limit of Clearing: Areas indicated on Drawings. Clearing limits shall be approved by Owner prior to starting clearing operations. B. Remove trees, saplings, shrubs, bushes, vines, and undergrowth within limits of clearing. 3.4 GRUBBING A. Limits of grubbing: As specified for clearing. B. Remove tree stumps and root systems completely, unless removal damages roots of plants to remain. Refer to Division 31 Section "Excavation and Fill for Utilities" for protection of existing plants to remain. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT CENTER (TMC) C. For vegetation other than trees, remove stumps, roots, and matted roots to depths specified below: 1. Under footings: 18 inches. 2. Under walks: 12 inches. 3. Under roads: 18 inches. 4. Under parking areas: 12 inches. 5. Under planting areas: 12 inches. 6. Under fills: 8 inches. 7. Where footings, roads, walks, and other construction is on fill, the greater depth applies. 3.5 DISPOSAL A. Burning of materials on-site is not permitted. B. Removal: 1. Remove materials resulting from clearing and grubbing operations from site daily as they accumulate. 2. When work continues beyond normal working hours, do not allow materials to accumulate on-site for more than 48 hours. 3.6 TREE REMOVAL, RELOCATION, OR SALVAGE A. Protect trees from damage until Owner removes trees indicated on Drawings to be salvaged or removed by Owner. B. Cut and remove other trees from site unless designated on Drawings to remain or be relocated. C. Verify with Owner which trees are to be salvaged, removed, or relocated. END OF SECTION